JP2021053448A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which enables a player to easily grasp a state advantageous to the player and can vary a game state related to an AT lottery while reducing a risk of the player's missing it.SOLUTION: There are a "normal advantageous" state and a "GG" (ART) state where a possibility of navigation is higher than the "normal advantageous" state as a normal section where no navigation is performed and navigation of a pressing order bell is possible when an advantageous section shift lottery is won. The "normal advantageous" state includes, as normal modes, "low-probability," "Heaven preparation," "Heaven," "Super Heaven," "Hades," and "next time precursor." The normal section is higher in possibility to shift to the "GG" state ("GG" winning probability) than modes of "low-probability" and "Heaven preparation" in the "normal advantageous" state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 152

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachislot machine.

Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted by a player (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate gaming machines are known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2015-16805

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of accurately outputting information on a gaming state to an external device.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.
The gaming machine according to the present invention
A role-determining means that can determine the winning role from multiple roles,
A transition decision means for making decisions regarding the transition of the gaming state, and
A state control means for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the predetermined decision made by the transition determining means, and
A notification means capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and
An output means that can output a signal to the outside and
With
When the notification target combination, which is the notification target combination, is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state, the notification means can notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player.
The second game state is a game state in which one or a plurality of sets of unit notification games can be performed with a period until a predetermined end condition is satisfied as one set.
When the execution of the unit notification game of the next set is permitted, the state control means can start the unit notification game of the next set after the unit notification game of one set is completed.
Further, the state control means may shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a predetermined period has elapsed since the predetermined determination was made by the transition determining means.
In the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the determination regarding the degree of advantage of the second gaming state that is started after the end of the predetermined period.
The output means can output a predetermined signal to the outside when the predetermined period elapses after the predetermined determination is made by the transition determination means, and the state control means starts the next set of unit notification games. When this is done, a predetermined signal can be output to the outside.
Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is
The output means outputs different signals to the outside when the predetermined period elapses after the predetermined determination is made by the transition determination means and when the next set of unit notification game is started by the state control means. It is characterized by doing.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be executed. Board 71) and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of "GG" (ART)) that can shift from one advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state is provided.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
The modes in the first advantageous state include the first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "preparation for heaven" in the normal mode) and the second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven", and "underworld" in the normal mode. , "Next precursor") and at least
The second mode is more likely to shift to the second advantageous state than the first mode.
The general state is characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "GG") is higher than that of the first mode.

According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the state shifts to the second advantageous state. A first mode and a second mode are provided, which have different possibilities. Then, since the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the general state is higher than the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first mode of the first advantageous state, the player may be notified. Even in a general state where it is not possible, the game can be played while expecting a transition to the second advantageous state, making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, and reducing the risk of the player overlooking the so-called AT. It is possible to make various game states related to lottery.

According to the present invention, information on the gaming state can be accurately output to an external device.

It is a figure which shows the functional flow of the pachislot machine which concerns on embodiment of this invention. It is an overall perspective view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is an overall front view which shows the external structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a schematic layout drawing inside the housing of the pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the said pachislot machine. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the positional relationship between a projector mechanism and a mirror mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the mounting state of the mirror mechanism. It is a vertical sectional view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is a front view of a display unit. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is an exploded perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state of the opening for operation. It is a perspective view of a display unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the fixed screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the irradiation state to the rear screen mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of the front screen mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which removed the right side plate of the screen housing. It is a perspective view of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operating state of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation process of the right front screen drive mechanism. It is a figure which shows a part of the display screen displayed on the sub display device of the pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the auxiliary control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the comparison table of the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination which can be stopped and displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the abbreviation of the winning role in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CZ lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the mode-up lottery table in CZ1 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the point-up lottery table in CZ2 stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART lottery table in CZ stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in a normal ART in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the ART level determination table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table in ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in a normal ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CT in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table during CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which adds the number of sets in CT stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the bonus in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the bonus type lottery table stored in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the lottery table which added the number of ART games in the bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the CT lottery table at the end of a bonus stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the exceptional game in the general game state in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table during non-ART stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the main control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the control process according to the state of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the flag conversion process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the normal middle start processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the processing at the start in CZ of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ1 (CZ2) middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ3 middle processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of a normal ART of the pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of CT of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the process at the start of BB of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop initial setting process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the reel stop control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the BB check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the RT check process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the CZ / ART end processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-side navigation control processing of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the player registration process of the said pachislot machine. It is a flowchart which shows the history management process of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the transition example of the display screen of the sub display device of the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT omen in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination in the said pachislot machine, and the symbol combination actually displayed. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the game state in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the actually displayed symbol combination in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in normal ART stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in ART which is stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game during CT in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flag conversion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CT meter promotion lottery table in CT stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition lottery table in CT which is stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in CZ in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ2 end lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the lock lottery table stored in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow of the game in the CT omen in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the content of the notification during the MB flag in the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in a pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the lock state and notification in the pachislot machine of a modification. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the notification performed on the main side and the notification performed on the sub side in the modified example pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the notification performed on the sub side in the pachislot machine of the modified example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the main control board of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the ratio indicator of the said pachislot machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of the information display of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the lighting timing of the state indicator in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the notification method of the presence or absence of the winning of the transition lottery to a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the basic game flow of the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of each game state which the pachislot machine has. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table and the transition lottery table stored in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the realization method of CZ in the case of performing the transition lottery to an ART game state with a uniquely determined probability. It is a figure which shows the counting method of the limit game in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the limit processing of the specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the method of the navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the pattern example of the signal output timing to an external device in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the production in cooperation with the external device performed in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the navigation securing method in a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the precursor realization method using a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the saving method of the navigation number in the case of executing the specific section of the navigation number management in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the production example when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the game when the lip navigator and the bell navigator are managed individually in a specific section in the pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection method of CZ with a different end period in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the reel control method at the time of starting a specific section in the said pachislot machine. It is a figure which shows the content of control at the time of setting change in the said pachislot machine. This is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the process during MB operation in the ball ejection state. It is a figure which shows the outline of the payout state and the game state in a list. It is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachislot machine of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table. It is a figure which shows the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table. It is a figure which shows the usually advantageous_GG lottery table. It is a figure which shows the drawing table which usually ends advantageous section | advantage section. It is a figure which shows the common_end advantageous section end lottery table. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 1. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the advantageous section which concerns on Example 1. FIG. It is a figure for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section of the specification example 1 and the embodiment 1. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the end of the advantageous section which concerns on specification example 2. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow at the end of the advantageous section which concerns on Example 2. FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining after the power is turned on when there is no setting change and after the power is turned on when the setting is changed as the third embodiment. It is a transition flow of the game state which concerns on the modification of another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the state of the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp which concerns on the modification of another embodiment in a list.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine showing an embodiment of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, it is not limited to game machines that pay out game media, but is applied to enclosed game machines that enclose game media such as game balls and give benefits as electronic data such as points earned when predetermined grant conditions are met. It is also possible to do. Further, in the present embodiment, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as "AT"), which is a function for navigating the formation of a specific small winning combination with a lamp or the like, and a function in which the replay probability is higher than usual during a specific number of plays. A pachislot machine having an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) function in which the RT and the RT are operated at the same time will be described.

[Functional flow of pachislot machines]
As shown in FIG. 1, in the pachislot machine 1, when a medal is inserted by a player and the start lever 6 is operated, one value (for example, 0 to 65535) is obtained from a random number in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535). Hereafter, a random number value) is extracted.

The internal winning combination determining means (main CPU 31 described later) draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. That is, the internal winning combination determining means has a predetermined winning probability from a plurality of combinations based on the detection of the start operation of the unit game with respect to the start lever 6 by the start switch 6S (see FIG. 30) (establishment of a predetermined start condition). To determine the internal winning role.

By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the winning line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, and bonus operation are given to the player, and other so-called "losses". Such things are provided.

Subsequently, after the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotated, when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed by the player, the reel stop control means (main CPU 31, described later, motor drive circuit described later). 39, the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R) described later control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are pressed. Do.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are pressed. .. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R within the specified time is called the "number of sliding pieces", and the maximum number thereof is equivalent to four symbols (maximum number of sliding pieces). ).

When the internal winning combination that allows the display of the combination of symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means uses the above-mentioned specified time to set the combination of the symbols to the winning line (hereinafter, "effective line"). The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces so as to be displayed as much as possible.

On the other hand, for combinations of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination, the reels are used within the maximum number of sliding pieces so that they will not be displayed along the effective line using the above specified time. Stop the rotation of 3L, 3C and 3R.

In this way, when all the rotations of the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped, the winning determination means (main CPU 31 described later) determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line is related to the winning. Judge whether or not.

That is, the winning determination means determines the winning or non-winning of the winning combination based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the effective line based on the fact that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped by the reel stop control means.

When it is determined that the prize is related to a prize, the player is given a privilege such as paying out a medal. The above-mentioned series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) in the pachislot machine 1.

In the present embodiment, the reel stop operation (operation of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that is first performed when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating is the first stop operation and the first stop operation. The stop operation performed after the stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the stop operation performed after the second stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the series of flows described above, various effects can be produced by using the light (video) output performed by the display unit 100, the sound output performed by the speakers 9L and 9R, or a combination thereof. Will be done.

When the start lever is operated, a random value for effect (hereinafter referred to as a random value for effect) is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the effect random value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines by lottery what to execute this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. The sub-control board, which will be described later, is responsible for determining the content of the effect.

When the content of the effect is determined, the display unit 100 and the speakers 9L and 9R execute the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To do. In this way, in the pachislot machine 1, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the game has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at). It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

[Structure of pachislot machine]
This concludes the description of the functional flow of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a front view of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

The housing 60 forming the entire pachi-slot machine 1 includes a box-shaped cabinet 61 having a rectangular opening on the front side, an upper door 62a arranged on the upper front surface of the cabinet 61, and a lower front surface of the cabinet 61. It has a lower door 62b arranged in. The cabinet 61 accommodates equipment used for games (for example, reels). The upper door 62a and the lower door 62b are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet 61. The upper door 62a is provided so that the upper part of the opening in the cabinet 61 can be closed, and the lower door 62b is provided so as to be able to close the lower part of the opening in the cabinet 61.
Since the cabinet 61 is a member for fixing the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b, it may be referred to as a fixed frame, and the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b may be referred to as a front door.

The upper door 62a has a display unit 100 in the center. The display unit 100 is an effect device that produces an effect according to the progress of the game, and displays various images according to the progress of the game under the control of the sub-control board 72 described later. The display unit 100 may be a display device such as a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, but in the present embodiment, a so-called projection mapping device is used as described later.

A display window 4 formed as a rectangular opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the upper portion of the lower door 62b. The display window 4 constitutes a symbol display means for displaying a part of a plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, which will be described later. The display window 4 displays a cross-up line diagonally to the upper right, a top line in the upper row, a center line in the middle row, a bottom line in the lower row, and a cross-down line diagonally downward to the right.

As shown in FIG. 3, the display window 4 displays three symbols out of the plurality of symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Therefore, the display window 4 displays a 3 × 3 pattern. The five lines from the cross-up line to the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4 are lines that linearly connect the 3 × 3 symbols displayed on the display window 4.

In the present embodiment, the center line out of these five lines is the effective line, and the winning determination is made based on the combination of the symbols displayed along the center line. On the other hand, the four lines other than the center line are pseudo lines that are not used for determining the winning.

The effective line (center line) is activated by operating the MAX bet button 11 described later or by inserting a medal into the medal insertion slot 22. Here, operating the MAX bet button 11 is synonymous with inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, the term "number of inserted medals" includes both the number of BETs inserted by operating the MAX bet button 11 and the number of inserted medals actually inserted into the medal insertion slot 22.

A plurality of reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatably provided in a horizontal row in the cabinet 61. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel band on which a sequence of symbols as identification information composed of a plurality of types of symbols necessary for the game is drawn on the outer peripheral surface of each reel. That is, a plurality of symbols are displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The design drawn on each reel band can be visually recognized from the outside of the pachislot machine 1 through the display window 4. Further, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant speed rotation (for example, 80 rotations / minute), and the symbol sequence is displayed in a variable manner.

A pedestal portion 10 having a substantially horizontal plane is formed below the display window 4. Within the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10, a medal insertion slot 22 is provided on the right side, and a MAX bet button 11 and a 1-bet button (not shown) are provided on the left side. Inside the MAX bet button 11, a bet button LED 103 (see FIG. 30) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided.

By pressing the MAX bet button 11, the number of medals (3 medals) used for the unit game (one game) is inserted, and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button is pressed once. When the 1-bet button is operated three times, three medals used for the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

The operation of the MAX bet button 11, the operation of the 1-bet button, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 22 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are referred to as "insertion operations".

An information display 14 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal portion 10 in the horizontal plane. The information display 14 is provided with an LED (not shown) that lights up according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as the number of inserted medals). Further, the information display 14 displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of medals to be paid out), the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter, the number of credits), and the like. Is provided with a digital display (not shown) that digitally displays the information to the player.

Further, the information display 14 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the combination of symbols according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. It is provided. The instruction monitor is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and notifies the player of necessary stop operation information by lighting or blinking in a manner uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information to be notified. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, a "pushing order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of the stop operations (pushing order) are different. The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified is, for example, to display "1" when notifying the push order "1st (performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)". , When notifying the push order "2nd (performing the first stop operation on the reel 3C in the middle)", "2" is displayed, and the push order "3rd (the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R)" is displayed. To do) ”is displayed as“ 3 ”. The details of the notification of the stop operation information on the instruction monitor will be described later in FIG. 74.

As shown in FIG. 30 described later, the information display 14 is controlled by the main control board 71 via the door relay board 74. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be used to notify the information of the stop operation, for example. The display unit 100 described above may notify the information of the stop operation.

In this case, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means may be different. That is, the instruction monitor may notify the information of the stop operation to be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if it is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said to be a direct notification). On the other hand, in the notification by other means, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays "1" which is uniquely corresponding to the push order to be notified, while the other means (display unit 100) displays the first stop operation on the left. It may be possible to directly notify what is to be done to the reel 3L of the above.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. Of course, the notification of the stop operation information may be controlled according to the gaming state. More specifically, the stop operation information may be notified in the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33) described later without notifying the stop operation information in the general gaming state (non-ART) described later.

Further, on the left side of the front portion of the pedestal portion 10, a settlement button 13 for switching the credit / payout of medals acquired by the player in the game by a push button operation is provided. By switching the settlement button 13, medals are paid out from the medal payout outlet 15 at the lower part of the front surface, and the paid out medals are stored in the medal receiving portion 16.

On the right side of the settlement button 13, a start lever 6 is specified as a start operation means for rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by a player's tilt operation to start a variable display of a symbol in the display window 4. It is mounted so that it can be tilted within the angle range of.

Stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are provided at substantially the center of the front surface of the pedestal portion 10 as stop operation means for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by pressing the player. ing. In the embodiment, one game (unit game) is basically started by operating the start lever 6 and ends when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped.

A first sub-display device 201 and a second sub-display device 202 are provided on the front surface of the upper part of the lower door 62b. The first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are a liquid crystal display or an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and display various information. As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202 are lateral to the front surface of the lower door 62b, which stands substantially perpendicular to the horizontal plane of the pedestal portion 10. The first sub display device 201 is provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side), and the second sub display device 202 is provided on the right side (medal insertion slot 22 side).

At least one of the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device 202, in the present embodiment, a touch sensor 201a is provided on the display surface of the first sub-display device 201, and the touch sensor 201a is provided via the touch sensor 201a. The display can be switched according to the operation of the accepted player. The touch sensor 201a operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The first sub-display device 201 is controlled by the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 31) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 201a.

Speakers 9L and 9R for producing sounds such as sound effects and voices are provided on the left and right in front of the lower part of the lower door 62b, and a medal payout outlet 15 for paying medals is provided between the speakers 9L and 9R. ing. At the lowermost part of the lower door 62b, a medal receiving portion 16 for storing the paid medals is provided.

In addition, on the front surface of the lower part of the lower door 62b, which is sandwiched between the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R and the medal receiving portion 16, there is a waist panel 25 with a design corresponding to the motif of the model. It is attached. The lumbar panel 25 is illuminated by a lumbar panel illuminator (not shown) provided behind it.

[Display unit structure]
Subsequently, the structure of the display unit 100 included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 28.

(Display unit 100)
As shown in FIG. 4, a display unit 100 is provided inside the cabinet 61 on the rear side of the upper door 62a. As shown in FIG. 5, the display unit 100 is detachably provided on the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. The intermediate support plate 301 functions as a partition wall between the upper space and the lower space in the cabinet 61. The display unit 100 is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation light device B that emits irradiation light including an image and a screen device C that causes an image to appear when the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is irradiated. ..

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image on the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a building or a natural object, and for example, its position (projection distance or angle) with respect to an accessory which is a screen described later. By projecting an image according to the production information, which is generated based on the shape and shape, it is possible to produce an advanced and powerful production.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B)
As shown in FIG. 6, the irradiation light device B is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 that emits the irradiation light forward and the projector mechanism B2, and the irradiation light from the projector mechanism B2 is arranged diagonally downward and rearward. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects in the device C direction, and a projector cover B1 that houses the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Projector mechanism B2)
The projector mechanism B2 is arranged at the rear part in the cabinet 61. The projector mechanism B2 has a horizontally arranged flat plate-shaped base member B22. A lens mechanism B21 and a light source (not shown) are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The lens mechanism B21 is arranged so as to emit the irradiation light emitted from the light source toward the front mirror mechanism B3.

Further, heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are provided on the lower surface of the base member B22. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 are arranged on the right side and the left side of the lens mechanism B21 and the light source, respectively. The heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 have a duct for circulating air and a fan for sending out air, and by blowing the air backward, the heat generated when generating the irradiation light is forcibly rearward. It is designed to flow. As shown in FIG. 2, the ventilation holes 21a of the cabinet 61 are arranged in the air flow direction in the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24. As a result, the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 can forcibly discharge the heat of the projector mechanism B2 together with the air to the outside of the machine through the ventilation hole 21a.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 6, the mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector mechanism B2 (the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 7, the mirror mechanism B3 includes a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. doing. As shown in FIG. 8, the mirror holder B31 is formed in a rectangular plate shape on the front surface. An angle adjusting hole B311 is formed at each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a recess B312 is formed on the front surface centering on the angle adjusting hole B311. Further, mounting holes B314 and B314 are formed vertically symmetrically between the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

Further, a mirror holding portion B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion, and is formed in a size that does not overlap the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left side and the right side of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331, B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

A part of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is formed so as to overlap the mirror holding portion B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both left and right sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted to the mirror holding portion B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. , The optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 9, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 in the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the front central portion of the projector cover B1 and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door 62a is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjusting hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted into the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjusting hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed, and the screws penetrating the angle adjusting holes B311 of the mirror holder B31 are the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in the direction in which the screw with the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 is tightened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is shortened.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344, whereby the optical mirror is formed between the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as a mirror mechanism B3, and the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is changed by the rotation of the screw. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjusting holes B311 and 331 and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corners of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism at the arrangement positions of the angle adjusting holes B311 and 331 and B341 are arranged. By increasing or decreasing the distance from B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector mechanism B2.

Further, a spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring is in contact with the recess B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface is in contact with the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. It is sandwiched between. Then, a screw inserted through the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 penetrates the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head comes into contact with the angle adjusting hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the urging force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjusting hole B111 and breaking the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw.

(Display unit 100: Illumination light device B: Projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 10, the projector mechanism B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above are housed in the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 includes an upper wall portion B12 arranged horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged on the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and side wall portions B13 and B13 arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. And have. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 projects forward from the cabinet 61 of FIG. A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in a form protruding forward in the central portion of the front side of the upper wall portion B12, and the above-mentioned mirror mechanism B3 is held in an angle-adjustable space portion formed by the protrusion. ..

Further, the side wall portions B13 and B13 have a protruding portion B131 protruding in the horizontal direction from the lower end portion. The protruding portion B131 has a first protruding portion B131a on the front side and a second protruding portion B131b on the rear side. The first protrusion B131a is formed at a position corresponding to the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is set to a width slightly smaller than the width of the opening of the cabinet 61. Has been done. On the other hand, the second protruding portion B131b is formed at a position corresponding to the space behind the opening of the cabinet 61 when the projector cover B1 is mounted on the cabinet 61, and is wider than the width of the space behind. It is set to a slightly smaller width. That is, each of the side wall portions B13 and B13 is formed so that the width of the second protruding portion B131b is wider than the width of the first protruding portion B131a. As a result, the projector cover B1 can cover most of the internal space in the cabinet 61.

A perforated plate B15 having a plurality of holes B151 is provided on the lower surface side of the projector cover B1. The perforated plate B15 is a punching metal in which a plurality of holes are formed by punching a plate made of metal (for example, stainless steel, iron, steel, aluminum, etc.). The plurality of holes B151 are formed so as to be substantially evenly dispersed over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15. The perforated plate B15 allows air to flow over the entire surface of the perforated plate B15, and enables air to flow from the lower side to the upper side by suction by the heat exhaust mechanisms B23 and B24 of the projector mechanism B2. The size and number of holes B151 are set so that the inside of the projector cover B1 cannot be visually recognized from the outside. The hole B151 is formed in a shape such as a circle, a square, or a hexagon, and the hole diameter is about 3 to 5 mm.

The perforated plate B15 is formed so as to cover the first protruding portion B131a and the second protruding portion B131b of the projector cover B1 from the lower position. As shown in FIG. 12, the perforated plate B15 has an upper portion B15a on the front side, an inclined portion B15b on the middle side, and a lower portion B15c on the rear side. The upper portion B15a is arranged horizontally. The inclined portion B15b is formed by being bent diagonally downward and rearward from the rear side of the upper portion B15a. The lower side portion B15c is formed by being bent in the horizontal direction from the rear side of the inclined portion B15b.

The upper portion B15a of the perforated plate B15 is attached to the side wall portions B13 and B13 of the projector cover B1. As a result, the perforated plate B15 is arranged so that the front portion of the projector cover B1 is covered from the lower side by the upper portion B15a, and the inclined portion B15b and the lower portion B15c cover the front portion of the projector cover B1 from the lower portion to the rear portion. There is. As shown in FIG. 10, a front screen mechanism E1 in the screen device C is arranged below the perforated plate B15.

Although the details will be described later, the front screen mechanism E1 has a front standby position arranged on the upper side, which is a standby posture for prohibiting the appearance of an image due to irradiation light, and a lower side, which is an exposure posture for allowing the appearance of an image due to irradiation light. The front screen mechanism E1 in the standby posture is tilted so as to be substantially parallel to the tilted portion B15b of the perforated plate B15. On the other hand, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the exposed posture, a large space portion appears below the perforated plate B15, and the air existing in this space reaches the perforated plate B15 without flow resistance, and a plurality of air portions reach the perforated plate B15. By passing through the hole B151, it is possible to facilitate the inflow of air into the screen device C and improve the cooling efficiency.

Further, by providing the perforated plate B15 so as to cover the lower surface of the projector cover B1, for example, as shown in FIG. 13, the position of the player's line of sight located on the front side is the center of the screen device C in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction. Even if it exists on the horizontal line of the portion and looks up at the irradiation light device B from this line-of-sight position, the perforated plate B15 prevents the inside of the irradiation light device B from being visually observed.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C)
As shown in FIG. 14, the irradiation light device B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. As a result, the display unit 100 can unite the irradiation light device B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10)
The screen device C has a box-shaped screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 15, the screen housing C10 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2 erected at the right end of the bottom plate C1, and a left side plate C3 erected at the left end of the bottom plate C1. And a back plate C4 erected at the rear end of the bottom plate C1. As a result, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 are connected to the bottom plate C1 by screwing, so that the front side where the player is located and the upper surface side where the irradiation light device B is located are connected. An open box-shaped screen housing C10 is formed.

The bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 constituting the screen housing C10 are each independently formed into a predetermined shape, and a predetermined functional component such as a fixed screen mechanism D can be attached. Has been made. As a result, even if the unit of the screen device C cannot be standardized as a whole, the bottom plate C1, the right side plate C2, the left side plate C3, and the back plate C4 can be standardized for each plate member. Further, since the plate member can be partially changed, the specifications can be easily changed for each model of the game machine 1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Bottom plate C1)
Specifically, the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape having a rectangular top view. The upper surface of the bottom plate C1 has a central mounting portion C11 arranged in the central portion, and a right mounting portion C12 and a left mounting portion C13 arranged in the left-right direction about the central mounting portion C11. There is. These mounting portions C11, C12, and C13 are formed in a concave shape. The central mounting portion C11 mounts the fixed screen mechanism D so that it can be positioned by fitting the lower end portion of the fixed screen mechanism D. The right mounting portion C12 and the left mounting portion C13 position the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively, by fitting the lower ends of the right movable body base C5 and the left movable body base C6, respectively. It is placed as possible.

Further, the front side portion C14 of the bottom plate C1 is bent downward so that the tip portion is positioned below the lower surface of the bottom plate C1. A plurality of through holes C141 are formed in the front side portion C14. As shown in FIG. 5, when the display unit 100 is mounted on the intermediate support plate 301 of the cabinet 61 and incorporated, the front side portion C14 abuts on the front surface of the intermediate support plate 301 in the cabinet 61. It is possible to perform rearward positioning. Then, the display unit 100 is screwed to the front surface of the cabinet 61 through the through hole C141 of the front side portion C14, so that the display unit 100 can be assembled and installed from the front side of the cabinet 61. It is possible.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Right side plate C2, Left side plate C3)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen housing C10 have operation openings C21 and C31. The operation openings C21 and C31 are formed as handles, and the display unit 100 can be carried by hooking a hand on the operation openings C21 and C31. The operating openings C21 and C31 are arranged on the sides of the crank gears E21 and E21 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operating openings C21 and C31 are formed in a rectangular shape in which the longitudinal directions are aligned in the horizontal direction. The opening areas of the operating openings C21 and C31 are set so that the crank gears E21 and E21 can be manually operated from the outside.

As a result, when manually moving the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position after incorporating the display unit 100 into the cabinet 61, first, the display unit 100 is taken out from the front side of the cabinet 61 in which the upper door 62a is opened. Specifically, an operator located on the front side of the cabinet 61 releases the screws of the display unit 100 to the cabinet 61 and removes the screws. Then, the display unit 100 is taken out of the cabinet 61 by reaching into the cabinet 61 and grasping the operating openings C21 and C31 of the display unit 100 with both hands. After that, as shown in FIG. 17, for example, reaching into the screen device C from one of the operating openings C21 of the removed display unit 100, and rotating the crank gear E21 that can be seen in the horizontal direction from the operating opening C21. Thereby, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. The locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 will be described later. When the locked state is released by moving from the standby position, the front screen mechanism E1 can be quickly rotated to a desired position.

With the upper door 62a open, reach out from the front of the opening of the cabinet 61 into the space between the side wall 302 of the cabinet 61 and the right side plate C2 of the screen device C, and from the opening C21 for operation. By operating the crank gear E21, the crank gear E21 can be rotated. In this case, the locked state of the front screen mechanism E1 can be released without removing the display unit 100 from the cabinet 61.

Further, a motor accommodating portion C22 is formed on the right side plate C2. The motor accommodating portion C22 accommodates the drive motor F21 of the reel screen drive mechanism F2.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen housing C10: Back plate C4)
As shown in FIG. 18, the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10 is formed in a flat plate shape, and a relay board CK is provided on the back surface. The relay board CK makes it possible to collect a plurality of signal lines in the display unit 100 and perform wiring to the outside of the display unit 100 at one place. The relay board CK is provided on the back surface of the back plate C4 so that it is arranged in front of the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61. That is, the relay board CK is arranged in the gap between the back wall 213 of the cabinet 61 and the back plate C4 of the screen housing C10. As shown in FIG. 5, a through hole 303 of the intermediate support plate 301 that supports the display unit 100 is arranged below the relay board CK, and a signal line of the relay board CK is inserted therethrough.

As a result, the relay board is arranged outside the screen device C, which facilitates the wiring work and eliminates the need to secure an installation space for the relay board CK in the screen device C. The degree of freedom of design in the device C is expanded.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18, an operation opening C41 is formed in the back plate C4. The operation opening C41 is arranged at the lower right side and faces the intermediate gear E23 of the front screen drive mechanism E2. The operation opening C41 is formed in a size that allows the intermediate gear E23 to be manually operated. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 in the standby position is manually moved after the display unit 100 is assembled in the cabinet 61, the display unit 100 is first removed from the cabinet 61. After that, by reaching into the screen device C from the operation opening C41 and rotating the intermediate gear E23 that can be seen in the horizontal direction from the operation opening C41, the locked front screen mechanism E1 can be easily moved from the standby position. Can be moved.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen mechanism)
Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The detailed structure of each screen mechanism D, E1, F1 will be described later.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Screen positional relationship)
As shown in FIG. 19, the fixed screen mechanism D is provided in a fixed state at a fixed exposure position existing in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light. As shown in FIG. 20, the front screen mechanism E1 is rotatably provided between the front exposed position and the front standby position. The positional relationship between the fixed exposure position and the front exposure position is set so that the front exposure position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposure position. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 moves to the front exposed position, the front screen mechanism E1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the front screen mechanism E1. It is possible. When the front screen mechanism E1 is moved to the front standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

Further, as shown in FIG. 21, the reel screen mechanism F1 is rotatably provided between the reel exposed position and the reel standby position. The positional relationship between the reel exposed position and the fixed exposed position is set so that the reel exposed position is in the irradiation direction of the irradiation light and exists in front of the fixed exposed position. As a result, when the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel exposed position, the reel screen mechanism F1 covers the fixed screen mechanism D from the front, so that the image due to the irradiation light appears only in the reel screen mechanism F1. It is possible. When the reel screen mechanism F1 moves to the reel standby position, the fixed screen mechanism D is exposed so that the image due to the irradiation light can appear on the fixed screen mechanism D.

The positional relationship between the front standby position and the reel standby position is set so that the front screen mechanism E1 existing in the front standby position and the reel screen mechanism F1 existing in the reel standby position do not interfere with each other. That is, the front standby position is arranged above the fixed screen mechanism D, while the reel standby position is arranged behind the fixed screen mechanism D. As a result, the rotation distance of the front screen mechanism E1 is shorter than the rotation distance of the reel screen mechanism F1.

The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are different from each other in the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 and the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 so as to minimize the overlap of the operating regions due to rotation. ing. Specifically, the rotation center axis of the front screen mechanism E1 is set above the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1 in the front standby position direction. As a result, the movement of the front screen mechanism E1 is set to the minimum.

Further, the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are rotatable on condition that at least one of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 is present in the standby position. As a result, interference between the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 during rotation is prevented.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Fixed screen mechanism D)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the fixing screen mechanism D is fixed on the bottom plate C1 of the screen housing C10 by screwing. The fixed screen mechanism D includes a front reflection portion D1, a right surface reflection portion D2, a left surface reflection portion D3, and a bottom reflection portion D4. The reflecting surfaces of these reflecting units D1 to D4 are set at different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B.

The fixed screen mechanism D may have, for example, two, three, or five reflecting portions as long as it has a plurality of reflecting surfaces having different angles with respect to the optical axis of the irradiation light. Alternatively, it may be provided with a reflecting portion of a curved or arc-shaped reflecting surface in which the center point of curvature is located on the front side at continuously different angles with respect to the optical axis.

The front reflecting portion D1 has a reflecting surface arranged so as to face the player on the front side, and reflects most of the reflected light from the irradiation light device B arranged in the front upper part of the fixed screen mechanism D forward. It is set to do. The right-side reflection portion D2 and the left-side reflection portion D3 are joined to the right-side portion and the left-side portion of the front-side reflection portion D1, and are arranged symmetrically with respect to the front-side reflection portion D1. The right-side reflecting portion D2 and the left-side reflecting portion D3 are arranged so that the width between the front end portions is larger than the width in the left-right direction of the front reflecting portion D1. As a result, the right-side reflection unit D2 and the left-side reflection unit D3 make it easier for the reflection direction of the irradiation light with respect to the reflection surface to be in the direction of the front reflection portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is frontal while displaying an image by the irradiation light. It is designed to reflect in the direction of the reflecting portion D1. Further, also for the bottom surface reflecting portion D4, the direction of reflection of the irradiation light on the reflecting surface tends to be directed toward the front reflecting portion D1, so that a part of the irradiation light is directed to the front reflecting portion D1 while the image of the irradiation light appears. It is designed to reflect.

In the above-mentioned fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the reflecting surface is set to be lower than the brightness of each reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 described later. That is, in the fixed screen mechanism D, the amount of light reflected by the irradiation light on the reflecting surface is smaller than the amount of light reflected on the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. As a result, the fixed screen mechanism D prevents blurring due to mixing of light due to diffused reflection of the reflecting portions D1 to D4. In the fixed screen mechanism D, the brightness of the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 may be lower than the brightness of the front reflecting portion D1. In this case, since the reflection of the irradiation light by the other reflecting portions D2, D3, and D4 to the front reflecting portion D1 can be reduced, it is possible to reduce the white blur while making the image strongly appear in the front reflecting portion D1.

As the brightness, Brightness in the L * a * b * color system (L * a * b * color space) and the L * u * v * color system (L * u * v * color space) is adopted. However, it can be defined in any way as long as white can be used as a reference and other colors can be represented by relative values.

The brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D and the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are such that the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D is the reflection of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It is not particularly limited as long as it is lower than the brightness of the surface. For example, the brightness of the reflecting surface of the fixed screen mechanism D may be set to a value about 5 to 25% (or 10 to 20%) lower than the brightness of the reflecting surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1.

In order to make the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, the color of the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is changed to the front screen. The color may be blacker than the color of the paint applied to the base material of the mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. For example, a white paint is used as the paint to be applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1, and the paint to be applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D is the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. A paint to which a black pigment is added to the paint to be applied to the base material may be used.

In such a paint, the brightness of the reflective surface of the screen mechanism can be changed by changing the ratio of the white pigment (for example, titanium oxide) and the black pigment (for example, carbon black). For example, the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 contains only the white pigment among the white pigment and the black pigment, and the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D includes Both white and black pigments may be included. Further, the ratio of the black pigment to the white pigment is (for example, 5 to 25% (or, for example)) in the paint applied to the fixed screen mechanism D than in the paint applied to the base material of the front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1. It may be increased by about 10 to 20%). As the paint to be applied to the base material of these screen mechanisms, conventionally known screen paints can be appropriately adopted, and can be adjusted according to the screen type (for example, diffusion type or reflection type). ..

Instead of including the black pigment in the paint applied to the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D, the black pigment is dispersed in the resin that is the material of the base material before molding the base material of the fixed screen mechanism D. By doing so, the base material itself may be colored and the brightness of the base material itself may be lowered.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing diffused reflection of light, the members constituting the screen housing C10 such as the peripheral walls (bottom plate C1, right side plate C2, left side plate C3, and back plate C4) and the inside of the screen housing C10. It is also desirable to reduce the brightness of other members (members other than the screen) arranged in. It is desirable that the brightness of these members is lower than the brightness of the reflective surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. For example, if the brightness is low, it is not necessary to consider that the image is projected as a screen on the surrounding wall. The lower the better. That is, the closer the color of the surrounding wall is to black, the more desirable it is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen mechanism E1)
As shown in FIG. 22, the front screen mechanism E1 includes a rectangular front screen member E11 having a projection surface E11a on the entire surface and a front screen support base E12 having a pattern such as a first pattern surface E12a on both sides. Have. The front screen member E11 is formed by applying a screen paint to a thin plate-shaped flat panel. As a result, the front screen member E11 has the projection surface E11a formed flat so that an image without distortion appears when irradiated with the irradiation light.

On the other hand, the front screen support base E12 has a holding recess E121 for holding the front screen member E11. The holding recess E121 has an opening shape similar to that of the projection surface E11a of the front screen member E11 in a slightly enlarged state, and accommodates the entire front screen member E11. Further, the holding recess E121 is set in two stages of depth, a deep portion and a shallow portion. The shallow portion is realized by a step portion E121a formed on the peripheral edge portion of the front screen support base E12 and a step portion E121b formed linearly to both ends in the lateral direction passing through the central portion.

As a result, the front screen member E11 housed in the holding recess E121 is brought into contact with and supported by the stepped portion E121a of the peripheral portion and the linear stepped portion E121b passing through the central portion, and is separated from the remaining deep portion. It is in a state. As a result, it is prevented that the deformation of the front screen support base E12 in the deep portion deforms the front screen member E11 and causes distortion in the projection surface E11a.

Further, the front screen support base E12 has a first pattern surface E12a in a part of a region around the projection surface E11a. The first pattern surface E12a is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front exposed position. Further, the front screen support base E12 has a second pattern surface E12b on the entire surface opposite to the first pattern surface E12a. The second pattern surface E12b is made visible to the player in front when the front screen mechanism E1 is positioned at the front standby position. In these first pattern surface E12a and second pattern surface E12b, for example, a pattern related to the production of a game is three-dimensionally formed by unevenness.

The front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 configured as described above are integrated by being formed separately and then bonded with an adhesive. As a result, even if a sink mark may occur due to molding shrinkage or the like when the front screen mechanism E1 forms a pattern or the like on the front screen support base E12, the sink mark is mechanically separated from the front screen member E11. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the front screen member E11 from being distorted due to the sinking of the projection surface E11a.

The method of fixing the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 is not limited to bonding with an adhesive, and any method such as screw fastening can be adopted.

The flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12 are each manufactured by injection molding. As the material of the flat panel constituting the front screen member E11 and the front screen support base E12, a thermoplastic resin (for example, ABS resin or the like) that may cause sink marks when injection molding is performed may be appropriately adopted. it can.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Front screen drive mechanism E2)
The front screen mechanism E1 is rotatable by the driving force of the front screen drive mechanism E2. As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the front screen drive mechanism E2 has a left front screen drive mechanism E2A connected to the lower surface of the left end portion of the front screen mechanism E1 and a right connected to the lower surface of the right end portion of the front screen mechanism E1. It has a front screen drive mechanism E2B.

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B includes a crank member E22, a crank gear E21, an intermediate gear E23, a motor shaft gear E24, and a drive motor E25. The upper end (one end) of the crank member E22 in the right front screen drive mechanism E2B is connected to the lower surface of the right end of the front screen mechanism E1. As shown in FIG. 25, the crank member E22 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 of FIG. 15 at the intermediate position E22a. As a result, the crank member E22 makes the upper end portion and the lower end portion (the other end portion) rotatable about the intermediate position E22a as the center of rotation.

The crank member E22 has an upper region on the upper end side from the intermediate position E22a and a lower region on the lower end side from the intermediate position E22a. When the crank member E22 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. 25, the center line in the upper region (the straight line passing between the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint on the upper end side of the crank member E22) is in the vertical direction in the standby posture. Is set to. On the other hand, the center line in the lower region (a straight line passing through the intermediate position E22a and the midpoint at the lower end side of the crank member E22) is set so that the lower side inclines toward the front side rather than the upper side in the standby posture.

A slide groove E22b is formed in the lower region of the crank member E22. The slide groove E22b is formed so that the groove wall surface E22b1 has a U-shape in a side view. The U-shape is composed of two straight portions and a curved portion connecting the ends of the two straight portions. The two straight portions are formed in parallel, and the slide groove E22b has a surface corresponding to the straight portion of the groove wall surface E22b1 set parallel to the center line of the lower region. A slide member E26 is movably engaged with the slide groove E22b. The groove width of the slide groove E22b (distance between the two straight portions) is substantially the same as the member width of the slide member E26, and is set to slide during movement. That is, the slide member E26 is always in contact with the groove wall surface E22b1 of the slide groove E22b. Further, the upper end portion of the slide groove E22b is set so that the slide member E26 comes into contact with the upper end surface (the surface corresponding to the curved portion) when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture. On the other hand, the lower end of the slide groove E22b is open so that a part of the slide member E26 can be exposed.

The slide member E26 is rotatably supported at the eccentric position E21b of the crank gear E21. The rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 is rotatably supported by the right movable body base C5 in FIG. 24. In the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22 and the slide member. It is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of E26.

As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, even if a force acts in the direction of rotating the lower region of the crank member E22, the rotation center position is in the direction of applying all the components of this force. Since E21a exists and acts as a fixed end, the slide member E26 does not move. As a result, a truss structure is formed by a three-node link with 0 degrees of freedom, with the intermediate position E22a of the crank member E22 and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 as fixed ends and the slide member E26 as the free end. Even when the mechanism E1 is pushed by hand, the front screen mechanism E1 does not move because the crank member E22 and the crank gear E21 act as a strong brake.

An intermediate gear E23 is meshed with the crank gear E21. A motor shaft gear E24 is meshed with the intermediate gear E23. The drive shaft of the drive motor E25 is connected to the motor shaft gear E24. As a result, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B can transmit the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 to the crank gear E21 via the motor shaft gear E24 and the intermediate gear E23.

Here, all the components of the rotational driving force applied to the crank gear E21 coincide with the tangential direction of the turning locus of the slide member E26. Further, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 28, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, the line segment connecting the rotation center position E21a and the eccentric position E21b is the intermediate position E22a in the crank member E22. Since it is set to have a relationship orthogonal to the line segment connecting the center point of the slide member E26, the tangential direction of the turning locus is parallel to the groove wall surface of the slide groove E22b of the crank member E22. As a result, when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, when a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, there is a groove wall surface that becomes a reaction force in the moving direction (tangential direction) of the slide member E26. Therefore, the crank gear E21 easily starts rotating.

When a rotational driving force is applied to the crank gear E21, the slide member E26 provided at the eccentric position E21b is made movable along the slide groove E22b by sliding with the slide groove E22b, so that the crank member E22 A two-node link with one degree of freedom is formed in which the intermediate position E22a and the rotation center position E21a of the crank gear E21 are fixed ends, and the slide member E26 is a free end that can be moved along the groove wall surface. Then, when the slide member E26 rotates, the crank member E22 provided with the slide groove E22b with which the slide member E26 is engaged rotates with the intermediate position E22a as a fulcrum, and the upper region of the crank member E22 is rotated. Become. As a result, the front screen mechanism E1 moves between the front standby position and the front exposed position.

Further, the moving speed of the front screen mechanism E1 is 0 in the stopped state when the front screen mechanism E1 is in the standby posture or the exposed posture, and gradually increases to an intermediate posture between the standby posture and the exposed posture (FIG. 27). After reaching the maximum speed in, the vehicle gradually decelerates, and when the exposed posture and the standby posture are reached, the stopped state becomes 0. As a result, the rotation of the crank gear E21 can be started and stopped in a state where the angular acceleration is small (moment of inertia), so that the torque required for the crank gear E21 can be reduced, and as a result, the drive mechanism ( It is possible to reduce failure and wear due to overload of the intermediate gear E23, the motor shaft gear E24, and the drive motor E25).

As shown in FIG. 15, the right front screen drive mechanism E2B configured as described above has the same configuration as the left front screen drive mechanism E2A except for the motor shaft gear E24 and the drive motor E25. The left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are arranged symmetrically. The crank gear E21 of the left front screen drive mechanism E2A and the crank gear E21 of the right front screen drive mechanism E2B are connected via a shaft member E3, so that the rotational driving force of the drive motor E25 is evenly applied. There is.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Reel screen mechanism F1)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the reel screen mechanism F1 includes a reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate, a left reel screen support portion F12 connected to the left end of the reel screen portion F11, and a reel screen portion F11. It has a right reel screen support portion F13 connected to the right end of the screen.

The reel screen portion F11 is curved in a shape similar to the rotation direction, and a pattern is formed on the back surface on the rotation center side. The pattern on the back surface is visible to the player in front when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel standby position. Further, on the surface of the reel screen portion F11, a pattern is formed on the peripheral edge portion, and the inner peripheral region of the peripheral edge portion is used as a projection surface. On the projection surface, when the reel screen mechanism F1 is positioned at the reel exposure position, an image can appear by irradiating the irradiation light.

One ends of the left and right reel screen support portions F12 and F13 are connected to the reel screen portion F11. On the other hand, the other ends of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13 each have a protruding portion (not shown). The protruding portion projects horizontally to the outside of the reel screen support portions F12 and F13, and is connected to the reel screen drive mechanism F2 to serve as the rotation center axis of the reel screen mechanism F1.

(Display unit 100: Screen device C: Directing by the screen device)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are executed by using the display unit 100 described above. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display and a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) are obtained. It is possible to perform an effect using a certain image display and an effect using a curved image display.

For example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the front screen mechanism E1, the image is made to appear on the flat projection surface E11a, which causes distortion during irradiation of the irradiation light. It is possible to make an image without a light appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this flat image.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the fixed screen mechanism D, a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) is obtained by the plurality of reflecting portions of the fixed screen mechanism D. It is possible to make an image with a certain appearance appear, and it is possible to perform an effect using this image with a sense of depth.

Further, for example, when the screen mechanism that causes an image to appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B is switched to the reel screen mechanism F1, the image is caused to appear on the reel screen portion F11 made of a curved flat plate. A curved image can be made to appear, and an effect using the curved image can be executed.

[Display example of the first sub display device]
Subsequently, the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 will be described. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a part of the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201. As shown in FIG. 29, the first sub-display device 201 displays a plurality of display screens including a top screen 211, a menu screen 212, and a game information screens 213, 214, 215. These plurality of display screens can be switched according to the operation of the player received via the touch sensor 201a.

The top screen 211 is an initial screen among the display screens displayed on the first sub display device 201, and displays the menu button 211a and the outline game history 211b. The menu button 211a is an operation button that calls the menu screen 212 when operated (tapped) by the player. The summary game history 211b displays a part of the game history (summary game history) of the game history of the pachislot machine 1. In the present embodiment, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1 are displayed as the outline game history.

The menu screen 212 is a display screen menu displayed on the first sub-display device 201, and includes a back button 212a, a registration button 212b, an explanation button 212c, an array payout button 212d, a reach button 212e, and a WEB. The site button 212f and the volume button 212g are displayed. The back button 212a is an operation button that calls the top screen 211 by being operated by the player. Further, the registration button 212b to the volume button 212g are operation buttons for calling the corresponding display screen by being operated by the player.

For example, when the registration button 212b is operated by a player, a registration screen (not shown) for registering the player in the game is called. In recent pachislot machines, a service is widely provided in which a player is registered for each model and various information such as the achievement status of a predetermined mission is managed from the past game history of the player. .. The registration screen called by the registration button 212b is a display screen for registering a player when receiving the provision of this service.

Further, when the explanation button 212c is operated by the player, the explanation screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. The contents to be explained on the explanation screen include, for example, an explanation about the specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 such as a bonus winning probability and an ART winning probability for each set value, and an introduction of characters appearing in the production of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, when the array payout button 212d is operated by the player, the array payout screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the array payout screen, for example, the correspondence between the combination of symbols determined to be a prize in the pachislot machine 1 and the privilege when the prize is determined (dividend table), and the symbols drawn on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Columns (reel arrangement) etc. are displayed.

Further, when the reach-eye button 212e is operated by the player, the reach-eye screen (not shown) of the pachi-slot machine 1 is called. On the reach-eye screen, the reach-eye of the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. The reach eyes are a combination of symbols to which a special privilege is given by being displayed along the effective line. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reach eyes of the reach eyes shown in FIGS. 35 and 36 The combination of symbols is applicable. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the combination of the symbols of the reach eye lip is displayed along the effective line, the player is subsequently in an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state, a normal ART or CT (FIG. 33). See))) is to be confirmed.

Further, when the WEB site button 212f is operated by the player, the WEB introduction screen (not shown) of the pachislot machine 1 is called. On the WEB introduction screen, a two-dimensional code (for example, QR code (registered trademark)) indicating the URL of an arbitrary WEB site such as a special WEB site provided for each model of the pachislot machine 1 or a WEB site of the manufacturer of the pachislot machine 1). Is displayed. The player can access the corresponding WEB site by reading the two-dimensional code displayed on the WEB introduction screen with a mobile phone or the like.

Further, when the volume button 212g is operated by the player, a volume adjustment screen (not shown) for adjusting the volume of the sound output from the speakers 9L and 9R is called. The player can adjust the volume of the effect sound of the pachi-slot machine 1 via the volume adjustment screen.

Here, since the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, it can be controlled separately from the display unit 100, and the effect is executed during the game (that is, the display unit 100 performs the effect). Even in (middle), the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched. For the player, for example, he / she may want to know the characters appearing in the production in the display unit 100. In such a case, the explanation button 212c is operated to call the explanation screen to check the relationship between the characters. It can be grasped during the game. In addition, from the player's point of view, when the so-called rare role is won, it may be desired to grasp the symbol that should be used as a guide in order to win the rare role during the reel rotation. In such a case, the array payout button 212d The reel arrangement can be grasped by calling the arrangement payout screen by operating.

The game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are display screens for displaying detailed game history including an outline game history to be displayed on the top screen of the game history of the pachislot machine 1. The game information screen 213 displays a back button 213a, a menu button 213b, a front button 213c, a next button 213d, and a game history 213e. The back button 213a and the menu button 213b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 213c and the next button 213d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen by being operated by the player, and when the front button 213c is operated, the game information screen is displayed from the game information screen 213. When the display screen is switched to 215 and the next button 213d is operated, the display screen is switched from the game information screen 213 to the game information screen 214. In addition, the game history 213e displays the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, and the number of games (number of games) in the pachislot machine 1.

The game information screen 214 displays a back button 214a, a menu button 214b, a front button 214c, a next button 214d, and a game history 214e. The back button 214a and the menu button 214b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 214c and the next button 214d are operation buttons for switching the game information screen in a predetermined order by being operated by the player. In addition, the game history 214e displays the number of times the Pachislot machine 1 has entered the CZ (chance zone) and the number of times it has succeeded. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, since CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 are provided as CZs, the number of rushes and the number of successes of CZ1 to 3 are displayed in the game history 214e.

The game information screen 215 displays a back button 215a, a menu button 215b, a front button 215c, a next button 215d, and a game history 215e. The back button 215a and the menu button 215b are operation buttons that call the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212, respectively, by being operated by the player. Further, the front button 215c and the next button 215d are operation buttons that are operated by the player to switch the game information screens in a predetermined order. In addition, the game history 215e displays the number of wins and the probability of winning a so-called small winning combination in the pachislot machine 1 (a fraction of which the numerator is 1).

The display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 may be switched based on a tap operation on the operation buttons displayed on each display screen, or may be switched based on a swipe operation on the display screen. May be.

[Circuit configuration of pachislot machines]
This concludes the description of the structure of the pachislot machine 1. Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. The pachislot machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a main control board 71, a sub control board 72, an external centralized terminal board 73 electrically connected to these, and a peripheral device (actuator).

<Main control board>
FIG. 30 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment.

(Microcomputer)
The main control board 71 has a microcomputer 30 installed on the circuit board as a main component. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a CPU (hereinafter, main CPU) 31, a ROM (hereinafter, main ROM) 32, and a RAM (hereinafter, main RAM) 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control board 72, and the like. The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program.

(Random number generator, etc.)
A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse.

The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts at least one value from the generated random numbers according to the intended use.

(Peripherals and circuits)
Peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 30 include stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R and a medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper) 40. Further, the input / output ports of the microcomputer 30 include a motor drive circuit 39 and a hopper drive circuit 41 for controlling the operation of each peripheral device, a reel position detection circuit 50, a payout completion signal circuit 51, an external centralized terminal board 73, and the like. Various circuits such as the door relay board 74 and various boards are connected.

The motor drive circuit 39 constitutes a symbol changing means and controls the drive of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R provided corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. That is, the motor drive circuit 39 changes the symbols displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R based on the establishment of the predetermined start conditions.

The reel position detection circuit 50 detects a reel index indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit according to each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R. Here, the reel index is information indicating that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have made one rotation.

The stepping motors 49L, 49C, and 49R have a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of pulse outputs and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is transmitted to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate at a constant angle.

The main CPU 31 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 31 manages the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reels have rotated).

Next, the management of the rotation angles of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motors 49L, 49C, 49R is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 33 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 50.

That is, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 31 manages the symbol counter to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the positions of the symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The hopper drive circuit 41 controls the operation of the hopper 40. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 51 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 40S provided in the hopper 40, and checks whether or not the number of medals paid out from the hopper 40 has reached the number of medals to be paid out. ..

(External centralized terminal board)
The external centralized terminal board 73 receives signals such as the number of medals inserted / paid out from the main control board 71, the number of games played, and information on whether or not the bonus is activated, and displays the signals such as the number of games played and the number of bonus operations. Output to an external display or the host computer of the amusement park. The external display is installed above, for example, the pachislot machine 1, updates the display in conjunction with the progress of the number of games and the bonus operation, and notifies the bonus operation by a lamp or the like.

Here, the medal insertion signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal insertion, and is output when the start lever 6 is operated. The medal payout signal is a signal that makes it possible to recognize the medal payout or the re-game, and is output when the medal is paid out (including credit storage) or when the re-game is activated.

(Door relay board)
The door relay board 74 is a board that relays wiring between the main control board 71 and various buttons, switches, and information display 14. Further, the door relay board 74 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75. The door relay board 74 is connected so that information can be transmitted only to the sub-relay board 75, and the information is not transmitted from the sub-relay board 75. As a result, information can be transmitted between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 only from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 in one-way communication.

A start switch 6S, a stop switch 7S, a medal sensor 42S, a MAX bet switch 11S, a 1-bet switch (not shown), and a settlement switch 13S are connected to the door relay board 74.

The start switch 6S constitutes a start operation detecting means, and detects that the start lever 6 has been operated by the player (start operation). Further, the stop switch 7S constitutes a stop operation detecting means, and detects that each of the three stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The medal sensor 42S detects that the medal received in the medal insertion slot 22 has passed through the selector. Further, the MAX bet switch 11S detects that the MAX bet button 11 has been pressed by the player. Further, the 1-bet switch detects that the 1-bet button has been pressed by the player. The main CPU 31 activates the effective line based on the detection results of the medal sensor 42S, the MAX bet switch 11S, and the 1-bet switch. Further, the settlement switch 13S detects that the settlement button 13 has been pressed by the player.

Further, the door relay board 74 is provided inside each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, and the stop button internal LEDs 107L, 107C, and 107R for displaying the acceptance status thereof, and the number of medals and the advantageous stop operation are unique. The information display 14 (instruction monitor) that notifies the user is connected.

<Sub-control board>
FIG. 31 shows an electrical configuration mainly composed of a sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment. The sub-control board 72 is electrically connected to the main control board 71, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control board 71.

The sub-control board 72 basically includes a CPU (hereinafter, sub-CPU) 81, a ROM cartridge board 82, a RAM (hereinafter, sub-RAM) 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 82 in response to the command transmitted from the main control board 71. The ROM cartridge board 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control board 71, an effect random value is extracted to determine the effect content (effect data), and the effect data is determined. An effect registration task for registration, a drawing control task for controlling the display of an image by the display unit 100 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task for controlling the light output by various LEDs 101, a speaker 9L, A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 9R is included.

The data storage area includes, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing production data constituting various production contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation, and sound data related to BGM and sound effects. Various storage areas such as a storage area for storing the data and a storage area for storing lamp data related to the pattern of turning on and off the light are included.

The sub-RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 30 and 31, the display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are connected to the sub-control board 72 via a predetermined relay board. For example, in the sub-control board 72, an accessory relay board (not shown) is connected to the display unit 100, and the first sub-display device 201 and the second sub-display device are connected via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Connected to 202. The display unit 100, the first sub-display device 201, and the second sub-display device 202 are individually controlled under the control of the sub-control board 72.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30, a sub-relay board 75 is provided between the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72, and relays the wiring connecting the main control board 71 and the sub-control board 72. Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and various peripheral devices by relaying the wiring connecting the sub-control board 72 and a plurality of boards arranged around the sub-control board 72. .. For example, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 with various LEDs 101, the reel illuminator 102, and the bet button LED 103 via an LED board (not shown). Further, the sub-relay board 75 connects the sub-control board 72 and the speakers 9L and 9R via a sound I / O board (not shown), and is a sub-control board via a touch sensor relay board (not shown). The 72 and the touch sensor 201a are connected.

[Transition flow of game state of pachislot machine]
Next, the gaming state controlled by the main control board 71 (main CPU 31) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and the transition flow thereof will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33.

<Transition flow of basic game state>
In the present embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the gaming state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability thereof. As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 distinguishes between the bonus non-winning state, the inter-flag state, and the bonus state based on the presence / absence of winning / operating of the bonus (F_BB1, 2). Specifically, the bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not operating, and the inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus is winning and the bonus is not operating, and the bonus state. Is the state in which the bonus is activated.

Whether or not the bonus is won is managed based on the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33, and whether or not the bonus is activated is determined by the game state flag provided in the main RAM 33. It is managed based on the data stored in the storage area (not shown). Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is activated. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination.

Further, the main control board 71 is provided with six types of states, from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. The RT0 gaming state, the RT2 gaming state, and the RT5 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT1 gaming state is the gaming state in which the winning combination related to the replay is the internal winning combination. It is a gaming state in which the probability of being determined as is a medium probability. Further, the RT3 gaming state and the RT4 gaming state are gaming states in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high.

These RT0 gaming states to RT5 gaming states are managed based on the data stored in the gaming state flag storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 33. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 has five flags from the RT1 game state flag to the RT5 game state flag, and the RT game state is managed by managing the on / off of these flags in the main RAM 33. More specifically, the main control board 71 specifies the RT gaming state corresponding to the ON RT gaming state flag as the current RT gaming state. When all the RT game state flags are off, the main control board 71 identifies that the current RT game state is the RT1 game state.

As shown in FIG. 32, the main control board 71 plays a game from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state when (1) the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state. Transition the state. Then, when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in (2) the inter-flag state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Further, when the number of medals exceeding the specified number (216) is paid out in the (3) bonus state, the main control board 71 ends the bonus state and shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the RT1 gaming state. In this RT1 game state, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the RT1 game state to the RT0 game state after (4) 20 games have elapsed, and (5) bell spills are displayed before the 20 games have elapsed. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Further, in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state when (5) bell spilled eyes are displayed.

Further, when the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state, and (7) displays the RT4 transition lip in the RT3 gaming state. Then, the gaming state is shifted from the RT3 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state. Further, when (8) a bell spill or an RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, and similarly, the bell in the RT4 gaming state. When the spilled eye or the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the gaming state is shifted from the RT4 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Here, the bell spills are determined for each type of push order bell when the push order bells (F_3 choice bell_1st, F_3 choice bell_2nd, F_3 choice bell_3rd) described later are determined as internal winning combinations. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing. Further, in the RT2 transition lip, when the maintenance lip (F_maintenance lip_1st, F_maintenance lip_2nd, F_maintenance lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order determined for each type of maintenance lip is not specified. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT3 transition lip, when the RT3 lip (F_RT3 lip_1st, F_RT3 lip_213, F_RT3 lip_231, F_RT3 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT3 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct. Further, in the RT4 transition lip, when the RT4 lip (F_RT4 lip_123, F_RT4 lip_132, F_RT4 lip_2nd, F_RT4 lip_3rd) described later is determined as the internal winning combination, the pressing order determined for each type of RT4 lip. It is a combination of symbols displayed when the answer is correct.

<Transition flow of game state regarding presence / absence of notification>
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 manages the game state based on the presence / absence of the bonus win / operation, the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay, and the winning probability, and notifies the player of the advantageous stop operation. The game state is managed based on whether or not to play. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence or absence of notification.

As shown in FIG. 33, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 distinguishes between a general gaming state and an ART gaming state based on the presence or absence of notification. The general gaming state is basically a gaming state (non-ART) that does not notify the content of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. On the contrary, the ART gaming state is a gaming state for notifying a stop operation which is advantageous for the player, and is a gaming state which is advantageous for the player. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player plays the game so as to shift from the general game state (with a bonus state depending on the situation) to the ART game state which is advantageous to the player. ..

The general gaming state is a gaming state in which ART is not won among the RT0 to RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the general gaming state is composed of a normal gaming state and a CZ (chance zone). The normal game state and the CZ are game states in which the game states of the transition destinations are different from each other. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game is performed by shifting from the normal game state to the CZ and shifting from the CZ to the ART game state. Is done.

The normal gaming state is the most disadvantageous gaming state in the pachislot machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal gaming state to CZ. Specifically, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed in the normal gaming state, and (A) When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal gaming state to the CZ.

The CZ is a gaming state (chance zone) with a high degree of expectation for shifting to the ART gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 33, the CZ may shift to the normal gaming state or the ART gaming state. Specifically, the CZ performs a transition lottery to ART, and (B) when the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the normal gaming state, and (C) this When the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CZ to the ART gaming state (normally ART or CT) via the preparation for ART.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states, and starts when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state after the ART winning. As shown in FIG. 32, the RT4 gaming state shifts from the RT0 to RT2 gaming states via the RT3 gaming state, so that the ART gaming state does not start immediately even after winning the ART. Absent. Therefore, the pachi-slot machine 1 is in the process of preparing for ART until it shifts to the RT4 gaming state after winning the ART, and notifies the stop operation necessary for shifting to the RT4 gaming state during the ART preparation.

Subsequently, the ART gaming state is basically the gaming state in which the ART is winning among the RT4 gaming states. As shown in FIG. 33, the ART gaming state is usually composed of ART and CT. The normal ART and the CT are gaming states having different game characteristics, and the normal ART is for displaying a stop operation (for example, a combination of symbols with a large number of medals to be paid out) that is advantageous to the player during a predetermined number of games. It is a gaming state that notifies the stop operation of the player and the stop operation required to maintain the RT4 game state), and the CT notifies the player of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player and adds the duration of the normal ART. It is a gaming state that functions as a chance zone. During CT, the game is usually performed without digesting the duration of ART.

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the normal ART to the CT or general gaming state. Specifically, in normal ART, a lottery for transition to CT is performed, and (D) When the lottery for transition is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from normal ART to CT. Further, the duration of the normal ART is managed. (E) When the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the normal ART to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). Normally, the method of managing the duration of ART is arbitrary, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the duration is managed according to the number of games. Of course, the duration may be managed not by the number of games but by the number of medals paid out during normal ART and the difference number, and the number of notifications that affect the payout of medals during normal ART (navigation). The duration may be managed by the number of times).

As shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from CT to normal ART. Specifically, the duration of the CT is managed, and (F) when the duration ends, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the CT to the normal ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the CT is managed by the duration of 8 games per set, which will be described in detail later (see FIG. 63).

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, there is a possibility of shifting from the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ) and the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 32, (2) when the winning combination related to the bonus is won in the general gaming state and the ART gaming state, the main control board 71 is in the gaming state from the general gaming state or the ART gaming state to the bonus state. To migrate.

In the bonus state, the transition lottery to ART is performed. (G) If the transition lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the general gaming state (normal gaming state or CZ). (However, if the transition from the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) to the bonus state has occurred, the main control board 71 will move from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT) even if the transition lottery is not won. ) To shift the game state). Further, (H) When the transition lottery in the bonus state is won, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the bonus state to the ART gaming state (normal ART or CT). As described above, when the bonus state ends, the game state shifts to the RT1 game state. Therefore, when the game state shifts from the bonus state to the ART game state, the main control board 71 is preparing for ART. The game state is transferred to the ART game state via.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 74.

<Design arrangement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34 represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R by data. The symbol arrangement table defines the correspondence between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol corresponding to the symbol positions "0" to "19" can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

The types of patterns are "White 7", "Blue 7", "Chile Top 1", "Chile Top 2", "Chile Bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2". And "Cactus 3" are included.

In the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 34, when the reel index is detected, the symbol located in the middle of the display window 4 (the symbol passing through the middle of the display window 4) is assigned to the symbol position "0", and the reel 3L Correspondence relationships are defined in which symbol positions "0" to "19" are assigned to each of the 20 symbols in the order of movement in the rotation directions of 3, 3C, and 3R.

In this way, by using the middle stage of the display window 4 as a reference, the type of the symbol located in the middle stage of the display window 4 can be specified for each of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

<Design code table>
Further, as shown in FIG. 34, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is specified by a symbol code table and is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 34 represents a code for identifying the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R.

The symbols used in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment are "white 7", "blue 7", "chili top 1", "chili top 2", "chili bottom", "replay", and "hat" as described above. , "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3".

In the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the "white 7" symbol (symbol code 1). "00000010" is assigned as data to the "blue 7" symbol (symbol code 2). "00000011" is assigned as data to the "Chile top 1" symbol (symbol code 3).

Similarly, for each symbol (symbol code 4-10) of "Chile top 2", "Chile bottom", "Replay", "Hat", "Cactus 1", "Cactus 2" and "Cactus 3". , "00000100" to "000001010" are assigned as data.

<Design combination table>
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 38. The symbol combination table is used when a combination of symbols predetermined according to the type of privilege, data stored in the main RAM 33 when the combination of the symbols is displayed, and the combination of the symbols are displayed. The correspondence with the benefits (the number of medals paid out) is stipulated.

In the present embodiment, when the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line matches the combination of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is determined that the prize is won. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is given benefits such as paying out medals, operating the replay, and operating the bonus game (continuous operation device for the character). If the combination of symbols displayed along the effective line does not match any of the combinations of symbols specified in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called "missing". That is, in the present embodiment, the combination of the "missing" symbols is specified by not specifying the combination of the symbols corresponding to the "missing" in the symbol combination table. The present invention is not limited to this, and the item of "off" may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly specify "off".

The data column in the symbol combination table defines information for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the valid line. Specifically, in the data column, a "storage area" in which data of a combination of corresponding symbols is stored and "data (bits corresponding to the combination of symbols in 1-byte data)" stored in the storage area. Data for specifying) ”is specified. In the present embodiment, 22 1-byte storage areas are used to determine the combination of each symbol. For example, “C_BB1” shown in FIG. 35 is determined by storing 1 in bit 1 of the storage area 0.

The combination specified in the symbol combination table means the symbol combination of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R displayed along the effective line when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped. For each combination, the role of the combination and the combination name according to the type of the symbol constituting the combination are defined.

In addition, the number of medals to be paid out specified in the symbol combination table specifies the number of medals to be paid out when the corresponding combination of symbols is displayed. For example, referring to FIG. 37, when the combination name “C_9 sheets A_01” is displayed, nine medals will be paid out.

In addition, the content column in the symbol combination table indicates the role of each symbol combination and the characteristics of each symbol combination. With reference to FIG. 35, for example, the combination names “C_BB1” and “C_BB2” are combinations of symbols related to BB, and when displayed along the valid line, the gaming state shifts to the bonus state (see FIG. 32). ).

Further, the combination names "R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02" are bell spills. When a bell spill is displayed along the effective line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

The combination names "C_maintenance lip A_01" to "C_maintenance lip G_01" are replays. The replay is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on any of the three lines of the bottom line, the top line, and the cross-down line displayed on the display window 4. When the replay is displayed along the valid line, the replay is activated.

The combination names "C_RT2 rip A_01" and "C_RT2 rip A_02" are RT2 transition rips. The RT2 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the cross-up line displayed in the display window 4. When the RT2 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

The combination name "C_RT3 lip_01" is an RT3 transition lip. The RT3 transition lip is a combination of symbols in which "replay-replay-replay" is displayed on the center line (effective line) displayed on the display window 4. When the RT3 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

The combination names "C_RT4 rip A_01" to "C_RT4 rip D_02" are RT4 transition rips. When the RT4 transition lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game operation is performed and the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state (see FIG. 32).

Further, the combination names "C_chililip A_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are chili lip. The chili lip is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on the display window 4. Here, as shown in FIG. 34, in the present embodiment, the symbol "upper chili 1" and the symbol "lower chili" are continuously arranged on each reel. The Chilean symbol is a name when the symbol "Chile top 1" and the symbol "Chile bottom" are regarded as one symbol. When the chili lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

Of the chili lip, the combination name "C_chili lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed only on one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Sometimes called "single reel lip". In addition, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip B_01" and "C_chili lip C_01" are a combination of symbols whose chili symbols are displayed on two reels of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4. Yes, in the following, it may be called "double chili lip". Further, among the chili lip, the combination names "C_chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01" are a combination of symbols in which the chili symbol is displayed on all of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R displayed on the display window 4 (or the corresponding one). This is a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols fails (so-called a mistake in pressing a button), and may be referred to as a "triple reel" below.

Further, the combination names "C_reach eye lip A_01" to "C_reach eye lip P_02" are reach eye lip. The reach eye lip is a so-called reach eye, and is a combination of symbols in which a special combination of symbols is displayed on the display window 4L. For example, the combination name "C_reach eye lip A_01" is a combination of symbols in which "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed along the top line. When the reach eye lip is displayed along the effective line, the re-game is activated.

In addition, the combination names "C_RB role A_01" to "C_RB role G_02" are the ninth cards in the BB. When the 9th BB roll is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals are paid out. In addition, among the 9th cards in the BB, the combination of symbols excluding the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" is 7 symbols (designs) in any of the 5 lines displayed on the display window 4. It is a combination of symbols in which three "white 7" or symbols "blue 7") are displayed side by side (or a combination of symbols displayed when the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols fails). In the following, it may be referred to as "7 sets in BB". On the other hand, the combination names "C_RB role C_01" and "C_RB role C_02" are a combination of symbols in which two 7 symbols are displayed side by side on any of the five lines. I may call it.

The combination names "C_9 sheets A_01" to "C_9 sheets H_04" are bells. The bell is a combination of symbols in which "hat-hat-hat" is displayed on any of the five lines displayed on the display window 4. When the bell is displayed along the valid line, 9 medals will be paid out.

In addition, the combination names "C_1st_A_01" to "C_2nd_B_04" are the first cards. When the first medal is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out. In addition, the combination names "C_SP1_01" and "C_SP2_01" are definite rolls. When a confirmed roll is displayed along the valid line, one medal is paid out.

The combination names "C_3 sheets A_01" to "C_3 sheets F_01" are cacti. When the cactus is displayed along the valid line, three medals are paid out. Further, the combination names "C_weak 2 sheets A_01" to "C_weak 2 sheets B_03" are weak cherries, and the combination names "C_strong 2 sheets A_01" to "C_strong 2 sheets C_09" are strong cherries. When a weak cherry or a strong cherry is displayed along the valid line, two medals are paid out.

<Internal lottery table>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 39 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state, and FIG. 40 is an internal lottery table referenced in the RT5 gaming state or the bonus state.

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of the RT0 gaming state to the RT4 gaming state shown in FIG. 39, it can be seen that the types of winning combinations and the winning probabilities related to the replay determined as the internal winning combinations in each gaming state are different. As the most characteristic point, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are internally won in the RT0 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. It is not determined as a combination, but is determined as an internal winning combination only in the RT4 gaming state. In the pachislot machine 1, when "F_chili lip (No. 25)" to "F_reach eye lip D (No. 31)" are determined as internal winning combinations during the RT4 game state, specific control (described later). Flag conversion) is performed, and this specific control will be described later.

Even in the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state, "F_reach eye lip A to D" may be determined as an internal winning combination together with "F_BB1, 2" (No. 3 to 6, No.). (Refer to .15-18), "F_reach eye lip A to D" is not determined alone as an internal winning combination. Therefore, when "F_reach eye lip A to D" is determined as the internal winning combination during the RT0 game state to the RT3 game state (from the player's point of view, the combination of symbols according to the "F_reach eye lip A to D" is (When displayed), the winning combination (F_BB1, 2) related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.

Further, in the RT5 game state, which is a state between flags, the combination related to the bonus is carried over as an internal winning combination as described above. Therefore, in the internal lottery table in the RT5 game state shown in FIG. 40, the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus is always determined as the internal winning combination.

<Comparison table of internal winning combination and symbol combination>
FIGS. 41 to 46 are comparison tables showing the correspondence with the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in each internal winning combination when each combination is determined as the internal winning combination. The circles in each correspondence table indicate the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the effective line in the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 has different stop controls depending on the internal winning combination and the gaming state, and when a predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correspondence relationship shown in FIGS. 42 to 48 is shown. The rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped so that the combination of symbols can be displayed. In the correspondence table shown in FIGS. 42 to 48, all combinations of symbols that may be displayed when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination are listed, but the circles corresponding to the winning combinations are listed. Even a combination of symbols marked with may not be displayed.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the stop control (for example, the symbol to be preferentially pulled in) is made different according to the combination of symbols that can be stopped and displayed and the current gaming state. Even a combination of marked symbols may not be displayed. Therefore, FIGS. 47 and 48 show the correspondence between the type of combination and the combination of the symbols that are actually stopped and displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination during non-flag and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the gaming state excluding the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as a plurality of combinations, a "push order combination" is provided, which is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed according to the order of stop operations (push order) are different. The combination of symbols associated with the "correct answer in push order" in FIG. 47 is a combination of symbols that is advantageous for the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the push order, and corresponds to the "incorrect answer in push order". The attached symbol combination is a combination of symbols that is disadvantageous to the player among the combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order. When notifying the stop operation which is advantageous for the player, the pushing order which is the correct answer is notified, and as a result, the combination of the symbols associated with the "pushing order correct answer" is displayed. Even in the ART game state, the push order that is an incorrect answer may be notified, but the details will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the end of the name of the push order combination indicates the push order that is the correct answer. Specifically, the trailing "1st" of the winning combination means that the correct push order is for the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, and the trailing "2nd" of the winning combination is The correct push order means that the first stop operation is for the reel 3C in the middle, and the last "3rd" in the name of the combination means that the correct push order is the reel whose first stop operation is on the right. It means that it is for 3R. In addition, the end "123" of the name of the role means that the correct push order is "left, middle, right", and the end "132" of the name of the role means that the correct push order is "left". , Right, middle ", and the ending" 213 "of the role name means that the correct push order is" middle, left, right ", and the ending" 231 "of the role name. Means that the correct push order is "left, right, middle".

As shown in FIG. 47, the combination “F_chili lip” is a combination in which the combinations of symbols displayed are different depending on the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, FIG. 41 of the chili lip (see FIG. 35). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the replays (see FIG. 35) are shown in FIGS. 41 to 46. One of the displayable symbol combinations shown is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, the combination "F_chili lip" cannot display the triple chili lip ("C_ chili lip D_01" to "C_1 certain chili lip D_01"), and the single chili lip or the double chili lip ("C_ chili lip"). It can be seen that only A_01, "C_Chillilip B_01", and "C_Chillilip C_01") can be displayed. That is, the role "F_chili lip" is a role in which the triple chili lip cannot be displayed.

In addition, the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles in which the combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different, and when the pressing order is correct, the chili lip (see FIG. 35) is selected. If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, FIGS. 41 to 41 of the replay (see FIG. 35) are shown. Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in 46 is displayed along the valid line. In addition, referring to FIGS. 41 to 46, it can be seen that the combinations “F_certain chili lip” and “F_1 certain chili lip” can display triple chili lip. That is, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are roles that can display triple chili lip.

In addition, the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the reach eye lip (reach eye lip () If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, a replay (FIG. 35) is performed. 35), any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line.

In addition, the order of pressing the correct answers in the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip" and the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be arbitrary, but this implementation In the embodiment, the push order in which the first stop operation is for the left reel 3L is set as the correct push order. Therefore, for example, in a game in which the combination "F_reach eye lip A" is determined as the internal winning combination, when the player performs the first stop operation on the left reel 3L, the reach eye lip is displayed. Will be done.

Further, for the combination "F_maintenance lip A" and "F_maintenance lip B", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the replays (see FIG. 35) is an effective line regardless of the pressing order. It is displayed along with. Further, the combinations "F_maintenance rip_1st" to "F_maintenance rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the replay (see FIG. 35). If any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the valid line and the pressing order is not correct, the RT2 transition lip (see FIG. 35) Any of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 is displayed along the effective line.

Further, the combinations "F_RT3 rip_1st" to "F_RT3 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT3 transition rip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

Further, the combinations "F_RT4 rip_123" to "F_RT4 rip_3rd" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and when the pressing order is correct, the RT4 transition rip (see FIG. 35). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, one of the displayable symbol combinations shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 in the replay (see FIG. 35) is displayed on the valid line. It is displayed along.

In addition, the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the bell (see FIG. 37). Is displayed along the valid line, and if the pressing order is not correct, a bell spill (see FIG. 35) or a first roll (see FIGS. 37 and 38) is displayed.

Further, in the combination "F_common bell", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the bells (see FIG. 37) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the combinations "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the cacti (see FIG. 38) is along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Is displayed.

Further, for the combination "weak chili", any combination of displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the weak cherries (see FIG. 38) is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. Further, for the roles "F_strong chili 1" and "F_strong chili 2", any combination of the displayable symbols shown in FIGS. 41 to 46 of the strong cherries (see FIG. 38) is effective regardless of the pressing order. Displayed along the line.

<Correspondence between the winning combination between the flags and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped>
FIG. 48 is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and in particular, BB (“C_BB1”) during the inter-flag state. "C_BB2") can be displayed. In "whether or not BB is established" in FIG. 48, "◯" indicates that BB can be displayed, and "x" indicates that BB cannot be displayed.

If the BB cannot be displayed, a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination other than the combination related to the bonus determined as the internal winning combination will be displayed. The combination of symbols displayed according to the combination other than the combination related to this bonus is as shown in FIG. 47. For example, in the combination "F_BB1 + F_chilip", the BB cannot be displayed, and the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_chilip" in FIG. 47 is displayed. In this case, during the inter-flag state, only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is correct may be displayed, or only the combination of symbols displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed. It may be.

For example, since the BB cannot be displayed in the combination "F_BB1 + F_3 selection bell_1st", the combination of the corresponding symbols shown in the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" in FIG. 47 is displayed. It is possible to display only the bell displayed when the push order is correct, and to make it impossible to display the bell spilled stitch or the first roll displayed when the push order is incorrect. Further, in the case of the combination "F_BB1 + F_RT3 rip_1st", only the replay displayed when the push order is incorrect may be displayed, and the RT3 transition rip displayed when the push order is correct may not be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, when the combination related to the bonus and any of "missing", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination, BB can be displayed.

<Abbreviation for winning role>
In the above, the correspondence between the winning combination and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped has been described. Next, the data table used when performing various lottery in the general game state, the ART game state, etc. will be described. In the following, the winning combination used when referring to the data table is represented by an abbreviation, so that the data table is used. Before the explanation of, the abbreviation of the winning role will be explained. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing an abbreviation for the winning combination.

As shown in FIG. 49 (A), in the following, the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are referred to as the combination "BB", and the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are referred to as the combination "push order bell". The role "F_common bell" is called the role "common bell", the roles "F_sabo 1" and "F_sabo 2" are called the role "cactus", the role "F_weak chili" is called the role "weak cherry", and the role "F_strong" "Chile 1" and "F_strong Chile 2" are called the role "strong cherry".

Further, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are called "triple chili lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery. Similarly, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are called the role "reach eye lip" when they win the flag conversion lottery, and are called "replay" when they do not win the flag conversion lottery.

(Flag conversion lottery)
Here, the flag conversion lottery will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (B). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, any one of the roles "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" alone serves as an internal winning role during the RT4 game state. Once determined, a flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given.

As shown in FIG. 47, for the combinations "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "triple chili lip", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip". (For example, push forward to aim at the Chilean pattern). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as the role "replay", and information for displaying the combination of symbols of "replay" is notified (for example). , Notifies the push order other than forward push).

Similarly, for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed when the push order is correct, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed. In the pachislot machine 1, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "reach eye lip", and the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is treated. Notify the information to be displayed (for example, push forward to aim at the symbol "white 7"). On the other hand, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are treated as the role "replay", and the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay". Is notified.

By performing the stop operation in accordance with this notification, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" or "reach eye lip" is displayed, and a special privilege is given. From the pachislot machine 1, special benefits are given according to the winning of the flag conversion lottery, but from the player's point of view, the special benefits are displayed because the combination of the "triple chili lip" symbols is displayed. You will feel that you have been granted.

In order to enhance the playability of the pachislot machine, it may be preferable that the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given is different depending on the state rather than being constant. Since the stop control (combination of displayed symbols) differs depending on the type of internal winning combination, the winning probability of the combination is different as a method of changing the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given depending on the state. A method is also conceivable (in the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination can be different depending on whether or not the bonus is activated and the RT gaming state. Therefore, for example, only the RT4 gaming state is used as the gaming state corresponding to the ART gaming state. Instead, a method of providing other gaming states such as the RT6 gaming state and the RT7 gaming state is also conceivable). However, since the triggers for different winning probabilities of the winning combination (triggers for shifting the RT gaming state) are limited, this method lacks flexibility.

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the internal lottery for determining the internal winning combination, the flag conversion lottery and the notification based on the lottery result are performed without changing the winning probability of the winning combination. The appearance frequency of the combination of the given symbols can be flexibly changed according to the state. That is, in a state where it is easy to win the flag conversion lottery, the appearance frequency of the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased, and conversely, in a state where it is difficult to win the flag conversion lottery, the combination of symbols to which the privilege is given can be increased. Can reduce the frequency of appearance.

In the following, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" will be referred to as "triple" to win the flag conversion lottery when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as internal winning roles. It may be referred to as "converting to" chili lip "(or simply converting to" triple chili lip "), and when the roles" F_reach eye lip A "to" F_reach eye lip D "are determined as internal winning roles. Winning the flag conversion lottery of is referred to as converting the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" to "reach eye lip" (or simply converting to "reach eye lip"). There is.

[Flow of the game during the general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 50, the flow of the game during the general game state will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the normal gaming state in the general gaming state is shifted to the CZ in the general gaming state, and then the CZ in the general gaming state is shifted to the ART gaming state, so that the general gaming state (non-ART) is changed to the ART gaming state. (See FIG. 33). FIG. 50A is a diagram showing a flow of a game when shifting from a normal gaming state in a general gaming state to a CZ in a general gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 50 (A), the normal gaming state has a low probability state and a high probability state as a lottery state of CZ. The low-probability state and the high-probability state are states in which the expectation of winning the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is different, the low-probability state is difficult to win the CZ lottery, and the high-probability state is the CZ lottery. It is in a state where it is easy to do. If the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state is won, the game state shifts from the normal game state to the CZ (see FIG. 33).

The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of chance zones of CZ1, CZ2 and CZ3 as CZs (chance zones). These CZ1 to CZ3 are chance zones having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during the CZ, CZ3 is a chance zone to win the ART lottery without fail, and CZ1 and CZ2 are ART lottery with a predetermined probability. It is a chance zone to win. In the CZ lottery performed during the normal game state, the CZ transitioning from the normal game state is drawn from among these CZ1 to CZ3.

Subsequently, FIG. 50B is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ1 and CZ2 in the general gaming state to the ART gaming state. CZ1 and CZ2 are composed of a first half portion and a second half portion. The first half is a period for promoting ranks having different expectations for winning the ART lottery performed during CZ, and the second half is a period for notifying the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank by a battle effect.

During CZ1, 6 levels of modes are used as ranks, and the higher the mode, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ1, the first number of games (for example, 12 games at the maximum) is continued, and the mode promotion lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination. Then, ART lottery is performed based on the mode promoted in the first half of the first game in the second half of CZ1.

In addition, during CZ2, points of 10 levels are used as ranks, and the higher the points, the higher the expectation of winning the ART lottery. In the first half of CZ2, the second number of games (for example, 15 games at the maximum) is continued, and points are promoted by lottery based on the internal winning combination. Then, the ART lottery is performed based on the points promoted in the first half of the first game of the second half of CZ2.

In the latter half of CZ1, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character A play against each other is performed, and in the latter half of CZ2, a battle effect in which the ally character and the enemy character B play against each other is performed. This battle production continues for the third number of games (for example, up to 4 games), and the victory or defeat is managed based on the result of the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is won, the ally character wins and is not won. If so, the enemy character wins. Further, in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, an ART lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination in each game, and when the ART lottery is won, the result of the battle effect is rewritten. That is, when a so-called rare role is determined as an internal winning role during the battle production, an ART lottery is performed and the result of the battle production is rewritten based on the result.

In CZ1 and CZ2, if the ART is not won, the player is defeated in the battle effect in the latter half, and basically, the game state shifts to the normal game state after that. On the other hand, in CZ1 and CZ2, when the ART is won, the battle effect in the latter half is won, and then the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for the ART. In the first half of CZ1 and CZ2, a freeze may occur. In this case, the gaming state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) instead of normal ART (via during ART preparation).

Subsequently, FIG. 50 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when shifting from the CZ3 in the general game state to the ART game state. CZ3 continues the fourth number of games (for example, 17 games at the maximum), and ART lottery is performed for each game based on the internal winning combination. CZ3 ends when the ART lottery is won, and from the next game, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) via ART preparation. Further, in CZ3, a freeze may occur, and even in this case, the game state shifts to CT (additional chance zone) from the next game via ART preparation. On the other hand, when the number of the fourth game elapses without winning the ART lottery in CZ3, the game state shifts to the normal ART via the preparation for ART. That is, CZ3 is a chance zone in which the transition to the ART gaming state is confirmed at the time of transition.

[Data table used during general game state]
Subsequently, the data table used during the general gaming state will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 56.

<Normal medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 51 is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used for the transition lottery of the CZ lottery state (low probability and high probability). In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery state of CZ is changed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery state of CZ is also changed at the end of the bonus and the end of CZ and ART. FIG. 51 (A) is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ based on the internal winning combination, and is referred to every game during the normal game state. Further, FIG. 51 (B) is a normal medium-high probability lottery table used when shifting the lottery state of CZ at the end of the bonus, and is referred to at the time of setting change, the end of the bonus, or the end of CZ, ART.

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the CZ lottery state after the transition in association with the current CZ lottery state and the winning combination.

In the various data tables shown below, the lottery value information is conceptually shown. In the figure, "0" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0%" is defined, and "extremely low" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "0% to less than 1%" is defined. It means that it is specified, "extremely low" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "1% to less than 10%" is specified, and "low" means a lottery probability "10%". It means that the lottery value corresponding to "~ 30% or less" is specified, and "medium" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "30% to less than 60%" is specified. "High" means that a lottery value corresponding to a lottery probability "60% to less than 80%" is defined, and "extremely high" means a lottery corresponding to a lottery probability "80% to less than 99%". It means that the value is specified, "extremely high" means that the lottery value corresponding to the lottery probability "99% to less than 100%" is specified, and "confirmed" means the lottery probability " It means that the lottery value corresponding to "100%" is specified.

Then, in the various data tables shown below, the data are extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (“0 to 255” when the probability denominator is 256, “0 to 65535” when the probability denominator is 65536). The random number value for lottery is sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery value, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative (whether or not so-called "digits" have occurred) is determined, so that the internal lottery is performed. Will be.

With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state has a low probability, it is easy to shift to a high probability when the weak cherry is an internal winning combination. .. In addition, when the current CZ lottery state has a high probability, it can be seen that the high probability is maintained by determining any of the common bell, cactus, weak cherry, and strong cherry as the internal winning combination. ..

The normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B) defines the lottery value information regarding the lottery state of the CZ after the transition according to the situation at the time of reference. With reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table shown in FIG. 51 (B), it can be seen that the lottery state of CZ always shifts to a high probability at the end of the bonus.

<CZ lottery table>
FIG. 52 is a CZ lottery table used for CZ lottery, and FIG. 52 (A) is a CZ lottery table used when performing CZ lottery based on an internal winning combination during a normal game state. B) is a CZ lottery table used when performing a CZ lottery as to whether or not to pull back the CZ at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) defines lottery value information regarding winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3 in association with the current lottery state of CZ and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A), it can be seen that when the current CZ lottery state is in the high probability, the probability of winning the CZ lottery is higher than in the case where the current CZ lottery state is in the low probability.

The CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B) defines lottery value information regarding winning / non-winning of CZ1, CZ2, and CZ3. At the time of CZ failure (when the ART lottery in CZ1 and CZ2 is not won) or at the end of the ART game state, the CZ pullback lottery is performed using the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (B).

<CZ1 medium mode up lottery table>
FIG. 53 is a CZ1 medium mode-up lottery table used for the mode-up lottery of CZ1 in the first half of CZ1. The mode-up lottery table in CZ1 defines the lottery value information about the result of the mode-up lottery in association with the current mode and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (A) described later, in CZ1, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the mode increases, and when the mode increases to 6, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "mode 1 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 1, and the lottery result "mode 2 UP" means that the mode of CZ1 is increased by 2. That is, if the current mode is "2" and the "mode 2 UP" is won, the mode of CZ1 will increase from "2" to "4". Further, when the lottery result "mode 6UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<CZ2 medium point lottery table>
FIG. 54 is a CZ2 middle point lottery table used for the CZ2 point-up lottery in the first half of the CZ2. The CZ2 middle point lottery table defines the lottery value information about the result of the point-up lottery in association with the current points and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 55 (B) described later, in CZ2, the probability of winning the ART lottery increases as the points increase, and when the points increase to 10, the ART lottery is always won. The lottery result "point 2UP" means that the points of CZ2 are increased by 2. For example, when the current point is "2" and the "point 2UP" is won, the point of CZ2 is "point 2UP". It will go up from "2" to "4". In addition, when the lottery result "Point 10UP_freeze occurs" is won, a freeze occurs, and the ART lottery is won and CT is given.

<ART lottery table in CZ>
55 and 56 are CZ medium ART lottery tables used for ART lottery in CZ, and FIG. 55 (A) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ1) used in the first game of the latter half of CZ1. FIG. 55 (B) is an ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ used in the first game of the latter half of CZ2, and FIG. 55 (C) is a CZ used in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2. It is a medium ART lottery table (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), and FIG. 55 (D) is a CZ medium ART lottery table (for CZ3) used for ART lottery in CZ3.

The ART lottery table (for CZ1) in CZ shown in FIG. 55 (A) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of winning of the ART lottery in association with the current mode. Further, the ART lottery table (for CZ2) in CZ shown in FIG. 55B defines information on the lottery value as to whether or not the ART lottery is won in association with the current points. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ1) and the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ2), it can be seen that in CZ1 and CZ2, the higher the rank (mode or point) of the first half, the easier it is to win the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle) shown in FIG. 55 (C) defines the lottery value information regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the internal winning combination. With reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (common to CZ1 and CZ2 for the latter half of the battle), when the rare role (weak cherry, cactus or strong cherry) is determined as the internal winning role in the latter half of CZ1 and CZ2, it is determined. It can be seen that there is a probability of winning the ART lottery.

The ART lottery table (for CZ3) in CZ shown in FIG. 56 (D) defines information on the lottery value regarding the presence or absence of the winning of the ART lottery in association with the number of continuous games of CZ3 and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the ART lottery table in CZ (for CZ3), you can see that if you win the ART lottery in CZ3, you will always win the CT.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 57, the flow of the game during the normal ART will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 usually has ART and CT as ART game states (see FIG. 33), and the CT is used as an additional chance zone. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the game is normally performed with the aim of shifting to CT during ART. FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the transition lottery to CT during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57 (A), the pachislot machine 1 has an ART level and a CT lottery state as states that affect various lottery normally performed during ART. The ART level is provided in four stages of level 1 to level 4, and is mainly controlled based on the number of continuous games during normal ART. Then, the ART level affects the determination of the CT lottery state and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later. In addition, the CT lottery state is provided in four stages of low probability, normal, high probability, and ultra-high probability, and is controlled mainly based on the ART level and the internal winning combination during normal ART. Then, the CT lottery state affects the CT lottery performed during the normal ART and the flag conversion lottery during the normal ART described later.

(Flag conversion during normal ART)
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the roles “F_certain chili lip”, “F_1 certain chili lip”, “F_reach eye lip A” to “F_reach eye” are used during the RT4 game state (that is, during the ART game state). When any one of "Rip D" is independently determined as an internal winning combination, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a special privilege (for example, an addition of the number of ART games or a CT winning) is given according to the lottery result. FIG. 57B is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during normal ART.

As shown in FIG. 57 (B), during normal ART, the pachislot machine 1 performs a flag conversion lottery with reference to the ART level and the CT lottery state. As a result, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given, and a notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" (for example, in order). Notification to aim at a predetermined pattern by pressing) is performed. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" (for example, the notification of the push order other than the forward push) is performed. When the player performs a stop operation according to this notification, a combination of symbols according to the notification content, that is, a combination of symbols of "triple chili lip" or a symbol of "reach eye lip" when the flag conversion lottery is won. The combination of symbols is displayed, and if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

[Data table normally used during ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 62.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 58 is an ART flag conversion lottery table that is normally used for a flag conversion lottery during ART. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the flag conversion lottery during normal ART is performed in two stages. Specifically, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is first performed, and when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won, After that, the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed. Then, when the second stage flag conversion lottery is won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are converted into "triple chili lip", and the first stage flag conversion lottery or the second stage flag conversion lottery. If it is not won, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are treated as "replay" without being converted into "triple chili lip".

FIG. 58 (A) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the first stage flag conversion lottery, and FIG. 58 (B) is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the second stage flag conversion lottery. is there. The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58A defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachislot machine 1, the first-stage flag conversion lottery is performed only for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip", and for the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D". Only the second stage flag conversion lottery is performed.

The flag conversion lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 58B defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the second stage flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the CT lottery state. In addition, until the CT is won once in the normal ART, the "first time (until the CT is won once)" column of the item "ART level" is referred to.

Here, as shown in FIGS. 58 (A) and 58 (B), in each of the flag conversion lottery tables during ART, the random values (0 to 255) in the range of the probability denominator 256 are used in the first and second stages. Since the flag conversion lottery is performed, the two-step flag conversion lottery can be imitated as a lottery performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536. In recent pachislot machines, the main side is required to perform lottery (ART lottery, etc.) related to ball ejection, which was conventionally performed on the sub side, but the capacity of the storage means (ROM) on the main side is limited. Therefore, there is a need for a mechanism that enables lottery without impairing playability while suppressing the capacity.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present invention, by performing the probability denominator 256 in two stages, the probability denominator 65536 can be drawn, so that the capacity can be suppressed. In addition, by referring to the ART level and the CT lottery state for the second stage lottery, it is possible to perform a flag conversion lottery according to the current state as well as the internal winning combination, so that various playability can be achieved. You can perform a flag conversion lottery with you.

<ART level determination table>
FIG. 59 is an ART level determination table used to determine the ART level. The determination of the ART level is performed at the time of winning the ART when the transition to the ART gaming state is decided, and during the normal ART. FIG. 59 (A) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level at the time of winning the ART, and FIG. 59 (B) is an ART level determination table for determining the ART level during normal ART.

The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59 (A) defines lottery value information for each ART level. If a freeze has occurred at the time of winning the ART (see FIG. 53 or the like), the ART level 2 is determined as the ART level. The ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines information on the lottery value for the destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART. Further, the ART level determination table shown in FIG. 59B defines information on the lottery value for the migration destination ART level in association with the current ART level and the number of continuous games during normal ART at the time of CT entry. .. That is, during normal ART, the ART level shifts according to the number of continuous games, and the ART level shifts even at the timing when the normal ART enters the CT.

<Normal ART medium and high probability lottery table>
FIG. 60 is a normal ART medium-high probability lottery table for drawing a CT lottery state during normal ART. The normal ART medium-high probability lottery table defines the lottery value information for the CT lottery state of the migration destination in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. If you refer to the normal ART medium- and high-probability lottery table, you can see the role "Triple Chili Lip" (role "F_Probability Chili Lip""F_1 Probability Chili Lip" winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) "and the role" Reach Eye Lip It can be seen that in "A" to "F_reach eye lip D" (winning the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning) ", the CT lottery state easily shifts (falls) to" low probability ". In the above explanation, if the flag conversion lottery is won, a special privilege is given. Therefore, it seems that the CT lottery state is likely to fall, which is contrary to the above explanation. As will be described later, the roles "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" are always won in the CT lottery. Therefore, even if the CT lottery state falls, the special privilege of CT winning is still given.

<CT lottery table during ART>
FIG. 61 is an ART CT lottery table that is normally used for a CT lottery during ART. The CT lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination. In the CT lottery table during ART, if "cactus", "weak cherry", "strong cherry", "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", and "BB" are determined as internal winning roles, the probability denominator range is 256. CT lottery is performed using random values. On the other hand, when other combinations (for example, replay, common bell, push order bell, etc.) are determined as the internal winning combination, CT lottery is performed using random values in the range of the probability denominator 65536.

The pachislot machine 1 has "normal CT" and "high accuracy CT" as CTs. "Normal CT" and "high-accuracy CT" have different expectations for the number of ART games to be added during CT (additional chance zone), and "high-accuracy CT" has a larger number of ART games than "normal CT". Is easy to add (see FIG. 66).

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
FIG. 62 is a normal ART extra lottery table used for an extra lottery to add the number of ART games during the normal ART. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 63. As shown in FIG. 63 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, CT is performed by playing eight times in one set. During CT, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the number of games is not subtracted when the additional lottery is won, and the number of games is subtracted only when the additional lottery is not won. Will be done. Therefore, during CT, the game in which the number of ART games is added does not end, and the game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times in the same set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 63 (A) and 63 (B), when the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT (that is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip" is won, the flag conversion lottery is won. ), 8 games per set are reset. For example, if a game in which the number of ART games is not added is played seven times in the same set, the CT will end if another game in which the number of ART games is not added is played, but the role "triple chili lip" If the game is won, the CT will be reset, and as a result, the CT will not end until a game in which the number of ART games is not added is performed eight times. Therefore, the CT becomes easier to continue as the role "triple chili lip" is won.

(Flag conversion during CT)
FIG. 63 (C) is a diagram showing a flag lottery method during CT. During CT, the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the role "triple chili lip". As described above, if the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT, the CT is reset. Therefore, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT is reset. It will be set.

On the other hand, for the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D", the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the three-stage table (tables 0 to 2). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), Table 0 has the lowest probability of being converted to "reach eye lip", Table 1 has the next lowest probability of being converted to "reach eye lip", and Table 2 Is most likely to be converted to a "reach eye lip". If the role "reach eye lip" is won during CT, CT is newly assigned as shown in FIG. 67 described later.

As shown in FIG. 63 (C), in normal CT, the table is determined based on the ART level. Further, in high-probability CT, table 0 is always determined regardless of the ART level.

[Data table used during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67.

<Table during CT lottery table>
FIG. 64 is a CT table lottery table for determining a table to be used for the flag conversion lottery from the three-stage table. The table during CT lottery table defines the lottery value information for the table used for the flag conversion lottery in association with the state such as the ART level and the type of CT to be executed from now on. The table during CT lottery table is referred to at the start of CT when it is decided to win the CT lottery and shift to CT, and determines the table to be used for the flag conversion lottery during CT.

<Flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 65 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery during CT. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the table used for the flag conversion lottery and the internal winning combination. With reference to the CT flag conversion lottery table, it can be seen that during CT, the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are always converted to the combination "triple chili lip".

<Additional lottery table during CT>
FIG. 66 is an additional lottery table during CT used for an additional lottery for adding the number of ART games during CT. The additional lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. It should be noted that the winning combination other than the winning combination shown in FIG. 66 is not won in the additional lottery during CT.

In addition, in the additional lottery during normal CT, the number of additional games varies depending on the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won. Specifically, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", it is easy to determine "10 games" as the number of additional games, and during the same CT. When the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won is "9 to 16 times", it is easy to determine "20 games" as the number of additional games, and the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT. When is "17 to 24 times", it is easy to determine "30 games" as the number of additional games, and when the number of times the winning role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more". , "50 games" is easily determined as the number of additional games.

More specifically, in the additional lottery table during CT, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "1 to 8 times", the role "triple chili lip" in the figure is used. The number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" is "10 games", and the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely low" is "20 games". Then, when the number of times the role "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT becomes "9 times or more", the number of additional games corresponding to the lottery value "extremely high" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure becomes " Promoted to "20 games". Furthermore, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "17 times or more", it corresponds to the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure. The number of additional games is promoted to "30 games". Similarly, when the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT is "25 times or more", the lottery values "extremely high" and "extremely low" of the role "triple chili lip" in the figure are supported. The number of additional games to be played is promoted to "50 games".

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of games to be added per game is increased according to the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during CT. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times that triggers the increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), an excessive profit is given to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

<Lottery table with the number of sets added during CT>
FIG. 67 is a lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT, which is used for the lottery for adding the number of sets for which a new CT is given during CT. The lottery table for adding the number of sets during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the lottery for adding the number of sets in association with the type of CT being executed and the internal winning combination. As shown in FIG. 67, when the winning combination "reach eye lip" is won during CT, a new CT is given. When a new CT is assigned due to the lottery with the number of sets added, the new CT is started again at the timing when the CT being executed is completed.

It should be noted that the number of times the above-mentioned combination "triple chili lip" is won is counted only during the same CT, but this "during the same CT" is when the number of sets added during the CT is added to the lottery. It may or may not include the new CT given to.

[Flow of games during bonus state]
Subsequently, the flow of the game in the bonus state will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing the flow of the game when the game shifts to the bonus state during the general gaming state (ART non-winning), and FIG. 68 (B) shows the case where the bonus state shifts to during the normal ART. FIG. 68 (C) is a diagram showing the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the bonus state during CT. As shown in FIGS. 68A to 68C, the pachislot machine 1 has a normal BB and a special BB as bonus types, and determines the bonus type when the bonus state shifts. At this time, if the special BB is determined, after the end of the bonus state, the process shifts to CT via the preparation for ART. On the other hand, when the normal BB is determined, the flow will be different depending on the state before the transition to the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 68 (A), when the game shifts from the general gaming state to the normal BB, an ART lottery is performed during the normal BB based on the internal winning combination. If you win this ART lottery, after the bonus state ends, you will shift to normal ART via ART preparation. After winning the ART lottery, the number of ART games will be added to the lottery during the bonus state.

With reference to FIG. 68 (B), when the transition from the normal ART to the normal BB is performed, a CT lottery is performed at the end of the normal BB. This CT lottery has a 50% chance of winning, and if it wins, it shifts to CT via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state, and if it does not win, it shifts to normal ART via ART preparation after the end of the bonus state. To do. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

With reference to FIG. 68 (C), when the CT shifts to the normal BB or the special BB, the shift to the CT is performed via the preparation for ART after the end of the bonus state. In addition, during the bonus state after shifting from the normal ART, an additional lottery for the number of ART games is also performed.

[Data table used during bonus status]
Subsequently, the data table used during the bonus state will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71.

<Bonus type lottery table>
FIG. 69 is a bonus type lottery table for determining a bonus type (normal BB, special BB). The bonus type lottery table is referred to at the start of the bonus state, and defines the lottery value information for the bonus type in association with the state before the transition to the bonus state.

<Lottery table with the number of ART games added during the bonus>
FIG. 70 is a bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games used in the lottery for adding the number of ART games and the lottery for adding the number of ART games performed in the bonus state. The lottery table for adding the number of ART games in the bonus defines information on the lottery result of the ART lottery and the lottery value for the number of additional games in association with the bonus type and the internal winning combination.

The lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus will be used for the ART lottery in the state of no ART winning (until the winning of the ART lottery in the normal BB transitioned from the general game state). That is, if the number of additional games is determined to be 1 or more (actually, at least 50 games) in the ART non-winning state, the ART lottery is won and the corresponding number of games is given. On the other hand, in the state after winning the ART, the lottery table for adding the number of ART games during the bonus is used for the lottery for adding the number of ART games.

<CT lottery table at the end of bonus>
FIG. 71 is a bonus end CT lottery table used for a CT lottery performed at the end of the bonus state. The CT lottery table at the end of the bonus defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the CT lottery in association with the bonus type and the game state before the transition to the bonus state. With reference to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus shown in FIG. 71, it can be seen that, for example, if the normal BB is performed during the normal ART, the CT is won with a probability of 50% at the end of the bonus state.

[Exceptional game flow during general game state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 72, an exceptional game flow during the general game state will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, basically, the normal gaming state is shifted to the CZ during the general gaming state, and the ART gaming state is aimed at by winning the ART lottery in the CZ. Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the ART gaming state is realized by notifying during the RT4 gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 72, the RT gaming state is controlled according to the combination of the displayed symbols. doing. As shown in FIG. 47, the combination of symbols for shifting the RT game state is displayed according to the order (pushing order) of the stop operation of the player, so that even if the notification is not performed. , It may accidentally shift to the RT4 game state.

Further, in the RT4 gaming state, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" may be determined as the internal winning combination, so even during the general gaming state (non-ART), It is possible to display the reach eye (reach eye lip) to which a special privilege is given. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72, when the player accidentally shifts to the RT4 game state during the general game state (non-ART), the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" can be displayed. In such a state, it is possible to shift to the ART gaming state (normal ART) without going through the CZ.

More specifically, when the combinations "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as internal winning combinations during the general game state and the RT4 game state, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and this When the flag conversion lottery is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is given, and the right of ART is granted. On the contrary, when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "replay" is performed, and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is controlled so as not to be displayed.

<Flag conversion lottery table during non-ART>
FIG. 73 is a non-ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the general game state and the RT4 game state. The non-ART flag conversion lottery table defines lottery value information for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

[Notification by main side control]
Conventionally, in the pachislot machine, the stop operation information (pushing order, etc.) is notified in the ART machine under the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side, but the presence or absence of the notification is in the interest of the player ( In recent years, it has been required to perform notification on the main (main control board 71) side that manages the interests of the player in order to affect the so-called payout). Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information display 14 controlled by the main control board 71 is provided with an instruction monitor for notifying the stop operation information, and the stop operation information is notified under the control of the main side. It is supposed to be.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side. As shown in FIG. 74, the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation by displaying the numerical values of “1” to “11” on the instruction monitor. The numerical values of "1" to "11" uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each, and "1" to "3" indicate the types of reels that perform the first stop operation, respectively. "1" means that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "2" means that the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C, and "3". Means that the first stop operation is performed on the right reel 3R.

Further, "4" to "9" indicate the push order to be notified, "4" means that the push order is "left, middle, right", and "5" means that the push order is "left, middle, right". "Left, right, middle" means "6" means that the push order is "middle, left, right", and "7" means that the push order is "middle, right, left". That means that "8" means that the push order is "right, left, middle", and "9" means that the push order is "right, middle, left".

Further, "10" and "11" are for notifying the role related to the bonus, and "10" means a combination of symbols "C_BB1" consisting of "white 7-white 7-white 7", and "11". Means the combination of symbols "C_BB2" consisting of "blue 7-blue 7-blue 7".

Here, although the numerical values of "1" to "11" notified on the main side uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation to be notified, not all players can clearly grasp the contents of the notification. Absent. That is, there is a possibility that some players may not be able to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the content of the stop operation is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a display unit 100 controlled by a sub-control board 72, and notifies information of a stop operation under the control of the sub-side. For example, when notifying that the first stop operation is performed on the left reel 3L, "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed on the sub side on the left reel 3L of the display unit 100. "1" is displayed above to notify that the left reel 3L is the target of the first stop operation. Similarly, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right", "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "1" is displayed above the reel 3C in the display unit 100 on the sub side. , "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R to notify that the pushing order is "middle, left, right". When "F_BB1" is determined as the internal winning combination, "10" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and "white 7-white 7-white 7" is displayed on the display unit 100 on the sub side. Is displayed to notify the player of the symbol to be aimed at.

As shown in FIG. 74 (A), during the preparation for ART, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. The "bell navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "bell" for the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". In addition, the "maintenance lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" for the combinations "F_maintenance lip_1st" to "F_maintenance lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT3 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_1st" to "F_RT3 transition lip_3rd". In addition, the "RT4 transition lip navigation" notifies the push order for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "RT4 transition lip" for the combinations "F_RT4 transition lip_123" to "F_RT4 transition lip_3rd".

The timing of the notification on the main side may be at least during one game in which the notification is performed, and is arbitrary. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the start operation is accepted, or the main side may be notified at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the above is received. On the other hand, it is preferable that the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is at least a timing before the first stop operation. In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, notification is performed on both the main side and the sub side at the timing when the start operation is accepted or when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started. As a result, before the player performs the stop operation, the stop operation information is notified on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display unit 100 on the sub side.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), during the ART gaming state, "Bell Navi", "Maintenance Lip Navi", "RT3 Transition Lip Navi" and "RT4 Transition Lip Navi" are performed under the control of the main side. In the ART game state (RT4 game state), a flag conversion lottery is performed, and a push for displaying a combination of "triple chili lip", "reach eye lip", or "replay" symbols based on the lottery result. The order is notified, but this notification is not performed on the main side, but only on the sub side.

As mentioned above, the combination of the "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" symbols is related to the granting of special benefits, so the presence or absence of notification will affect the player's profit (ball output). Can also be considered. However, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a special privilege is actually given based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery, and the combination of the displayed symbols does not affect the given privilege. That is, when the flag conversion lottery is won, even if the combination of the "replay" symbols is displayed, a special privilege is given, and conversely, the flag conversion lottery is not won. In that case, even if the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" and "reach eye lip" can be displayed, no special privilege is given.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the combination of symbols displayed in this way does not affect the profit (ball output) of the player, the sub is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side. Notification is performed by the display unit 100 only on the side.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), during the RT5 gaming state (inter-flag state), notification is performed to aim at a combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus carried over as the internal winning combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), when the combination "F_BB1" is carried over, "white 7 navigation" is performed, and as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the combination "F_BB2" is carried over. If so, perform "Blue 7 Navi". The "white 7 navigation" notifies the combination "F_BB1" of the stop operation information for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "C_BB1", and the "blue 7 navigation" notifies the combination "F_BB2" of the information of the stop operation. Notify the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of "C_BB2".

Here, as described above in FIG. 48, in the inter-flag state, the combination related to the bonus and any of "off", "F_special 1", "F_special 2", and "F_special 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. If so, the combination of BB symbols can be displayed, and if other combinations are determined as the internal winning combination together with the combination related to the bonus, the combination of BB symbols cannot be displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 74 (C) and 74 (D), when the main control board 71 is controlled on the main side, the combination related to the carry-over bonus and the “off”, “F_special combination 1”, and “F_special combination” Only when either "2" or "F_special role 3" is determined as the internal winning combination, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" is performed. As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

The main control board 71 may perform "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after notifying that the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination (bonus notification). Here, the bonus notification is performed, for example, by displaying the bonus confirmation screen or turning on the bonus confirmation lamp.

As an example, when the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to perform an effect (so-called continuous effect) performed over several games and display a bonus confirmation screen according to the result of this continuous effect. It is commonly done. If "White 7 Navi" or the like is performed on the main side during this continuous production, the result of the continuous production may be known in the middle, which may spoil the interest. Therefore, the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 performs "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7 navigation" only after the bonus notification is made. The method of making it possible for the main side to grasp the timing of the bonus announcement is arbitrary.

As one method, when the combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 determines the number of games required until the bonus is announced, and after digesting this number of games, "white 7 navigation" or "blue 7" A method of performing "navigation" is conceivable. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the number of games required for the bonus notification, the main control board 71 notifies the sub control board 72 of the number of games. The sub-control board 72 controls the effect according to the number of games, and displays the bonus confirmation screen at the timing when the number of games is exhausted, so that the timing when the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side. That is, the main control board 71 counts the number of unit games since the bonus-related combination is determined as the internal winning combination without carrying over the bonus-related combination, and after the counting result reaches the predetermined number of times. "White 7 Navi" or "Blue 7 Navi" when the bonus-related role and any of "Out of line", "F_Special role 1", "F_Special role 2", and "F_Special role 3" are determined as internal winning roles. I do.

As another method, a method of controlling the bonus notification on the main side instead of the sub side can be considered. More specifically, when the main control board 71 determines the combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination in a state where the combination related to the bonus is not carried over, the effect (at least the number of games required for the effect) to be executed by the display unit 100 is performed. It is determined and notified to the sub-control board 72. By executing the effect notified by the sub-control board 72 and displaying the bonus confirmation screen, it is possible to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made on the main side.

Of course, it is also possible to make it possible for the main side to grasp the timing when the bonus notification is made by another method. In this case, since the main control board 71 cannot receive the signal from the sub control board 72 or the like, it is necessary to grasp the timing at which the bonus notification is made based on the signal that the main control board 71 can accept. .. For example, since the main control board 71 can accept the signal associated with the stop operation, a predetermined stop operation (for example, other than forward pressing) is performed in a state where the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, it is possible to announce the bonus. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 acquires information on the internal winning combination and information on the stop operation from the main control board 71, and the combination of these information is a predetermined combination (internal winning combination “combination related to bonus””. , Stop operation "other than forward push"), give a bonus notification. Since the trigger of such a bonus notification can also be grasped by the main control board 71, the timing at which the bonus notification is made can be grasped on the main side.

[Explanation of operation of main control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 75 to 91, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 31 of the main control board 71 by using the program will be described.

<Main pachislot operation processing controlled by the main CPU>
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after the power is turned on) of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 31 will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 75 (hereinafter referred to as the main flow).

First, when the power is turned on to the pachi-slot machine 1, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the time of turning on the power (S1). In this process, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, whether the settings have been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization is performed according to the determination result.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 33 is cleared. The designated storage area referred to here is a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs medal reception / start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 42S and the start switch 6S is checked.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs an internal lottery process (S4). In this process, the main CPU 31 refers to the internal lottery table (FIGS. 39 and 40) according to the current gaming state, and draws a combination determined as the internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combinations in the internal lottery process of S4 (S5). When the combination "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" are determined as the internal winning combination (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently turns on the RT5 game state flag and sets the game state to the inter-flag game state (S6).

Following the processing of S6, or when it is determined in S5 that the combinations "F_BB1" and "F_BB2" have not been determined as the internal winning combination (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently determined by the state described later in FIG. The game control process is performed (S7).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the main side navigation control process (S8). In this process, the main CPU 31 sets navigation data according to the current gaming state and the internal winning combination based on the correspondence shown in FIG. 74. The set navigation data is stored in the start command and notified to the sub-control board 72. In addition, the notification according to the set navigation data is performed at an arbitrary timing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the reel stop initial setting process described later in FIG. 86 (S9). In this process, the reel stop control information used for the stop control is determined according to the internal winning combination determined in S5 and the current gaming state. The determined reel stop control information is stored in the main RAM 33 and used in the reel stop control process of S12.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a start command transmission process (S10). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates start command data and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. It should be noted that the start command data includes various information necessary for the production such as the internal winning combination.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel rotation start process after performing the wait process (S11). In this process, the main CPU 31 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, each reel is accelerated and controlled until its rotation speed reaches a constant speed by an interrupt process executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). It is controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a reel stop control process described later in FIG. 87 (S12). In this process, using the reel stop control information determined in S9, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing at which the left stop button 7L, the middle stop button 7C, and the right stop button 7R are pressed, respectively. Reel.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning determination medal payout process (S13). In this winning determination medal payout process, as a result of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R being stopped, based on the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line, according to the combination of the symbols such as medal payout and replay operation. Give profits. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a winning operation command transmission process (S14). In this process, the main CPU 31 generates data of the winning operation command and transmits it to the sub-control board 72. The winning operation command data includes various information such as a combination of symbols displayed along the valid line.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the BB check process described later in FIG. 88 (S15). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the RT check process described later in FIGS. 89 and 90 (S16). In this process, the main CPU 31 controls to shift the RT game state based on the combination of the displayed symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs the CZ / ART end time processing described later in FIG. 91 (S17). In this process, the main CPU 31 performs a CZ pullback lottery. When the CZ / ART end processing is performed, the main CPU 31 returns the processing to S2 assuming that one game (unit game) is completed.

<Control processing by state>
Next, the state-specific control process will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the state-based control process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the RT4 gaming state (S31). In the RT4 gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the flag conversion process described later in FIG. 77 (S32).

Following the processing of S32, or when it is determined in S31 that the RT4 gaming state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the normal gaming state (S33). ). When in the normal gaming state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the normal middle start process (S34) described later in FIG. 78, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal gaming state (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ (S35). If it is in CZ (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CZ middle start process (S36), which will be described later in FIG. 79, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CZ (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in normal ART (S37). When the normal ART is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a normal ART start-time process (S38), which will be described later in FIG. 83, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not the normal ART (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CT (S39). If CT is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs a CT start-time process (S40), which will be described later in FIG. 84, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, when the current gaming state is not CT (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S41). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the BB start time process (S42) described later in FIG. 85, and ends the state-specific control process.

On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not the bonus state (NO), the main CPU 31 performs other processing (S43) and ends the state-specific control processing. For example, when the main CPU 31 is preparing for ART, the main CPU 31 performs processing according to the preparation.

<Flag conversion process>
Next, the flag conversion process will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the flag conversion process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the start of CT (S50). If it is the start of CT (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the table number used for the flag conversion lottery during CT with reference to the flag conversion table lottery table during CT (FIG. 64). (S51).

Following the processing of S51, or when it is not the start of CT in S50 (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a flag conversion lottery table according to the current state (S52). For example, when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during non-ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during normal ART, the non-ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 73) is set. , The ART flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 58) is set, and when the current state is the RT4 gaming state during CT, the CT flag conversion lottery table (FIG. 65) is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 performs a flag conversion lottery based on the internal winning combination (S53), and subsequently determines whether or not the winning is won (S54). If the flag conversion lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the flag conversion process (S55). In this process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "triple chili lip".

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in non-ART (S56). That is, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the transition to the RT4 gaming state is accidentally performed in response to the player's stop operation in a state in which the notification of the general gaming state (non-ART) is not performed. judge. If the current game state is non-ART (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S57), then sets the next game to be preparing for ART (S58), and flags it. End the conversion process. On the other hand, if the current gaming state is not in non-ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the flag conversion process.

Further, in S54, if the flag conversion lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 performs the flag maintenance process (S59) and ends the flag conversion process. In this flag maintenance process, for example, when the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_1 certainty lip" is treated as the combination "replay".

<Processing at start during normal operation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the normal middle start process will be described. In the normal middle start process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table shown in FIG. 52 (A) and performs CZ lottery based on the current CZ lottery state and the internal winning combination (S61).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ lottery has been won (S62). When the CZ lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the CZ of the type won in the next game (S63), and then sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. (S64). The CZ game number counter is a counter that counts the duration of CZ, and when CZ1 is won, the first game number (for example, 12) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half). If the CZ2 is won, the second game number (for example, 15) is set in the CZ game number counter (first half), and if the CZ3 is won, the fourth game number is set in the CZ game number counter. (For example, 17) is set.

Following the processing of S64, or if the CZ lottery has not been won in S62 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the normal medium-high probability lottery table of FIG. 51 (A) for internal winning. The transition lottery of the lottery state of the CZ is performed based on the winning combination (S65), the lottery state of the CZ is updated based on the result of the transition lottery (S66), and the normal middle start processing is ended.

<Processing at start during CZ>
Next, the process at the start during CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the CZ middle start process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ1 (S71). If it is in CZ1 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate process (S72) described later in FIGS. 80 and 81, and ends the CZ intermediate start process.

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ1 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is in CZ2 (S73). If CZ2 is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing (S74), which will be described later in FIGS. 80 and 81, and ends CZ intermediate start processing. In the present embodiment, CZ1 and CZ2 differ only in the rank (mode or point) in which the expectation of winning the ART lottery is different, and the basic processing is the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing in CZ1 and CZ2 will be described as one processing as the processing in CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if it is not in CZ2 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently performs the CZ3 middle process (S75) described later in FIG. 82, and ends the CZ middle start process.

<CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing>
Next, the processing during CZ1 (CZ2) will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 and 81. In the CZ1 (CZ2) intermediate processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first half of CZ1 or CZ2 (S81). The main CPU 31 shifts the process to S82 when it is the first half (YES), and shifts the process to S91 of FIG. 81 when it is not the first half (the second half) (NO).

In the case of the first half of the CZ1, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ1 middle mode-up lottery table (FIG. 53) and performs the mode-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Similarly, in the case of the first half of the CZ2, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ2 middle point lottery table (FIG. 54) and performs the point-up lottery based on the internal winning combination (S82). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 updates the mode (or points) based on the lottery result of S82 (S83).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze is won in the lottery of S82 (S84). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process for temporarily stopping the progress of the game, and adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S85). In this process, the main CPU 31 further determines and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). When a freeze occurs, "ART level 2" is determined as the ART level. Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S86), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, if the freeze is not won in S84 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (first half) (S87). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (S88). If the CZ game number counter (first half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (first half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the second half of CZ1 or CZ2 in the next game (S89), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). To do.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 81, in the case of the latter half of CZ1 or CZ2, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the first game of the latter half (S91). In the case of the first game of the second half, ART lottery is performed based on the mode or points of the first half with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIGS. 55 (A) and (B)) (S92). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S93).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). , Set (S94). Following the processing of S94, or when the ART lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value in the CZ game number counter (second half) (S95). For example, the main CPU 31 sets "4" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when winning the ART lottery, and sets "3" in the CZ game number counter (second half) when not winning the ART lottery. "Is set.

Following the processing of S95, or if it is not one game in the latter half of S91 (NO), the main CPU 31 serves as an internal winning combination with reference to the ART lottery table in CZ (FIG. 55 (C)). Based on this, an ART lottery is performed (S96), and it is determined whether or not the ART lottery has been won (S97). If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S98).

Following the processing of S98, or when the ART lottery is not won in S97 (NO), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (second half) (S99). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (S100). If the CZ game number counter (second half) is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter (second half) is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 1 or more (S101). When the number of ART sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S102), and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2). .. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the time when CZ fails (S103) and ends the processing during CZ1 (CZ2).

<CZ3 middle processing>
Next, the processing during CZ3 will be described with reference to FIG. 82. In the CZ3 middle processing, first, the main CPU 31 referred to the CZ middle ART lottery table (FIG. 56 (D)) and performed an ART lottery based on the internal winning combination (S121), and did the ART lottery win? It is determined whether or not (S122).

If the ART lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of ART sets and the number of CT sets (S123). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the freeze has been won in the ART lottery of S121 (S124). If the freeze is won (YES), the main CPU 31 performs a freeze process to temporarily stop the progress of the game (S125).

Following the processing of S125, or if the freeze has not been won in S124 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). And set (S126). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in progress for the next game (S127), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

On the other hand, if the ART lottery is not won in S122 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CZ game number counter (S128). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the CZ game number counter is 0 (S129). If the CZ game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing during CZ3.

On the other hand, when the CZ game number counter is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets, and draws and sets the ART level with reference to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (A)). (S130). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 ends CZ, sets ART preparation in the next game (S131), and ends CZ3 middle processing.

<Processing at start during normal ART>
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the process at the start during normal ART will be described. In the normal start processing during ART, the main CPU 31 first adds 1 to the ART continuous game number counter (S141). The ART continuous game number counter is a counter that normally counts the number of games that ART has continued. In the present embodiment, in addition to the ART continuous game number counter, an ART end game number counter that counts the number of games that can be normally continued by ART is provided. Then, the pachislot machine 1 compares the value of the ART continuous game number counter with the value of the ART end game number counter, and when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter, the ART game state is changed. finish.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61), performs a CT lottery based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination (S142), and whether or not the CT lottery is won. Is determined (S143). If the CT lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of CT sets, sets 8 to the CT game number counter (S144), and then sets the type that wins the next game. Set CT (S145).

Following the processing of S145, or when the CT lottery is not won in S143 (NO), the main CPU 31 refers to the ART level determination table (FIG. 59 (B)) and counts the number of ART continuous games. The ART level is drawn and set based on the value of (S146). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the CT lottery state of the migration destination based on the current CT lottery state and the internal winning combination with reference to the normal ART medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 60) (S147). ..

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during normal ART (FIG. 62), performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S148), and determines whether or not the additional lottery has been won. Judgment (S149). If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S150).

Following the processing of S150, or when the additional lottery is not won in S149 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently reaches the value of the ART continuous game number counter to the value of the ART end game number counter. It is determined whether or not the game has been performed (S151). If the value of the ART continuation game number counter does not reach the value of the ART end game number counter (NO), the main CPU 31 normally ends the process at the start during ART.

On the other hand, when the value of the ART continuous game number counter reaches the value of the ART end game number counter (YES), the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the ART set number (S152), and then the ART end time is displayed. It is set (S153), and the normal start processing during ART is ended.

<Processing at start during CT>
Next, the process at the start during CT will be described with reference to FIG. 84. In the process at the start of CT, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the additional lottery table during CT (FIG. 66) and performs an additional lottery for the number of ART games based on the internal winning combination (S161), and the additional lottery is performed. It is determined whether or not the player has won (S162).

If the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S163). As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the number of times the winning combination "triple chili lip" is won during the same CT, the amount of addition per time increases.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (that is, whether or not it is converted to the combination “triple chili lip” in the flag conversion process of FIG. 77) (S164). ). When the internal winning combination is the combination “triple chili lip” (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently resets 8 to the CT game number counter (S165), and ends the process at the start during CT. Further, when the internal winning combination is not the combination "triple chili lip", the (NO) main CPU 31 ends the processing at the start during CT.

In S162, when the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently refers to the additional lottery table for the number of sets during CT (FIG. 67) and determines the number of CT sets based on the internal winning combination. An additional lottery is performed (S166), and it is determined whether or not the additional lottery for the number of CT sets has been won (S167). If the lottery for adding the number of CT sets is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S168), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

On the other hand, if the additional lottery for the number of CT sets is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT game number counter (S169), and subsequently, as a result of the subtraction, the CT game number counter. Is determined to be 0 (S170). If the CT game number counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start during CT.

When the CT game number counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently subtracts 1 from the CT set number (S171). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of CT sets is 1 or more (S172). When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S173), and ends the process at the start during CT. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 ends CT, sets a normal ART for the next game (S174), and ends the processing at the start during CT.

<Processing at start during BB>
Next, the process at the start during BB will be described with reference to FIG. 85. In the process at the start of BB, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the bonus lottery table for adding the number of ART games (FIG. 70), and draws the number of ART games added based on the internal winning combination (S181). It is determined whether or not the additional lottery has been won (S182). If the additional lottery is not won (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the process at the start during BB.

On the other hand, when the additional lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently adds the winning result to the ART end game number counter (S183). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the number of ART sets is 0 (S184). If the number of ART sets is not 0, the main CPU 31 ends the BB start process. On the other hand, when the number of ART sets is 0, the main CPU 31 adds 1 to the number of ART sets (S185) and ends the process at the start during BB.

<Reel stop initial setting process>
Next, the reel stop initial setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 86. In the reel stop initial setting process, first, the main CPU 31 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the reel stop number based on the internal winning combination or the like (S191). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table and acquires each information based on the rotating cylinder stop number (S192). In this process, the main CPU 31 acquires various information associated with the rotation stop number, such as determination data for each pressing order.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores the rotating identifier in the symbol code storage area (not shown) (S193). That is, the main CPU 31 sets the bits of the entire symbol code storage area (excluding the unused area) to "1". Subsequently, the main CPU 31 stores 3 in the stop button non-operation counter (S194), and ends the reel stop initial setting process. The stop button non-operation counter is for determining the number of stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R that have not been stopped by the player, and is stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 33.

<Reel stop control process>
Subsequently, the reel stop control process will be described with reference to FIG. 87. In the reel stop control process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S201). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is output from the stop switch 7S. If the main CPU 31 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S201.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (YES), the main CPU 31 has a pressing order storage area (not shown) and an operation stop button storage area (not shown) according to the pressed stop button. (Not shown) and is updated (S202). That is, the main CPU 31 manages the type of the pressed stop button by updating the operation stop button storage area, and updates the pressing order storage area based on the type of the pressed stop button and its order. Use to manage the order of stop operations (push order).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 subtracts 1 from the stop button non-operation counter (S203), determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S204), and stores the stop start position in the main RAM 33 based on the symbol counter (S204). S205). The stop start position is a symbol position corresponding to the symbol counter of the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 7S.

Next, the main CPU 31 executes the sliding piece number determination process (S206). This sliding piece number determination process determines the number of sliding pieces specified at the stop start position based on the reel stop control information (stop table group) selected based on the internal winning combination from the rotating cylinder stop initial setting table. It is a process.

Next, the main CPU 31 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72, and stores the generated reel stop command data in the communication data storage area allocated to the main RAM 33. The generation process is executed (S167). This reel stop command data represents the type of reel to be stopped, the stop start position, the number of sliding pieces (or the planned stop position), and the like.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of slip pieces determination data, and stores the stop schedule position in the main RAM 33 (S208). The planned stop position is a symbol position obtained by adding any of the predetermined numerical values "0" to "4" defined as the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Is.

Next, the main CPU 31 sets the scheduled stop position as the search symbol position (S209). Next, the main CPU 31 executes the symbol code storage process (S210). This symbol code storage process acquires the symbol code of the check symbol position data for checking the symbol position of the rotating reel.

Next, the main CPU 31 updates the symbol code storage area from the symbol code acquired in the symbol code storage process (S211). Next, the main CPU 31 performs a control change process (S212). In this control change process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position.

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is released (S213). This process is a process of determining whether or not a signal is no longer output from the stop switch 7S.

If the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button has not been released (NO), the main CPU 31 repeatedly executes the process of step S213. On the other hand, when the main CPU 31 determines that the pressed stop button is released (YES), the main CPU 31 transmits a reel stop command (S214).

Next, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (S215). Here, if it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 31 executes the pull-in priority storage process (S216), and executes the process of step S201. In this pull-in priority storage process, the pull-in priority of all the symbols of the rotating reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop button non-operation counter is 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the reel stop control process.

<BB check process>
Subsequently, the BB check process will be described with reference to FIG. 88. In the BB check process, the main CPU 31 first determines whether or not it is in the bonus state (S221). If it is in the bonus state (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently processes the winning determination medal payout process from the BB payout number counter that counts the number of medals that can be paid out during the bonus state (S13 in FIG. 75). The number of medals paid out in is subtracted (S222).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the BB payout number counter has become less than 0 (S223). If the BB payout counter is not less than 0 (NO), the BB check process is terminated, while if the BB payout counter is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently continues. Process at the end of the bonus (S224). In this process, the main CPU 31 clears various information in the bonus state and sets the RT1 game state flag on.

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CT lottery table at the end of the bonus (FIG. 71), performs the CT lottery at the end of the bonus (S225), and determines whether or not the CT lottery has been won (S226). If the CT lottery is won, the main CPU 31 subsequently adds 1 to the number of CT sets (S227). If the CT lottery is won when the number of ART sets is 0, 1 is added to the number of CT sets in S227, and 1 is added to the number of ART sets.

Following the processing of S227, or if the CT lottery has not been won in S226 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO). S228). When the number of ART sets or the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state, sets ART preparation in the next game (S229), and performs a BB check process. finish.

On the other hand, when neither the number of ART sets nor the number of CT sets is 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently ends the bonus state and sets the normal game state in the next game (S230). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of CZ (S231) with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)), and ends the BB check process.

If the bonus state is not in S221 (NO), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of BB symbols (C_BB1, 2) is displayed (S232). If the combination of BB symbols is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the BB check process.

On the other hand, when the combination of the symbols of BB is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently draws and sets the bonus type with reference to the bonus type lottery table (FIG. 69) (S233). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 sets a predetermined value (for example, 216) in the BB payout number counter (S234), performs the bonus start processing (S235), and ends the BB check processing. In the bonus start processing, the main CPU 31 starts the operation of the bonus and performs various processing such as setting the bonus state in the next game.

<RT check processing>
Subsequently, the RT check process will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. In the RT check process, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the RT5 game state is in progress (S241). When the RT5 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while when the RT5 game state is not in progress (NO), the main CPU 31 is subsequently in the RT0 game state. It is determined whether or not it is (S242).

When the RT0 gaming state is in S242 (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S243). If the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if the "bell spilled eye" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 determines. Subsequently, the RT2 gaming state flag is set to on, the RT2 gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state (S244), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT0 gaming state in S242 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT1 gaming state (S245). When the RT1 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the “bell spilled eyes” symbols is displayed (S246). When "bell spilled eyes" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT1 game state flag, and shifts from the RT1 game state to the RT2 game state. (S247), and the RT check process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the "bell spilled eye" is not displayed in S246 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not 20 games have passed in the RT1 game state (S248). If 20 games have not passed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if 20 games have passed (YES), the main CPU 31 turns off the RT1 game status flag and RT1 The game state is changed to the RT0 game state (S249), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT1 gaming state in S245 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT2 gaming state (S250). When the RT2 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "RT3 transition lip" is displayed (S251). If "RT3 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT3 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT3 game state flag is set to on and the RT2 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state (S252), and the RT check process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT2 gaming state in S250 (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the RT3 gaming state (S261). When the RT3 game state is in progress (YES), the main CPU 31 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (S262). When "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT3 game state flag, and changes from the RT3 game state to the RT2 game. It shifts to the state (S263) and ends the RT check process.

On the other hand, when neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition lip" is displayed in S262, the main CPU 31 subsequently determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of "RT4 transition lip" is displayed. (S264). If "RT4 transition rip" is not displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if "RT4 transition rip" is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 is Subsequently, the RT4 game state flag is set to on and the RT3 game state flag is turned off to shift from the RT3 game state to the RT4 game state (S265).

Subsequently, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not ART preparation is set (S266). If ART preparation is not set (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while if ART preparation is set (YES), the main CPU 31 has the number of CT sets. Is determined to be 1 or more (S267).

When the number of CT sets is 1 or more (YES), the main CPU 31 sets CT in the next game, sets 8 in the CT game number counter (S268), and ends the RT check process. On the other hand, when the number of CT sets is not 1 or more (NO), the main CPU 31 sets a normal ART for the next game, sets a predetermined value in the ART end game number counter (S269), and ends the RT check process. To do.

On the other hand, if it is not in the RT3 gaming state (NO) in S261, since it is in the RT4 gaming state, the main CPU 31 subsequently displays a combination of symbols of "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition lip". It is determined whether or not it is (S270). If neither "bell spilled eyes" nor "RT2 transition rip" is displayed (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the RT check process, while "bell spilled eyes" or "RT2 transition rip" is displayed. If it is displayed (YES), the main CPU 31 sets the RT2 game state flag on and turns off the RT4 game state flag, shifts from the RT4 game state to the RT2 game state (S271), and performs the RT check process. finish.

<Processing at the end of CZ / ART>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 91, the processing at the end of CZ / ART will be described. In the CZ / ART end time processing, first, the main CPU 31 determines whether or not it is the CZ failure time or the ART end time (S281). If it is neither at the time of CZ failure nor at the end of ART (NO), the main CPU 31 ends the processing at the end of CZ / ART, while at the time of CZ failure or at the end of ART (YES). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 refers to the CZ lottery table (FIG. 52 (B)) to perform a CZ pullback lottery (S282), and determines whether or not the pullback lottery has been won (S283).

When the pullback lottery is won (YES), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the CZ of the type winning the next game (S284), and sets the value corresponding to the CZ of the winning type in the CZ game number counter. Then (S285), the processing at the end of CZ / ART is terminated.

On the other hand, if the pullback lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 31 subsequently sets the normal game state for the next game (S286). Subsequently, the main CPU 31 draws and sets the lottery state of the CZ with reference to the normal medium-high probability lottery table (FIG. 51 (B)) (S287), and ends the CZ / ART end time processing.

[Explanation of operation of sub-control board]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94, the contents of various processes executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control board 72 by using the program will be described.

<Sub-side navigation control processing>
First, the sub-side navigation control process will be described with reference to FIG. 92. In the sub-side navigation control process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data has been acquired (S301). The sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data determined by the main control board 71 from the start command data received from the main control board 71. In the process of S301, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation data is included in the received start command data.

When the navigation data is acquired (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the sub-side navigation data according to the navigation data (S302). With reference to FIG. 74, for example, when the sub CPU 81 acquires the navigation data “4”, the sub CPU 81 sets the navigation data for notifying the push order “left, middle, right” as the sub side navigation data. To do. As a result, the content of the stop operation can be notified on both the main side and the sub side.

On the other hand, if the navigation data has not been acquired (NO), the sub CPU 81 subsequently determines whether or not navigation (notification of stop operation) is necessary (S303). In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81 needs to be navigated, for example, when a flag conversion lottery is performed on the main control board 71 or when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination on the main control board 71. Is determined. The result of the flag conversion lottery and the type of the internal winning combination are included in the start command data, and the sub CPU 81 can determine whether or not navigation is necessary from various information included in the start command data. ..

If it is determined that navigation is not necessary (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the sub-side navigation control process. On the other hand, when it is determined that navigation is necessary (YES), the sub CPU 81 sets the sub-side navigation data according to various lottery results (S304), and ends the sub-side navigation control process. For example, in the sub CPU 81, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won, the navigation data for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "triple chili lip" is displayed. (For example, navigation data that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward) is set, and the combination "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the symbol of "replay" Set navigation data for displaying combinations (for example, navigation data indicating a pressing order other than forward pressing). As a result, even if the main side does not notify the content of the stop operation, the sub side alone can notify the content of the stop operation.

<Player registration process>
Next, the player registration process will be described with reference to FIG. 93. In the player registration process, first, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration operation has been accepted (S311). For example, when a predetermined operation is accepted on the registration screen displayed when the operation of the registration button 212b is accepted on the menu screen 212 (see FIG. 29) of the first sub display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration operation has been accepted. To do.

When the registration operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently sets the player registration state (S312). As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub CPU 81 can display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201. Controls the display screen of 201.

On the other hand, if the registration operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the registration deletion operation has been accepted (S313). For example, when a specific operation is accepted on the registration screen of the first sub-display device 201, the sub CPU 81 determines that the registration deletion operation has been accepted. If the registration deletion operation is not accepted (NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the player registration process.

On the other hand, when the registration deletion operation is accepted (YES), the sub CPU 81 subsequently clears the player registration state. As will be described later, in the situation where the player registration state is cleared, the sub CPU 81 makes it impossible to display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 (see FIG. 29) on the first sub display device 201, and displays the first sub display. It controls the display screen of the device 201.

<History management process>
Next, the history management process will be described with reference to FIG. 94. In the history management process, first, the sub CPU 81 acquires the game result from various command data received from the main control board 71 (S321). Subsequently, the sub CPU 81 updates the game history (S322) and ends the history management process. For example, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the type of the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination from the start command data, and the combination of symbols displayed from the winning operation command data (that is, determined as the internal winning combination). Whether or not a role is won) can be grasped. Further, the sub CPU 81 can grasp the current gaming state and the transition status of the gaming state from, for example, start command data. From these game results acquired from various command data, the sub CPU 81 has various values such as, for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, the number of games (number of games), the number of CZs, the number of CZ successes, the number of wins for each role, and the probability of winning. Game history can be managed.

[Switching the display screen of the 1st sub display device]
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, a method of switching the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 (A) is an example of transition of the display screen of the first sub-display device 201 in a situation where the player registration state is not set, and FIG. 95 (B) shows the player registration state is set. It is a transition example of the display screen of the 1st sub-display device 201 in the situation.

As shown in FIG. 95 (A), in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub control board 72 (sub CPU 81) displays the display screen displayed on the first sub display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu. It is controlled so that it can be transitioned only between various display screens that can be transitioned from the screen 212 and the menu screen 212. Specifically, the sub-control board 72 has a top screen 211 and a menu screen 212 based on a touch operation (for example, a tap operation for a predetermined button or a swipe operation on a display screen) acquired via the touch sensor 201a. Switch the display screen between. On the other hand, in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the sub-control board 72 controls the display of the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 to be impossible. That is, in the situation where the player registration state is not set, the player cannot display the game information screens 213, 214, 215 on the first sub display device 201.

Further, as shown in FIG. 95B, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the sub-control board 72 displays the display screen displayed on the first sub-display device 201 on the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212. In addition to the various display screens that can be transitioned from the menu screen 212, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are also controlled so that the transition is possible. That is, the sub-control board 72 controls not only the top screen 211 and the menu screen 212 but also the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 so that they can be displayed based on the touch operation acquired via the touch sensor 201a. As a result, in the situation where the player registration state is set, the player can display the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 on the first sub-display device 201.

As shown in FIG. 95B, the transition order of the display screens between the top screen 211, the menu screen 212, and the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 is arbitrary. For example, the top screen 211 may be directly transitioned to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, or the top screen 211 may be transitioned to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 only via the menu screen 212. Good.

In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 cannot be directly transitioned from the top screen 211, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be made only through the menu screen 212. It is possible to transition to. More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 can be transitioned to by swiping the menu screen 212.

Here, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are not display screens provided with buttons corresponding to the menu screen 212, but display screens provided completely independently of the menu screen 212. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game history, which is information indicating the result of the game in which the player has a strong interest during the game, is obtained from related information such as the payout arrangement and the volume control, which is not related to the result of the game. Display independently. Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in the situation where the player registration state is set, it is possible to transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 without requiring the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to easily access the information (game history) that the player wants to confirm in the situation where the player registration state is set.

On the other hand, the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 cannot transition to the game information screens 213, 214, 215, and the game information screens 213, 214, 215 cannot be transitioned unless a swipe operation that is not on the menu display is performed. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation for transitioning to the game information screens 213, 214, 215 can be handled as a hidden command in the situation where the player registration state is set. For the player, his own knowledge of the pachislot machine 1 allows him to see a more detailed game history that cannot be seen by other players with little knowledge, so that he can play the game more advantageously than the other players. It can be done, and as a result, it can be expected that the game will be actively performed.

(Display of the top screen from the game information screen)
The pachi-slot machine 1 transitions from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 manually or automatically by the player. Specifically, when the back button is operated on the game information screens 213, 214, 215, the display screen is changed from the game information screens 213, 214, 215 to the top screen 211 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 regardless of the operation of the player (automatic transition).

More specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, while the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 are displayed, the insertion operation (operation of the MAX bet button 11 operation, operation of the 1-bet button, and insertion of a medal into the medal insertion slot 22). When the closing operation) is performed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211. In addition, in a state where there is a high probability that the role related to the replay that operates the replay is determined as the internal winning combination (high lip state) such as the ART game state, the medal is automatically generated by the operation of the replay accompanying the replay winning. As a result, the chances of displaying the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 may be limited in the high-rip state. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when medals are automatically inserted due to the operation of the re-game, when the start operation is performed instead of inserting the medals, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 are automatically displayed on the top screen. Transition to 211.

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the re-game operation is performed, when the start operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211, and the re-game operation is performed. If is not performed, when the input operation is performed, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 automatically transition to the top screen 211.

(Display of the top screen (or menu screen) from the display screen according to the menu)
Further, in the pachislot machine 1, various display screens (registration screen, explanation screen, array payout screen, reach eye screen, WEB introduction screen, and volume adjustment screen) that can be changed by the menu selection operation on the menu screen 212 can be displayed by the player. The transition to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) is performed manually or automatically. Specifically, when a predetermined button (for example, a top button) is operated on various display screens, the display screen is changed from the various display screens to the top screen 211, and a specific button (for example, a top button) is displayed on the various display screens. , Back button) is operated to transition the display screen from the various display screens to the menu screen 212 (manual transition). Further, when a predetermined time elapses while various display screens are displayed, the screen automatically transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) regardless of the player's operation.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the time for transitioning to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) is different depending on the type of the display screen currently displayed. For example, the volume adjustment screen for adjusting the volume output from the pachislot machine 1 may be adjusted to an unintended volume due to an erroneous operation if it is displayed for a long time, and the erroneous operation makes other players uncomfortable. Since there is a risk that the screen will be displayed, the screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or the menu screen 212) in a shorter time than other display screens. On the other hand, the registration screen transitions to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212) in a longer time than the other display screens in order to facilitate the registration of the player.

That is, various display screens are set with a time for transition to the top screen 211 (or menu screen 212), and the volume adjustment screen is set with a shorter time than other display screens. A longer time is set on the registration screen than on other display screens.

(Selection function for menu operation availability)
In the pachislot machine 1, the player shifts from the menu screen 212 to the registration screen, the explanation screen, the arrangement payout screen, the reach eye screen, the WEB introduction screen, and the volume adjustment screen, so that the player can perform various display screens. You can perform operations and check various information. Here, the functions that can be selected by the player may be restricted according to the settings of the game store.

For example, a game store can make it impossible for a player to adjust the volume by limiting the transition from the menu screen 212 to the volume control screen (for example, the volume button 212g is not displayed on the menu screen 212). ..

[Modified example of the first embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery during normal ART>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when an advantageous state (for example, CT) is won, the next game is immediately shifted to the advantageous state. In a pachi-slot machine, when performing advantageous control for a player, the advantageous control may be performed after performing a predetermined number of games, instead of immediately performing the advantageous control. This predetermined number of games is called a so-called precursory game. In this modified example, for example, when a CT lottery is won during normal ART, the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursory games instead of immediately performing CT will be described.

As shown in FIG. 96 (A), during normal ART, CT lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination using the CT lottery table during ART (FIG. 61). If you win this CT lottery, it will shift to a state that is advantageous for the player called CT (additional chance zone), so until you win the CT, various lottery for CT lottery will be performed on the main side (main control board 71). .. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs an internal lottery to determine the internal winning combination, and also serves as the internal winning combination, "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip". When any of "D" is determined, the flag conversion lottery is performed using the flag conversion lottery table during ART (FIG. 58).

On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the CT precursor after winning the CT lottery is the CT based on the role after the flag conversion lottery (that is, the role "triple chili lip" or the role "reach eye lip"). We will not perform lottery that gives benefits to players such as lottery. Then, during this CT precursor, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side (sub-control board 72), and the notification content performed on the sub side is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side. For example, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the information for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is displayed on the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the information is displayed. , Information for displaying the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed on the display unit 100.

As described above, in recent pachislot machines, it is required to perform lottery that affects the profit (ball output) of the player on the main side, but in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the lottery of the flag conversion lottery is performed. A period (during CT precursor) in which the result does not affect the profit of the player is provided, and the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side only during this period. As a result, for example, in a situation where it is decided to grant the privilege of being in the CT omen, it is possible to increase the chance of displaying a special combination of symbols called "reach eye lip", and the variation of how to show the combination of symbols increases. Therefore, improvement in playability can be expected.

Note that FIG. 96B is a flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor used for the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The flag conversion lottery table in the CT precursor defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination. When referring to the flag conversion lottery table during CT omen, the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are converted to the role "reach eye lip" with a very high probability during CT omen. I understand. As a result, when the roles "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are determined as the internal winning combination during the CT omen, the combination of the symbols of "reach eye lip" is displayed with high probability. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the player is in the midst of a sign. It should be noted that, again, when the flag conversion lottery performed on the sub side is won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is given, but the privilege is not given.

Of course, the flag conversion lottery during the CT precursor may be performed on the main side, but by performing the lottery on the sub side during a period that does not affect the interests of the player as in this modification, the main side It is suitable because it can reduce the data capacity and processing load.

<Another example of push order for triple chili lip display>
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. If the wrong answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed (Fig. 47). In addition, it is assumed that the correct push order for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is "forward push".

In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the types of combinations of symbols displayed when the answer is incorrect are increased. , The order of pushing the correct answer is different for each of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip".

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 97 (A), in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, the correct answer for the combination "F_certain chili lip" is "forward push (the first stop operation is the left reel). 3L) ”, and the incorrect push order is“ middle push (first stop operation is middle reel 3C) ”and“ reverse push (first stop operation is right reel 3R) ”. Then, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed forward, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed, and when it is "middle pressed", the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed, and "reverse push" is displayed. When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, in the combination "F_1 certainty lip", the correct push order is "reverse push", and the incorrect push order is "forward push" and "middle push". And. Then, for the combination "F_1 certain chili lip", the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed when it is pushed backward, and the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed when it is "middle pressed", and "forward push". When "" is displayed, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, when any of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, "forward push" is selected as the winning combination. "Triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed accordingly, and similarly, when "reverse push" is performed, "triple chili lip" or "double chili lip" is displayed depending on the type of winning combination. .. On the other hand, if any of the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning combination, pressing "middle" will combine the symbols of "replay" regardless of the type of winning combination. Is displayed.

By doing so, for example, when the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, various navigations (notifications) aiming at the chili symbol become possible. Specifically, both "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing forward" and "navigation that aims at the chili symbol by pushing backward" can be performed. If the role "F_certain chili lip" is determined as the internal winning role, the "navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip", and "reverse push". "Navi that aims at the chili pattern" is a navigation that does not display "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed). On the contrary, when the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is decided as the internal winning role, "navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing forward" is a navigation for not displaying "triple chili lip", and "reverse". "Navigation that aims at the chili pattern by pushing" is a navigation for displaying "triple chili lip" (double chili lip is displayed).

In the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, whether or not to perform these navigations is managed by a flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, and navigation is performed under the control of the sub side based on the result of the flag conversion lottery on the main side. Is executed.

FIG. 97B is a diagram showing the relationship between the flag conversion lottery on the main side and the navigation on the sub side during normal ART. During normal ART, when the combination "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 performs a two-step flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 58). On the sub side, the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery is acquired from the start command data, and the navigation to be performed by the display unit 100 is determined based on the result of the two-step flag conversion lottery.

Specifically, when the flag conversion lottery of the two stages is not won at the time of the flag conversion lottery of the first stage, the sub-control board 72 performs "replay navigation". In this "replay navigation", the sub-control board 72 notifies the player to press the button in the middle. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), the combination of the symbols of "replay" is displayed at the time of middle pressing regardless of the combination "F_certain chili lip" or "F_1 certain chili lip".

Further, when the first-stage flag conversion lottery is won out of the two-stage flag conversion lottery and the second-stage flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 performs "chili lip fan navigation". In this "Chile Lip Fan Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_certain chili lip" is an internal winning role, push it backwards to aim at the chili pattern, and the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is inside. If it is a winning role, it will notify you to aim at the Chilean pattern by pushing forward. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed backward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed forward, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

Further, when the flag conversion lottery of both the first stage and the second stage of the two-stage flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 performs the "chili lip alignment navigation". In this "Chile Lip Alignment Navi", the sub-control board 72 notifies that if the role "F_certain chili lip" is the internal winning role, push forward to aim at the chili pattern, and the role "F_1 certain chili lip" is inside. If it is a winning role, it will notify you to aim at the Chilean pattern by pushing it backwards. As shown in FIG. 97 (A), when the combination "F_certain chili lip" is pressed forward and when the combination "F_1 certain chili lip" is pressed backward, the combination of the symbols of "triple chili lip" is displayed. Will be.

As described above, the notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery does not affect the profit (although the flag conversion lottery itself affects the profit, the combination of symbols displayed as a result affects the profit. The notification based on the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery is not performed on the main side (instruction monitor), but only on the sub side (display unit 100). In this regard, as in this modified example, by performing not only "Chililip matching navigation" but also "Chilirip fanning navigation", navigation that does not affect profits can be performed in various ways on the sub side, which is interesting. Is improved.

[Effect of pachislot machine]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Management of duration during CT)
In the pachislot machine 1, CT is usually provided as an additional chance zone for extending the duration of ART, and the number of ART games is added based on the internal winning combination during this CT. CT is performed by eight games in one set, but if the number of ART games can be added during CT, the number of games is not subtracted, and if the number of games cannot be added, the number of games is subtracted. .. From the player's point of view, it is not possible to know how long the CT will last, and as long as the addition is performed, the CT will not end, so that the interest of the game during the CT can be enhanced.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1, if the addition is performed according to the combination “triple chili lip” during CT, the game is reset eight times in one set. As a result, even if the CT is just before the end, the CT will be restarted from the beginning by adding according to the role "triple chili lip", so there is a strong interest in the game during the CT. It is possible to continue the game without getting bored by holding it, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during CT.

In addition, the addition according to the role "triple chili lip" is performed only when the role "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" are decided as the internal winning combination and the flag conversion lottery is won. It is possible to prevent an excessive profit from being given to the player, and to balance the profits of the player and the game store. In the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1, the flag conversion lottery for the roles "F_certain chili lip" and "F_1 certain chili lip" is always won during CT (see FIG. 65), but the winning probability is only an example. It does not prevent the player and the game store from taking appropriate measures according to the balance of profits.

(Number of additional games based on the role "Triple Chili Lip" in CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the number of times the addition based on the role "triple chili lip" is performed during CT exceeds a certain number of times, the number of games to be added per time is increased. As mentioned above, as long as the number of ART games is added, the CT will not end, and if the role "triple chili lip" is won, the CT will be reset. Therefore, from the player's point of view, the CT It is possible to expect that the amount of addition per time will increase as the number of times continues, and the interest during CT will improve. In addition, since the number of times that triggers the increase in the amount of addition per time is more than the number of games (8 times) for one set of CT (9 times or more), an excessive profit is given to the player. It can be prevented from giving, and the profits of the player and the game store can be balanced.

(Bonus notification performed on the main side)
Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation for displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination related to the bonus of "10" (or "11") on the instruction monitor of the information display 14. By displaying, the bonus notification is performed on the main side. Here, the pachislot machine usually has a priority of the symbols to be drawn in, and when the combination related to the bonus and the other combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination related to the bonus is determined by the priority. It may or may not be possible to pull in the combination of symbols according to the situation.

In this regard, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination related to the bonus and any of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. In some cases, it is possible to draw in a combination of symbols according to the winning combination of the bonus, but if other winning combinations are determined as internal winning combinations, draw in a combination of symbols according to the winning combination of the bonus. I can't. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, the instruction is given only when the bonus-related combination and any of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as the internal winning combination. The monitor displays "10" (or "11"). As a result, the navigation on the main side can be performed at an appropriate timing in which the winning combination related to the bonus can be won.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1, even if the bonus-related combination and any of "missing", "F_special role 1", "F_special role 2", and "F_special role 3" are determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus is related. The instruction monitor does not display "10" (or "11") until the predetermined number of games has passed since the winning combination was first won, and the instruction monitor is provided on the condition that the predetermined number of games have passed. Is displayed as "10" (or "11").

For example, a production that is performed over a plurality of games (so-called continuous production) may be performed by winning a role related to a bonus, and during this continuous production, "10" (or "10" (or "or" If it is displayed as 11 "), the meaning of the continuous production will be diminished, and there is a possibility that the interest will be spoiled. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the display on the instruction monitor is not performed until the predetermined number of games have elapsed, and the display is performed on the instruction monitor after the predetermined number of games have elapsed. Bonus notification can be performed on the main side without any loss.

(Notification performed on the main / sub side and notification performed on the sub side alone)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a plurality of types of combinations having different combinations of symbols displayed according to the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation are provided (see FIG. 47), and the symbols to be displayed are provided for these plurality of types of combinations. A combination of granting different benefits depending on the combination of the above and a combination of granting the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different are included.

For example, the number of medals to be paid out differs depending on whether the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed or the combination of "bell spilled eyes" symbols is displayed, and the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. Since the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed and the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip" is displayed, it is different whether or not the transition of the RT game state is performed in addition to the operation of the re-game. The combination "F_maintenance lip_1st" is a combination that gives different benefits depending on the combination of displayed symbols. On the other hand, in the case where the combination of the symbols of "Triple Chili Lip" is displayed and the case where the combination of the symbols of "Replay" is displayed, the replay operation is only performed in both cases. "Definite Chili Lip" is a role that grants the same privilege even if the combination of displayed symbols is different (Note that the role "F_Probability Chili Lip" gives different benefits depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. , The combination of displayed symbols does not affect the benefits granted).

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the combination of giving different benefits depending on the combination of displayed symbols is notified on both the main and sub sides, but is the same even if the combination of displayed symbols is different. The combination of giving the privilege of is not notified by the instruction monitor on the main side, but is notified only by the display unit 100 on the sub side. As a result, the notification that affects the privilege can be appropriately performed by the instruction monitor on the main side that manages the privilege, and the notification that does not affect the privilege can be performed by the display unit 100 on the sub side in a variety of ways. ..

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
In addition, since the notification on the sub side at the time of winning the role "F_certain chili lip" is performed based on the result of the flag conversion lottery performed on the main side, the lottery for whether or not to perform the notification (notification lottery) is performed on the main side. It is managed by. That is, when the winning combination "F_certain chili lip" is won, the privilege to be given differs depending on the result of the flag conversion lottery. Therefore, the flag conversion lottery is a lottery that affects the privilege and is strictly managed on the main side.

On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, the notification as a directing may be performed completely without affecting the privilege to be given. In such a case, the notification lottery itself as to whether or not to perform the notification itself. On the sub side. For example, during the CT omen, the privilege of CT has already been decided, and it is possible to increase the chances of displaying a special combination of symbols called "reach eye lip" (on the contrary, even though the privilege is not given). If it is displayed, it will make the player feel dissatisfied, so it cannot be displayed).

Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, when the role "F_reach eye lip A to D" is won during the CT omen, the flag conversion lottery is performed on the sub side, and the combination of the symbols of the "reach eye lip" is selected based on the lottery result. Notify for display. As a result, in a situation where the privilege of being in the CT omen is decided, the variation of how to show the combination of symbols increases, so that the playability can be expected to be improved. Further, it is preferable that the data capacity and processing load on the main side can be reduced by performing the notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the sub side during the period that does not affect the privilege.

(How to display the game history)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, a first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100, and various information useful to the player is displayed on the first sub-display device 201. For example, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a top screen 211 showing an outline game history on the first sub-display device 201, a menu screen 212 capable of performing various operations on the pachi-slot machine 1, and game information screens 213,214 showing detailed game history. , 215 are displayed. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 registers a player who plays a game and provides a service peculiar to the player. For example, when the registration of the player is not accepted, the game information screens 213, 214, 215 showing the detailed game history cannot be displayed on the first sub display device 201, but the registration of the player is accepted. In this case, the game information screens 213, 214, and 215 showing the detailed game history are controlled so that they can be displayed on the first sub-display device 201. Since confirming a more detailed game history leads to an improvement in the convenience of the player, the pachislot machine 1 can improve the convenience when the registration of the player is accepted.

Here, the first sub-display device 201 is provided separately from the display unit 100 that performs the effect, and the sub-control board 72 is the first sub-display device 201 (and) via a liquid crystal relay circuit (not shown). Since the second sub-display device 202) is controlled and the display unit 100 is controlled via the accessory relay board (not shown), the first sub-display device 201 can be controlled separately from the display unit 100. .. Specifically, the display of the first sub-display device 201 can be switched even during the game (that is, the display unit 100 is executing the effect). From the viewpoint of the player, by switching the display of the first sub-display device 201 during the game, various information can be acquired without disturbing the effect being executed by the display unit 100, which is preferable.

In particular, as in the display unit 100 in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by switching a plurality of screen mechanisms for displaying an image by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation light device B, an effect using a flat image display is used. , When performing an effect using a video display with a sense of depth (three-dimensional effect) and an effect using a curved image display, the effect of the effect can be significantly enhanced, but during the effect, the effect such as the game history can be obtained. Is not suitable for displaying irrelevant information. In this respect, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, information unrelated to these effects is displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided separately from the display unit 100, so that the effect is not impaired. Moreover, various information such as the game history can be appropriately displayed.

By the way, in general, in a pachislot machine, a medal slot is provided on the right side when viewed from the player on the pedestal, and a bet button and a start lever are provided on the left side when viewed from the player. The player operates the right side or the left side (side) of the pedestal portion.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 is provided on the side (right side or left side) of the surface that stands substantially vertically from the pedestal portion 10, and the first sub-display device 201 is displayed on the screen of the first sub-display device 201. A touch sensor 201a for switching the display of the sub-display device 201 is provided. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the first sub-display device 201 and the input device (touch sensor 201a) for controlling the display are provided at a place where the player's hand is located during the game, and the player's operability Is improved. In particular, since the first sub-display device 201 with the touch sensor 201a is provided on the surface of the pedestal portion 10 that stands upright from the horizontal plane, the player can display the first sub-display while placing his / her hand on the pedestal portion 10. The device 201 can be operated, which not only improves the operability but also reduces the fatigue associated with the operation, so that the operating rate can be expected to be improved.

[Second Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 to 109. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment will not be described in detail.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment. Comparing the transition flow of the gaming state of the second embodiment shown in FIG. 98 with the transition flow of the gaming state of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 33, basically, the first embodiment and the second embodiment are basically. The game is played in the same flow, but the game is played in a different flow during the ART game state. That is, the control of CT during the ART gaming state is significantly different between the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a CT lottery is normally performed during ART based on an internal winning combination, and when the CT lottery is won, the gaming state is shifted to CT. On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that CT is set between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. The MB (combination "F_MB") is a continuous operation device related to a so-called type 2 special accessory, and in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the MB is determined as the internal winning combination of the main control board 71. Then, the combination of symbols (combination "C_MB") is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until it is displayed along the effective line.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 98, the MB non-flags in the ART gaming state are set as normal ART, and CT is performed between the MB flags in the ART gaming state. That is, in the second embodiment, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state between the MB flags when (H) MB is determined as an internal winning combination during normal ART. The game is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed between the MB flags in the ART game state, and the main control board 71 performs CT during this period. It should be noted that a method of playing a game so that a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is not displayed between the MB flags is already well known. For example, a symbol that does not display a combination of symbols corresponding to MB is aimed at. This can be achieved by notifying and notifying the push order in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is not displayed.

On the other hand, when the CT is completed, the winning of the MB is prompted (notified), and (I) when the combination of symbols corresponding to the MB is displayed, the gaming state shifts from between the MB flags to the MB gaming state. After that, when the end condition of the (J) MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state shifts from the MB gaming state to the MB non-flag, and normal ART is performed.

<Characteristics of CT performed during the MB flag>
Since the MB is carried over as an internal winning combination during the MB flag, stop control different from that during the MB non-flag can be performed. For example, if the predetermined small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the non-flags, the internal winning combination is "MB + predetermined small winning combination" because the MB is carried over during the MB flags. Although it is a "role", the internal winning combination is only a "predetermined small combination" because the MB is not carried over during the MB non-flag. In the pachislot machine, stop control is performed based on the internal winning combination, so even if the same predetermined small combination is determined as the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the MB non-flags, different stop control is performed. Stop control can be performed based on the information, and as a result, the combination of symbols that can be displayed for a predetermined small winning combination can be different between the MB flag and the MB non-flag.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, it is difficult (or impossible to display) to display during normal ART (during MB non-flags) by making the stop control different between the MB flags and the MB non-flags. By displaying the combination of symbols during CT (between the MB flags), various playability is realized. Hereinafter, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be specifically described while paying attention to the differences from the first embodiment.

[Correspondence between winning role and stop symbol]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100, the relationship between the combination of the internal winning combination and the displayed symbol in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. Since the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment and the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment have different types of roles and combinations of symbols, this point will be described first.

(Type of role used in the second embodiment)
In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the roles "F_chili lip", "F_certain chili lip", "F_1 certain chili lip", "F_reach eye lip A" to "F_reach eye lip D" are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "R_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are used instead of these combinations.

Further, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the combinations "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are used. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" are used instead of these combinations. In the following, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" may be simply referred to as "pushing order bell". Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, a combination (combination "F_MB") related to MB that the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment does not have is used. The other roles may be common to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, or may be different from each other, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

(Type of combination of symbols used in the second embodiment)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, a combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes", and "first piece" is used as a combination of symbols corresponding to the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd". I was using it. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, as a combination of symbols corresponding to the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6", in addition to the combination of these symbols, "MB" Use a combination of "cactus" symbols. The combination of "MB" symbols may be arbitrary. Further, the combination of the "cactus" symbols may be the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the number of medals to be paid out when displayed is the same as the combination of the "bell" symbols (9). Sheet).

<Correspondence between winning combination and stop symbol during MB non-flag>
FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination during the MB non-flag and the combination of the displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 99, the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the pressing order is "F_single chili lip 4". In the case of "forward push", the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed along the effective line. On the other hand, if the push order is other than "forward push", the combination of "chili lip" symbols is displayed along the valid line in the correct push order, and the "replay" symbol combination is displayed in the incorrect push order. Is displayed.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed, and each of them is displayed. In the case of incorrect answer push order for each role, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "double chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed. In addition, in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", in the case of the correct push order for each role, the combination of the symbols of "3 consecutive chili lip" is displayed, and for each role. In the case of incorrect answer push order, the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed.

In addition, during the MB non-flags, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and the correct answer is for each combination. In the case of push order, the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed, and in the case of incorrect push order for each role, the combination of "bell spilled eyes" or "first piece" symbols is displayed. Is displayed.

<Correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol during the MB flag>
FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the relationship between the internal winning combination between the MB flags and the combination of displayed symbols. As shown in FIG. 100, in the interval between the MB flags, in the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when any of the combination "F_MB" and the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination, "chili lip" is always used. The combination of symbols is displayed along the effective line.

More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "single chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and the combination "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" is displayed. ~ In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination of the symbols of "2 consecutive chili lip" is displayed along the effective line regardless of the pressing order, and in the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4", the combination is related to the pressing order. The combination of the symbols of "Triple Chili Lip" is displayed along the effective line.

Comparing FIGS. 99 and 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4" are displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flag. While the combination is different, it does not affect the combination of symbols whose pressing order is displayed during the MB flag.

Further, among the MB flags, the combinations "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" have different combinations of symbols displayed according to the pressing order, and are determined for each combination. The combination of "bell", "bell spilled or first piece", "cactus", and "MB" is displayed according to the pressing order. Comparing FIGS. 99 and 100, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag when the winning combination “pushing order bell” is won. be able to. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flags, while the combination of the symbols is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" and the roles "F_pushing order bell 1" to "F_pushing order bell 6" during the MB flags are used. The stop control for the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" and the stop control for the combination "F_push order bell 1" to "F_push order bell 6" are different.

[Flow of games during normal ART]
Subsequently, the flow of the game during the normal ART of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combinations of the symbols displayed in the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_triple chili lip 4" are different depending on the pressing order. In the pachislot machine 1, when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination during normal ART, a flag conversion lottery is performed, and when this flag conversion lottery is won, "chili lip" is performed. Not only the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of the above is performed, but also the number of ART games is added. On the contrary, if the flag conversion lottery is not won, the notification for displaying the combination of the symbols of "replay" is performed without adding the number of ART games.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the additional amount of the number of ART games when the flag conversion lottery is won is determined based on the type of the combination determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, when the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", the smallest additional amount is determined and the combination Determine the next smallest additional amount in the case of "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", and determine the largest additional amount in the case of the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". To do. As described above, when the flag conversion lottery is won, a notification is given to display the combination of the "Chile Lip" symbols. Therefore, for the player, the more Chile symbols are displayed, the larger the amount to be added. Become.

[Data table during normal ART]
Subsequently, the data table normally used during ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The data tables shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<Flag conversion lottery table during ART>
FIG. 101 is an ART flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during ART defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination, the ART level, and the lottery state. The ART level is information that is controlled in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the lottery state is information that is controlled in the same manner as in the CT lottery state in the first embodiment.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, whether the main control board 71 converts the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" into the combination "chili lip" by using the flag conversion lottery table during ART. Whether or not to draw (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the correct pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100, and when the flag conversion lottery is not won, the sub-control board 72 notifies the winning order. The sub-control board 72 notifies the wrong answer pressing order for each winning combination via the display unit 100.

<Additional lottery table during normal ART>
Subsequently, FIG. 102 is an additional lottery table during the normal ART used for the additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the normal ART of the second embodiment. Normally, the additional lottery table during ART defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the main control board 71 wins the flag conversion lottery, the additional lottery is performed using the additional lottery table during the normal ART, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding lottery is supported. The number of additional games is added (added to the ART end game number counter). The lottery value information associated with the winning combination "single chili lip" in the figure is that the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4". The lottery value information associated with the winning combination "double chili lip" is referred to in the case, and the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the combination "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". The lottery value information that is referred to in some cases and is associated with the winning combination "triple chili lip" is that the internal winning combination when winning the flag conversion lottery is the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4". Referenced when is.

[Flow of games during CT]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 103, the flow of the game during CT of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the method of managing the duration of CT. As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 71 manages the duration of CT by playing eight times in one set, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 is used. The control board 71 has a CT duration based on the number of medals paid out during CT (more specifically, the so-called “difference number” obtained by subtracting the “number of medals used for the game” from the “number of medals paid out”). To manage.

Specifically, the main control board 71 ends the CT when the difference number of sheets in the CT reaches the end number (50 sheets) (for example, notifies to win the MB when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won. ). Here, when the combination of the "bell" and "cactus" symbols is displayed, nine medals are paid out, so when the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, CT). If the flag conversion lottery is not won during the process), the difference number (6 sheets) for which the duration of CT has increased is consumed. On the other hand, when a combination of "cactus" symbols is displayed during CT (more specifically, when a flag conversion lottery is won during CT), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has Maintain the duration of CT.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the main control board 71 performs a flag conversion lottery when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. When the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order.

Then, when the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus" is displayed, the main control board 71 increases the number of difference sheets by 6, and the duration of CT is exhausted, but the flag conversion lottery is won. If so, the main control board 71 adds 6 to not only the difference number but also the end number of CT. As a result, although the difference in the number of sheets during CT increased by 6 due to the display of the combination of the symbols of "cactus", the number of sheets at the end of CT also increased by 6, so if the flag conversion lottery is won, CT The duration of will be maintained.

The flag conversion lottery is performed based on the value of the CT meter. That is, as shown in FIG. 103 (A), the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment is provided with a plurality of stages of CT meters from "1" to "MAX", and the lower the CT meter, the more the flag conversion lottery is won. The probability is lowered, and the higher the CT meter, the higher the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery.

This CT meter is promoted or demoted based on the result of the game during CT. That is, the main control board 71 promotes the CT meter with a predetermined probability when the combination “F_single chili lip 1” to “F_3 consecutive chili lip 4” is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the main control board 71 is the lowest when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT. If the CT meter is promoted with a probability and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, the CT meter is promoted with the next lowest probability and the role is used during CT. When "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as the internal winning combination, the CT meter is promoted with the highest probability.

Further, if the main control board 71 does not win the flag conversion lottery at the time of winning the winning combination "pushing order bell" during CT, the CT meter is demoted. In the case where the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 may demote the CT meter with a predetermined probability, or may always demote the CT meter.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when the combinations "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning combinations during CT, the number of ART games is added. The amount of additional ART games varies depending on the number of displayed dust symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the main control board 71 is used during CT to serve as "F_single dust lip 1". "-" F_single chili lip 4 "is determined as the internal winning combination, the smallest amount of addition is determined, and the roles" F_2 consecutive chili lip 1 "to" F_2 consecutive chili lip 4 "are determined as the internal winning combination during CT. And the next smallest additional amount is determined, and when the combination "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during CT, the largest additional amount is determined.

[Data table during CT]
Subsequently, the data table used during CT will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 106. The data tables shown in FIGS. 104 to 106 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<Flag conversion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 104 is a CT flag conversion lottery table used for the flag conversion lottery performed during CT of the second embodiment. The flag conversion lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the flag conversion lottery in association with the internal winning combination and the CT meter.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 converts the combinations “F_pushing order bell 1” to “F_pushing order bell 6” into “cactus” by using the flag conversion lottery table during ART. Whether or not it is drawn (flag conversion lottery). Then, when the flag conversion lottery is won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "cactus" symbols for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. When the push order is notified and the flag conversion lottery is not won, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are combined with the "bell" symbol for each winning combination via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notifies the pressing order for displaying.

Here, referring to FIG. 104, it can be seen that the higher the value of the CT meter, the easier it is to win the flag conversion lottery during CT, and when the CT meter is "MAX", the flag conversion lottery is always won. You can see that. If the flag conversion lottery is won, the duration of CT is maintained. Therefore, when the CT meter is "MAX", CT continues without ending. If the CT is not completed, the profit given to the player will be excessive. Therefore, when the CT meter reaches "MAX", the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing, and the upper limit of the number of completed CT meters may be used. It may be provided, or both the demotion of the CT meter and the upper limit of the number of finished sheets may be applied.

When demoting a CT meter, if it is demoted immediately after being promoted to "MAX", the interest of the player will be impaired. Therefore, the CT meter may be demoted at a predetermined timing after the CT meter reaches "MAX". Here, since the CT meter is provided in eight stages from "1" to "MAX", for example, the CT meter is demoted after eight games have been performed since the CT meter became "MAX". Alternatively, the CT meter may be demoted after the flag conversion lottery has been performed eight times after the CT meter has reached "MAX". Further, the value of the CT meter after demotion is arbitrary, for example, it may be demoted to the CT meter "1", it may be demoted to the CT meter "7", and the CT meter "1" may be demoted. The value of the demoted destination may be determined by lottery from among "7".

<CT meter promotion lottery table during CT>
FIG. 105 is a CT meter promotion lottery table during CT used for the promotion lottery of the CT meter performed during CT of the second embodiment. The CT meter promotion lottery table during CT defines the lottery value information about the lottery result of the promotion lottery of the CT meter in association with the current CT meter value and the internal winning combination.

With reference to FIG. 105, the probability of winning the promotion lottery of the CT meter is the lowest for the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". It is the next lowest, and it can be seen that the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are the highest. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CT meter is promoted one step at a time, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of steps may be promoted at one time.

<Additional lottery table during CT>
Subsequently, FIG. 106 is an additional lottery table during CT used for the additional lottery for adding the number of ART games performed during the CT of the second embodiment. The additional lottery table during CT defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the additional lottery in association with the internal winning combination. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the main control board 71 performs an additional lottery using the additional lottery table during CT, and when the additional lottery is won, the corresponding number of additional games is added (ART end). Add to the game counter).

With reference to FIG. 106, the additional amount of the number of ART games during CT is the smallest for the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4", and the roles "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4". It can be seen that the number is the second lowest, and the roles "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are the most. More specifically, in the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_single chili lip 4" in which one chili symbol is displayed, the number of ART games of 10 games or more is added, and two chili symbols are displayed. In "F_2 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_2 consecutive chili lip 4", the number of ART games of 20 games or more is added, and in the role "F_3 consecutive chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" in which three chili symbols are displayed, The number of ART games of 30 games or more will be added. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the number of ART games is added according to the number of Chilean symbols displayed during CT.

[Flow of games during CZ]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 107, the flow of the game in the CZ of the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described. The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has CZs 1, 2, and 3 as CZs as in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. In the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the game flow of CZ3 is the same as that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, but the game flow of CZ1 and 2 is different from that of the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. different.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, CZ1 and 2 are divided into a first half part and a second half part, and ranks (modes and points) having different expectations for winning an ART lottery are promoted in the first half part. In the latter half, the lottery result of the ART lottery based on the rank is notified by the battle effect (see FIG. 50). As shown in FIG. 107, the basic flow in such CZs 1 and 2 is the same in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment.

On the other hand, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is significantly different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in the termination conditions of the first half. That is, in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is terminated based on the number of continuous games, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the CZ1 is the first half based on the number of continuous games. Although the part is finished, CZ2 finishes the first half part based on the result of the end lottery. Further, both CZ1 and 2 perform a lock lottery in the first half, and even if the lock lottery is won, the first half of CZ1 and 2 is terminated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), in the first half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 53), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, in the first half of the CZ1, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. This lock lottery is a process of drawing whether or not to perform a game lock based on the internal winning combination. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, it terminates the first half of the CZ1 and locks the game (for example, delays the start of rotation at the start of reel rotation). On the other hand, in the case of a non-winning lock lottery, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ1 and continues the first half of the CZ1 until the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games.

Then, when the first half of the CZ1 has passed 15 games or won the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half of the CZ1 and shifts to the second half. In the latter half of CZ1, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Be sure to win the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

On the other hand, in the first half of CZ2, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the main control board 71 performs a rank-up lottery every game. Since this rank-up lottery is the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIG. 54), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Further, the main control board 71 performs an end lottery for each game in the first half of the CZ1, and when the end lottery is won, the first half of the CZ1 is ended and the latter half is moved to the end lottery, but the end lottery is not performed. In the case of winning, the first half of CZ1 is continued.

Further, in the first half of the CZ2, the main control board 71 performs a lock lottery every game. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the lock lottery, the first half of the CZ2 is terminated and the game is locked. On the other hand, when the lock lottery is not won, the main control board 71 does not end the first half of the CZ2, but continues the first half of the CZ2 until the end lottery is won.

Then, when the main control board 71 wins the end lottery or the lock lottery, the main control board 71 ends the first half portion of the CZ2 and shifts to the second half portion. In the latter half of CZ2, the main control board 71 performs ART lottery based on the rank obtained as a result of the rank-up lottery in the first half. Since this ART lottery is also the same as that of the first embodiment (see FIGS. 55 (B) and 55 (C)), detailed description thereof will be omitted. Be sure to win the ART lottery. If the ART lottery is not won, the main control board 71 shifts to the normal gaming state, and if the ART lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts to the ART gaming state via ART preparation. ..

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the lock lottery is performed every game in the first half of the CZ1 and CZ1 and 2. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment is different from the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment in that the end condition of the first half of the CZ2 is not the number of continuous games but the end lottery.

[Data table in CZ]
Subsequently, the data table used in CZ will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 and 109. The data tables shown in FIGS. 108 and 109 are stored in the main ROM 32 of the main control board 71.

<CZ2 end lottery table>
FIG. 108 is a CZ2 end lottery table used for the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment. The CZ2 end lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the end lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

With reference to FIG. 108, in the first half of CZ2 of the second embodiment, when the combination “replay” is determined as the internal winning combination, the ending lottery is performed, and the ending lottery can be won with a high probability. I understand. Since CZ2 is basically performed during the RT0 to RT3 gaming states, the combination "replay" is any of the combinations "F_maintenance lip A" to "F_RT4 lip_3rd". In the pachislot machine, the replay is determined as an internal winning combination with a probability of at least a predetermined value (about 1 / 7.3) or more. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the first half of the CZ2 may end. It turns out that it happens relatively frequently.

<Lock lottery table>
Subsequently, FIG. 109 is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1 and 2 of the second embodiment, and FIG. 109 (A) is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1. FIG. 109 (B) is a lock lottery table used for the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2. The lock lottery table defines lottery value information about the lottery result of the lock lottery in association with the internal winning combination.

Comparing FIGS. 109 (A) and 109 (B), it can be seen that the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 has a higher probability of winning than the lock lottery performed in the first half of CZ1.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the first half of CZ1 ends when the predetermined number of games (15 games) elapses, while the first half of CZ2 ends when the end lottery is won. Further, in the first half of CZ1 and 2, a rank-up lottery is performed, and when the first half of CZ1, 2 is completed, an ART lottery is performed based on the result of this rank-up lottery. Therefore, it can be said that CZ1 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is fixed, and CZ2 is a chance zone in which the timing of ART lottery is indefinite.

In addition, since the end lottery performed in the first half of CZ2 is performed when the winning combination "replay" is determined as the internal winning combination with a relatively high probability, the rank-up lottery is performed during CZ2 as compared with that during CZ1. It is easy to receive less chance. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the lock lottery is performed in the first half of the CZ1 and 2, and the probability of winning the lock lottery is higher in the CZ2 than in the CZ1. As a result, even CZ2, which tends to receive less chance of receiving a rank-up lottery, can be expected to shift to ART.

[Modified example of the second embodiment]
The pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment will be described.

<CT precursor game and notification lottery>
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, in order to facilitate understanding, when shifting between the MB flags during normal ART, it is decided to immediately shift to CT from the next game, but shifting between the MB flags. After that, a predetermined number of precursor games may be inserted.

As shown in FIG. 110 (A), when the MB is normally determined as the internal winning combination during ART, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from between the MB non-flags and between the MB flags. During normal ART (between MB non-flags), the number of ART games will be added if the role "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won in the flag conversion lottery (see FIG. 102). The flag conversion lottery until the transition between the MB flags is performed on the main side (main control board 71) because it affects the privilege given to the player.

Here, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is always displayed regardless of the pressing order between the MB flags. From the stop control (combination of displayed symbols), the player may know that the precursory game is in progress. For example, as shown in FIG. 99, during the MB non-flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is not displayed by pressing forward when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is won. , When the combination of the symbols of "Chililip" is displayed by pressing forward, the player knows that it is during the MB flag (during the precursory game).

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the push order is intentionally notified. As described above, when the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB flag, the combination of the symbols of "chili lip" is displayed regardless of the pressing order. However, when the push order is notified, the player recognizes that the combination of the "chili lip" symbols is displayed according to the notified push order, and the player is in the middle of the MB flags. It can be difficult to grasp.

Since such notification of the push order does not affect the profit of the player in any way, in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, a lottery (notification) as to whether or not to notify the push order during the MB flag is drawn. Lottery) is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side. Of course, the notification lottery between the MB flags may be performed on the main side, but the data capacity on the main side can be obtained by performing the lottery that does not affect the profit of the player as in this modification. It is suitable because it can reduce the processing load.

FIG. 110B is a notification lottery table in the CT precursor used for the notification lottery performed on the sub side, and is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 82. The notification lottery table during the CT omen defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the notification lottery performed on the sub side in association with the internal winning combination.

When the notification lottery using the notification lottery table in the CT precursor is won, the sub-control board 72 notifies an arbitrary push order other than the forward push via the display unit 100.

<Navigation at the time of winning the push order bell between MB flags>
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment described above, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won during the MB flags, more kinds of symbol combinations are displayed than during the MB non-flags. Specifically, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "bell" and "bell spilled eyes or the first sheet" is displayed according to the pressing order, while during the MB flags, "bell" is displayed according to the pressing order. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the pressing order required to display the combination of "cactus" symbols that can be displayed only between the MB flags is notified during the CT between the MB flags. ..

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, when the winning combination "pushing order bell" is won between the MB flags, the notification content is changed according to the state up to the start of the MB.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, when MB is normally determined as an internal winning combination during ART, the gaming state shifts between the MB flags, and then CT is performed. In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 that sandwiches a predetermined number of precursor games after shifting between the MB flags, the states during the MB flags are divided into a “precursor game” state, a “CT” state, and a “MB waiting” state. be able to.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, when the MB is hit during the normal ART, it is in the "precursor game" state between the MB flags, and after that, when the precursor game is performed a predetermined number of times and the CT is started, It will be in the "CT" state during the MB flag, and then when the CT is completed, it will be in the "MB waiting" state until the MB wins.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, the notification content at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different depending on the state between these MB flags. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111, in the "precursor game" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 display a combination of "bell" symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. Notify the push order. Further, in the "CT" state, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the "bell" or "cactus" symbols is displayed via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. That is, in the "CT" state, the push order corresponding to either the "bell" or the "cactus" is notified based on the result of the flag conversion lottery based on the CT meter as described above.

In the "MB standby" state after the CT is completed, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the arbitrary combination of symbols via the instruction monitor and the display unit 100. For example, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 may notify the push order in which the combination of the “bell” symbols is displayed, or the push order in which the combination of the “cactus” symbols is displayed. It may be notified, or it may be notified of the pressing order in which the combination of "MB" symbols is displayed.

On the other hand, since the combination of the "cactus" symbols cannot be displayed during normal ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the pressing order in which the combination of the "bell" symbols is displayed.

[Effect of the pachislot machine of the second embodiment]
The second embodiment of the pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. According to such a pachislot machine 1, the following effects can be expected.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between the MB flags)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, more kinds of symbol combinations can be displayed during the MB flag than during the MB non-flag when the winning combination “pushing order bell” is won. Specifically, the combination of "bell", "bell spilled eyes or the first piece" is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB non-flags, while it is displayed according to the pressing order during the MB flags. The combination of the symbols of "bell", "cactus", "MB", "bell spilled eye or first piece" is displayed.

As a result, it is possible to increase the types of combinations of symbols displayed between the MB flags without increasing the types of winning combinations, and it is possible to give diversity to the games between the MB flags. Specifically, it is now possible to display a combination of "cactus" symbols corresponding to the so-called rare role between the MB flags, and the appearance frequency of the rare role without changing the type of winning role and the winning probability. Can be enhanced. In particular, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is changed, it is possible to increase the frequency of appearance of the rare combination with the payout of medals.

If the combination of "cactus" symbols is continuously displayed between the MB flags, it will be known that the combination is between the MB flags. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the combination of the "cactus" symbols is notified only when the flag conversion lottery is won, and the combination of the "bell" symbols is notified in the case of non-winning. This makes it difficult for the player to understand the current state, which is preferable. In addition, by controlling the notification content by the flag conversion lottery, the frequency of the symbol combination (rare role) of the "cactus" between the MB flags can be adjusted, and the playability between the MB flags can be diversified. Can be done.

(Playability during CT)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT, which is an additional chance zone for adding the number of ART games, is performed between the MB flags. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continuously performed between the MB flags until the difference number reaches the end number (50 sheets). During this CT, if you do not win the flag conversion lottery when you win the role "push order bell", the difference number will increase and the duration of CT will be exhausted, while if you win the flag conversion lottery, the number of ends will increase as the difference number increases. Increases and the duration of CT is maintained. As a result, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, CT is continued according to the combination of displayed symbols (specifically, according to the result of the flag conversion lottery) while changing the stop control during the MB flag. Since the period can be controlled, the playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

At this time, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, since the probability of winning the flag conversion lottery is controlled based on the value of the CT meter, the duration of CT is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter. Can be done. In addition, this CT meter is promoted when the roles "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip 4" are determined as internal winning roles during CT, and is demoted if the winning combination is not won in the inter-flag lottery during CT. The player will be keenly interested in the result of the game during CT, and the game playability between the MB flags can be diversified.

In particular, if the CT meter can be promoted to "MAX", the flag conversion lottery will always be won for a predetermined period of time. Is improved.

(Combination of symbols that can be displayed between MB flags and MB non-flags)
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, not only the combination of the symbols displayed at the time of winning the combination "pushing order bell" is different between the MB flag interval and the MB non-flag interval, but also the combination "F_single chili lip". The combination of symbols displayed at the time of winning "1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" is also different. That is, while the MB non-flags are displayed, the combination of "replay" or "chili lip" symbols is displayed depending on the pressing order, while the combination of "replay" symbols is displayed during the MB flags. Only the combination of "Chililip" symbols is displayed without.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the flag conversion lottery is performed both between the MB flags and between the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the role "pushing order bell" from the combination of the symbols of "bell" or "cactus", and also during the MB non-flags. The flag conversion lottery is to draw the target to be notified at the time of winning the combination "F_single chili lip 1" to "F_3 consecutive chili lip" from the combination of the symbols of "replay" or "chili lip". By performing the flag conversion lottery between the MB flags and the MB non-flags in this way, it is possible to control the combination of the displayed symbols both between the MB flags and the MB non-flags. It is possible to enhance the playability of both flags and non-flags.

At this time, the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB flags is adjusted based on the value of the CT meter, and the winning probability of the flag conversion lottery between the MB non-flags is adjusted based on the ART level and the lottery state. The flag. As a result, each lottery can be managed in its own mode, and the playability based on the flag conversion lottery is improved.

(Notification lottery on the sub side)
Since the stop control is different between the MB flags and the MB non-flags, it may be known from the combination of the displayed symbols that the MB flags are in the middle. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the second embodiment, the originally unnecessary push order is notified during the MB flags, and it is difficult to grasp that the push order is between the MB flags. Then, by managing the notification of the push order on the sub side, the data capacity and the processing load on the main side can be reduced.

[Modification example]
Although the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this.

(Bernavi between flags and Bellnavi between non-flags)
For example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, notification is performed on the main side by displaying a numerical value uniquely corresponding to the stop operation information on the instruction monitor. Since the mode of notification on the main side is basically the same in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, an example thereof is shown in FIG. 74 of the first embodiment. Here, in FIG. 74, while "white 7 navigation" and "blue 7 navigation" are performed during the inter-flag state, "bell navigation" and the like are not performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and inter-flags are not performed. It is also possible to perform "Bell Navi" or the like during the state.

In this case, the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor may be different between the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag-to-flag state. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 74 (A) and 74 (B), when "Bell Navi" is performed in the non-flag state, numerical values "1" to "3" (pushing order second instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. ) Is displayed, as shown in FIG. 112, when "Bell Navi" is performed in the state between flags, the numerical values "12" to "14" (pushing order first instruction information) are displayed on the instruction monitor. May be. The navigation on the sub side performed via the display unit 100 may be common to both the flag-to-flag state and the non-flag-to-flag state. Further, the same applies to the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment, and the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB non-flag and the numerical value when "Bell Navi" is performed during the MB flag are different. May be.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, it is determined whether or not to give a privilege based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification content is controlled based on the result of the flag conversion lottery, and as a result, the combination of symbols displayed when the notification-following stop operation is performed. It will be different. Therefore, the main control board 71 may give a privilege based on the combination of the actually displayed symbols.

In this case, the main control board 71 grants a privilege based on the combination of symbols displayed based on the notification performed according to the result of the flag conversion lottery, and is based on the combination of symbols displayed without following the notification. Therefore, the privilege may not be given. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the combination of the symbols displayed is different depending on the pressing order, so that when the player ignores the notification and performs the stop operation, There is a possibility that a special combination of symbols such as "triple chili lip" will be displayed. However, even if a special symbol combination is displayed as a result of ignoring the notification, the privilege is given only when the special symbol combination is displayed as a result of following the notification without granting the privilege. It may be that.

(Control of notification that does not affect profits (privileges))
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment and the second embodiment, the notification that affects the profit is performed by the notification lottery (flag conversion lottery) on the main side, and whether or not the notification is performed on the main side is controlled. For notifications that do not affect profits, the sub side performs a notification lottery, and the sub side controls whether or not to perform notifications. Then, as an example of the notification that does not affect the profit, the pachislot machine 1 according to the first embodiment shows the notification of the "reach eye lip" during the precursory game, and the pachislot machine 1 according to the second embodiment shows the notification. It shows the notification of "chili lip" during the MB flag. In this respect, notifications that do not affect profits are not limited to these.

In recent pachislot machines, the game may be changed to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game according to the order of stop operations. For example, transitioning to a state where it is easy to lock the game when the pressing order is "left, middle, right", and transitioning to a state where it is difficult to lock the game when the pressing order is "right, middle, left". There is. In such a pachislot machine, by notifying the push order, it is possible to shift to a state in which it is easy (difficult) to lock the game, but if whether or not to lock the game affects the profit, , While it is necessary to control this notification on the main side, if whether or not to lock the game does not affect the profit, this notification may be controlled on the sub side.

In addition, the case where whether or not the game lock is performed affects the profit is, for example, the case where the game lock is performed as in the pachislot machine 1 of the second embodiment and the ART lottery is won. There is (see FIG. 107). On the other hand, the case where whether or not the game lock is performed does not affect the profit is the case where the game lock is performed as an effect. For example, during a precursory game in which it is decided to give a profit (privilege). By making the game lock frequently, it is shown in a dramatic manner that profits will be given in the subsequent games.

FIG. 113 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence between the push order and the locked state. In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), when the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of "left, middle, right" when the winning combination "F_maintenance lip A" is won, the lock state changes from "0" to "1". , "Left, right, middle" "middle, left, right" "middle, right, left" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order, the current locked state is maintained, "right, left, middle" "right" When the stop operation is performed in the pressing order of ", middle, left", the lock state changes from "1" to "0". Similarly, the same applies when the winning combination "F_Maintenance Lip B" is won, and when the stop operation is performed in the first pressing order, the lock state changes from "0" to "1", and in the second pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, the locked state is maintained, and when the stop operation is performed in the third pressing order, the locked state changes from "1" to "0".

In the example shown in FIG. 113 (A), in order to simplify the explanation, the locked state "0" is set to a state in which it is difficult to lock the game, and the locked state "1" is set to a state in which the game is easily locked. Of course, the locked state is not limited to two stages, and may be a number of stages of three or more stages, and in the case of three or more stages, the transition may be performed in multiple stages at once instead of transitioning one stage at a time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 113 (B), when the game lock affects the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, and the lottery result is used. Based on this, both the main side and the sub side notify the predetermined push order. On the other hand, when the game lock does not affect the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the sub (sub-control board 72) side, and a predetermined push order is performed on the sub side based on the lottery result. Is notified.

Depending on the pachislot machine, there are pachislot machines in which the game lock affects the profit for the entire period of the game, and there are pachislot machines in which the game lock does not affect the profit for the entire period of the game. In some pachislot machines, the game lock affects the profit during a predetermined period, while the game lock does not affect the profit during a specific period of the game. Therefore, in the pachislot machine 1, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, a notification lottery for whether or not to perform notification is performed on the main side, and a predetermined push is performed on both the main side and the sub side based on the lottery result. While notifying the order, during the period when the game lock affects the profit, the sub side performs a notification lottery as to whether or not to notify, and the sub side notifies the predetermined push order based on the lottery result. May be.

Since the game lock is normally performed by the main control board 71, the main control board 71 has a function of transitioning the lock state according to the push order shown in FIG. 113 (A). That is, the main control board 71 draws lots for whether or not to lock the game with a probability according to the lock state setting means for setting the lock state based on the order of the detected stop operations and the lock state set by the lock state setting means. When it is determined that the game lock determination means determines the game lock and the game lock determination means performs the game lock, the game lock determination means functions as a lock execution means for temporarily stopping the progress of the game. Then, the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 is a notification lottery means for performing a notification lottery as to whether or not to notify the push order in which the lock state setting means sets the lock state in which the game lock is easy (difficult). , And functions as a notification means for notifying a predetermined push order based on the lottery result of the notification lottery means.

(Normally ART and CT termination conditions)
Normally, the termination conditions for ART and CT are not limited to those described above, and any termination conditions can be adopted. For example, the number of medals awarded during normal ART or CT, the number of unit games during normal ART or CT, the number of times that information advantageous to the player is notified during normal ART or CT, and the predetermined number of games (for example, 50 games). ) Can be used as one set, and any end condition such as the number of sets and the continuation rate at the end of one set can be adopted.

Further, as the number of medals given during normal ART or CT, for example, the difference number (net increase number) obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out in the same game is used. May be. In addition, the number of medals given during normal ART or CT may be calculated based on the actually increased medals (calculation based on the actual value), and notification is given regardless of whether or not the number has actually increased. It may be calculated based on the number of medals to be increased according to the above (calculation based on the ideal value). In addition, the number of medals awarded may not be increased depending on the type of internal winning combination. For example, for some of the winning combinations that are unlikely to be determined as the internal winning combination, or for the combination that shows / hides the combination of symbols according to the timing of the stop operation, the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination. However, the number of medals awarded may not be increased or decreased.

(Type of notification (pushing order, timing))
In addition, the content of the notification normally performed during ART or CT is also arbitrary, and the order of the stop operations (pushing order) in which the combination of symbols advantageous to the player is displayed may be notified, and the combination of the symbols may be notified. May be notified of the timing of the stop operation (design to be aimed at) required for displaying.

(Other)
In addition, as an advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the re-game is not changed (or changed within a range that does not affect the game playability), and the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is also possible to use the so-called "AT", which activates the replay high probability state (replay time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the replay is high, and the stop operation which is advantageous for the player. The so-called "ART" that notifies the aspect may be used.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 described above, various display screens are displayed on the first sub-display device 201 provided on the left side (MAX bet button 11 and start lever 6 side) of the pedestal portion 10. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and various display screens may be displayed on the second sub display device 202 provided on the right side of the pedestal portion 10 (the medal insertion slot 22 side). Similarly, a touch sensor may be provided on the display surface of the second sub display device 202, and the display screen of the second sub display device 202 may be switched based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor.

(White 7 (blue 7) navigation and bell navigation between the flags)
In the above embodiment, during the inter-flag state, one of the bonus-related combination (“F_BB1” and “F_BB2”) and “missing”, “F_special 1”, “F_special 2”, and “F_special 3” is used as the internal winning combination. When it is decided, BB ("C_BB1" and "C_BB2") is controlled so as to be displayable, and when the winning combination and other roles such as the push order combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination is determined. The BB is controlled so that it cannot be displayed (see FIG. 48). Such control is performed based on the attraction priority of a plurality of combinations, and in the above embodiment, the attraction priority is higher than the combination related to the bonus and the push order combination and the like. Such stop control is performed.

By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, it is also possible to perform stop control in which the role related to the bonus is prioritized to be drawn in, and the role related to the bonus is given priority over the role related to the payout of medals such as the push order role. is there. Therefore, with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115, the white 7 or blue 7 navigator and the bell navigator in the pachislot machine that draws in the bonus-related combination in preference to the medal payout combination (for example, the push order combination). The relationship with is explained.

In the following, White 7 Navi will be described as an example, and the description of Blue 7 Navi will be omitted, but Blue 7 Navi will have the same relationship as White 7. Further, in the above embodiment, a three-choice push-order combination (“F_3 choice bell_1st”, etc.) is used as the push order combination, but in the example shown below, six choices are used in order to clarify the explanation. The push order combination ("F_6 choice bell_123") will be used. In this case, as described above, the end of the name of the combination in the six-choice push order combination means the correct push order.

FIG. 114 (A) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped (some combinations are omitted), and corresponds to FIG. 48 of the above embodiment. It is a figure to do. FIG. 114A shows, in particular, whether or not BB (“C_BB1”) can be displayed during the inter-flag state. In the example shown in FIG. 114 (A), during the inter-flag state, not only the combination related to the bonus and the “missing” are determined as the internal winning combination, but also the combination related to the bonus and the push order combination (“F_6”). The BB can be displayed even when "selection bell_123" to "F_6 selection bell_321") are determined as internal bonuses.

Subsequently, FIG. 114 (B) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship (some combinations are omitted) between the winning combination in the inter-flag state and the combination of the symbols displayed as stopped. In the pachi-slot machine 1, since the stop control differs depending on the timing of the stop operation (so-called "pressing") and the order of the stop operation (so-called "pushing order"), a bonus is given to the push order combination as in this modification. When the combination related to the above is preferentially drawn in, the combination of symbols shown in FIG. 114 (B) is displayed.

Specifically, when the bonus-related role ("F_BB1") and the push order role ("F_6 choice bell_123" to "F_6 choice bell_321") are determined as internal winning roles, the push is accurate. In some cases, the winning combination related to the bonus is drawn in with priority over the pushing order combination, so that the BB can be displayed regardless of the pushing order. On the other hand, if the pressing order is not accurate, the combination of symbols displayed will differ depending on the pressing order, and if the pressing order is correct, the bell (“C_9 sheets A_01” to “C_9 sheets H_04”) symbols will be displayed. If the combination of the above is displayed and the pressing order is incorrect, the combination of the bell spilled eyes ("R_RT transition A_01" to "R_RT transition B_02") or the first one ("C_1st_A_01" to The combination of the symbols of "C_2nd_B_04") is displayed.

By the way, when the winning combination related to the bonus is drawn in with priority over the pushing order combination, the combination of any of the symbols of BB, bell, bell spilled eye and the first piece may not be displayed depending on the result of the stop operation. For example, when the eye-pressing is accurate in the first and second stop operations, the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in accordance with the first and second stop operations can display BB, but bells and bells are spilled. The combination of the eyes and the first pattern may not be displayable. In such a case, if the push of the third stop operation is inaccurate, both the winning combination and the pushing order combination related to the bonus will be missed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 114 (B), when the push is not accurate, a combination of missed symbols may be displayed regardless of whether the push order is correct or incorrect.

Here, in the game in which the combination related to the bonus and the push order combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the out-of-order symbols is displayed, and if any combination is missed, the player feels a loss. You will be dissatisfied with it. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modified example, the following notification (navigation) is performed during the inter-flag state. FIG. 114 (C) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the notification (navigation) performed on the main side and the notification (navigation) performed on the sub side.

As shown in FIG. 114 (C), in the pachislot machine 1 of this modified example, in addition to the above-mentioned "white 7 navigation", "white 7 navigation_123", "white 7 navigation_132", "white 7 navigation_213", and "white 7" Perform "Navi_231", "White 7 Navi_312", and "White 7 Navi_321". "White 7 Navi_123" is performed when the role "F_BB1" and the role "F_6 choice bell_123" are determined as internal winning roles, and "White 7 Navi_132" is performed when the role "F_BB1" and the role "F_6" are determined. The selection bell_132 "is performed when the combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the" white 7 navigation_213 "is performed when the combination" F_BB1 "and the combination" F_6 selection bell_213 "are determined as the internal winning combination. We, "White 7 Navi_231" is performed when the role "F_BB1" and the role "F_6 choice bell_231" are determined as internal winning roles, and "White 7 Navi_312" is performed as the role "F_BB1". "F_6 choice bell_312" is performed when the role is determined as the internal winning combination, and "white 7 navigation_321" is performed when the combination "F_BB1" and the role "F_6 selection bell_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. Is done in.

When performing "white 7 navigation_123", the main control board 71 displays a numerical value of "12" on the instruction monitor, and when performing "white 7 navigation_132", the main control board 71 displays "13" on the instruction monitor. When displaying the numerical value of "White 7 Navi_213" and performing "White 7 Navi_213", the main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "14" on the instruction monitor, and when performing "White 7 Navi_231", the main control board 71 is When displaying the value of "15" on the instruction monitor and performing "white 7 navigation_312", the main control board 71 displays the value of "16" on the instruction monitor and performing "white 7 navigation_321". The main control board 71 displays the numerical value of "17" on the instruction monitor.

On the other hand, when performing "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321", the sub-control board 72 performs the special navigation illustrated in FIG. 115. Note that FIG. 115 shows an example of a special navigation system corresponding to "White 7 Navi_123", but only the pressing order for notifying "White 7 Navi_213" to "White 7 Navi_321" is different. , Basically, it is the same as "White 7 Navi_123" shown in FIG. 115.

When performing "white 7 navigation_123", as shown in FIG. 115 (A), the sub-control board 72 has a push order combination determined as an internal winning combination during rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The correct pressing order for "F_6 selection bell_123" is displayed on the display unit 100. In the example shown in FIG. 115 (A), the push order of "left, middle, right", which is the correct push order for the push order combination "F_6 choice bell_123", is displayed on the display unit 100.

In the case of pulling in the bonus-related combination over the push order combination as in the pachislot machine 1 of this modification, even if the stop operation is performed according to the notified push order, the bonus-related combination is supported. Stop control is performed so as to pull in the symbol as much as possible. As a result, at the timing when the first reel is stopped due to the first stop operation, (1) the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is displayed, and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination is not displayed, (2) related to the bonus. The symbols according to the winning combination are not displayed, but the symbols according to the pushing order combination are displayed. (3) Both the symbol corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination are displayed. Three patterns of stopping modes are conceivable.

In addition, in the case of performing "white 7 navigation_123", the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus (specific combination configuration symbol) is the symbol "white 7" constituting the combination of the symbols of the combination name "C_BB1". The symbol corresponding to the push order combination (push order combination configuration symbol) is a symbol (for example, the symbol "hat") constituting the combination names "C_9-sheet combination A_01" to "C_9-sheet combination H_04".

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this modification, the sub-control board 72 switches the content to be notified according to the stop mode of the symbol displayed in accordance with the stop operation, thereby switching the contents to be notified from "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321". "I do.

Specifically, when (1) the symbol "white 7" corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination is not displayed, FIG. 115 (B) shows. As shown, the sub-control board 72 stops notifying the correct push order that was performed during the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and aims at the symbol "white 7" for the reels that are still rotating. Navigating. Since the player cannot obtain the profit according to the push order as long as the symbol corresponding to the push order is not displayed on the stopped first reel, the pachislot machine 1 according to this modification is a navigation system. To encourage the player to win a BB prize. As a result, it is possible to prevent the combination of out-of-order symbols from being displayed in this game.

Further, when the symbol corresponding to the winning combination (2) related to the bonus is not displayed and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination is displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), the sub The control board 72 continues to notify the correct push order that was performed during the rotation of all reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. Since the symbol corresponding to the winning combination is not displayed on the stopped first reel, the symbol corresponding to the pushing order is drawn when the remaining reels are stopped. Therefore, the pachislot machine according to this modification. In 1, the notification of the correct push order is continued for the push order combination. As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (D), the combination of the bell symbols is displayed in this game, and the player pays out the profit (9 medals paid out) according to the combination of the symbols. ) Can be received.

Further, when both the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the push order combination are displayed at the timing when the first reel is stopped, as shown in FIG. 115 (E), the sub-control The board 72 notifies the reels that are still rotating that the stop operation is performed in the correct push order that was performed during the rotation of all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R while avoiding the symbol "white 7". If both the symbol corresponding to the winning combination and the symbol corresponding to the pushing order combination are displayed on the stopped first reel, a combination of either BB or bell symbols may be displayed. .. The bonus-related role is carried over as an internal winning role until a prize is won, while the push order role (particularly, a role in which more medals than the number of medals inserted at the time of winning are paid out) is not carried over and is won only in the game. Therefore, in the game, it is more advantageous for the player to realize the winning of the push order role.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to this modified example, when both the symbol corresponding to the combination related to the bonus and the symbol corresponding to the push order combination are displayed when the reel is stopped, the notification of the push order is continued. , Encourage the avoidance of the design "White 7". As a result, as shown in FIG. 115 (F), the combination of the bell symbols is displayed in this game, and the player pays out the profit (9 medals paid out) according to the combination of the symbols. ) Can be received.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present modification, by switching the content to be notified according to the progress of the game, the player can perform the notification without loss, and as a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind. be able to.

In the example shown in FIG. 115, the description is given only at the time of the first stop, but the content to be notified can be switched in the same manner at the time of the second stop.
Further, such "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321" are performed only during the gaming state (ART gaming state) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and during the general gaming state. You may simply perform "White 7 Navi". That is, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 execute "white 7 navigation_123" when the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection bell_123" are determined as internal winning combinations during the ART game state. If the combination "F_BB1" and the combination "F_6 selection bell_123" are determined as the internal winning combination during the general game state, the "white 7 navigation" may be simply executed.

In addition, the duration of the ART game state when executing "White 7 Navi_123" or the like during the ART game state can be arbitrarily managed. That is, since the mode (pushing order) of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified even during the inter-flag state, for example, when the duration of the ART game state is managed by the number of games, the flag The number of games in the interim state may also be counted as the number of games in the ART game state (added to the ART continuous game number counter), and for example, when the duration of the ART game state is managed by the number of navigations. May also count the number of times such as "white 7 navigation_123" performed during the inter-flag state as the number of navigations during the ART game state, and for example, the duration of the ART game state is during the ART game state. When managed by the number of medals paid out or the difference number, the number of medals paid out in accordance with "White 7 Navi_123" is also counted as the number of medals paid out during the ART game state. It may be that.

Of course, on the contrary, during the inter-flag state, it may be managed so as not to affect the duration of the ART gaming state. Further, the duration of the ART game state may be managed based on the result of the game in which "White 7 Navi_123" or the like is performed. For example, if a profit (payment of 9 medals) according to the push order is given according to "White 7 Navi_123" or the like, the game in which "White 7 Navi_123" or the like is performed is ARTed. Assuming that the game is in the game state, the duration during the ART game state is managed, and if the profit according to the push order is not given according to "White 7 Navi_123" etc., the game is placed in the ART game state. It may be possible to manage the duration during the ART game state as it is not a game in the middle.

By not displaying the combination of symbols according to the winning combination related to the bonus, it is possible to extend the notification section during the inter-flag state. Therefore, once, the notification based on the main side navigation "10" (for example, "white 7 navigation" in the game of the internal winning combination "off") is executed, and the combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus in the game is displayed. If this is not possible, the sub-control board 72 then uses "white 7 navigation" instead of "white 7 navigation_123" to "white 7 navigation_321" for the main navigation "12" to "17". You may do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the capture by stretching. In addition, in the game in which the notification based on the main side navigations "12" to "17" is executed, if the combination of symbols according to the combination related to the bonus cannot be displayed, it does not correspond to the capture by stretching, so the sub-control board 72 Performs "White 7 Navi_123" to "White 7 Navi_321" for the subsequent main side navigations "12" to "17".

In addition, a part of the push order bell may be controlled by the same reel as the push order bell during the state between flags to reduce the player's pressing frequency. In this case, the unit game in which the bell is established regardless of the push order. Then, if neither the push order navigation nor the white 7 navigation is displayed and the player is notified that a small winning combination can be obtained regardless of the push order, the player does not have to make unnecessary pushes.

[Third Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 146. The same configuration and control as the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment will not be described in detail. Further, the features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment.

<Control system of pachislot machine>
The control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided inside the housing 60 and a sub control board 72 provided on the upper door 62a. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 410, a ratio display device 420, a setting key type switch 430, a cabinet-side relay board 440, and a power supply device 450 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 73 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 440, a hopper device 40, a medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and a reset switch 442.
Since the configurations of the external centralized terminal plate 73 and the hopper device 40 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 410 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 410 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The ratio display device 420 includes a ratio display board 421 connected to the main control board 71, a ratio display 422 connected to the ratio display board 421, and a changeover switch 423. The ratio display board 421 controls the display of the ratio display 422 based on the signal output from the main control board 71. The ratio display 422 displays various ratios such as a specific section ratio and an accessory ratio. The changeover switch 423 switches the display of the ratio display 422.
The configuration of the ratio display 422 and the details of the various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 will be described later with reference to FIG. 118.

The setting key type switch 430 is set when setting one of a plurality of setting values provided for setting the magnitude of the profit given to the player, or in the pachi-slot machine 1. It is used to confirm the set value that has been set. When the main control board 71 receives an operation using the setting key type switch 430, the main control board 71 sets a setting value according to the content of the operation from a plurality of setting values.

The cabinet-side relay board 440 is a relay board for electrically connecting the main control board 71 to the external centralized terminal board 73, the hopper device 40, the medal auxiliary storage switch 441, and the reset switch 442. The medal auxiliary storage switch 441 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage (not shown) is full of medals. The reset switch 442 is used when resetting (initializing) various data of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The power supply device 450 has a power supply board 451 connected to the main control board 71 and a power supply switch 452 connected to the power supply board 451. The power switch 452 is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, the pachislot machine 1 has a selector 461, a door open / close monitoring switch 462, a BET switch 11S, and a settlement switch 13S connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 460 and the door relay terminal plate 460. , Start switch 6S, stop switch board 463, game operation display board 470, and sub-relay board 75. Since the BET switch 11S, the settlement switch 13S, the start switch 6S, and the sub-relay board 75 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The selector 461 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are appropriate, and guides the appropriate medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 22 to the hopper device 40. Although not shown, a medal sensor (insertion operation detecting means) for detecting that an appropriate medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 461.

The door open / close monitoring switch 462 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening / closing of the upper door 62a and the lower door 62b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The stop switch board 463 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping a rotating reel and a circuit for displaying a stoptable reel by an LED or the like. Further, a stop switch is provided on the stop switch board 463. The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 470 is connected to the information display 14, and is inserted when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotatable, when replaying a game, and the like. This is a substrate for displaying the number of medals and the like on the information display 14. Further, the LED group 471 is connected to the game operation display board 470, and the LED group 471 is connected to, for example, a mark indicating the start of the game, a mark for replaying the game, etc. based on the signal input from the game operation display board 470. Turn on.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 460 and the sub-relay board 75. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has speakers 9L, 9R, various LEDs 101, a touch sensor 201a, and a display unit 110 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 75.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 82 and a liquid crystal relay board 480 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 82 and the liquid crystal relay board 480 are housed in the sub-control board case together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 82 is a board for managing image (video), audio, optical, and communication data for production. The liquid crystal relay board 480 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72 and the display unit 100.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. Since the configuration of the sub-control circuit mounted on the sub-control board 72 is the same as that shown in FIG. 31, the description thereof will be omitted. FIG. 117 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 117 (A), the main control circuit is mainly composed of the microcomputer 30 mounted on the main control board 71. The microcomputer 30 is composed of a main CPU 31, a main ROM 32, and a main RAM 33.

The main ROM 32 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 31, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit mounted on the sub control board 72, and the like. Further, the main ROM 32 stores a plurality of minimum game times related to the unit game.

The main RAM 33 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as internal winning combinations determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 34, a frequency divider 35, a random number generator 36, and a sampling circuit 37 are connected to the main CPU 31. The clock pulse generation circuit 34 and the frequency divider 35 generate a clock pulse. The main CPU 31 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 36 generates random numbers in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 37 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

<Ratio indicator>
Next, the configuration of the ratio indicator 422 will be described with reference to FIG. 118. As described above in FIG. 116, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a ratio indicator 422 that displays various ratios. FIG. 118 (A) shows an example of mounting the ratio display 422, and FIG. 118 (B) shows the contents displayed on the ratio display 422.

(Composition of ratio display)
As shown in FIG. 118, the ratio indicator 422 is composed of a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and as will be described later in FIG. 118 (B), the upper 2 digits indicate the type of the ratio to be displayed, and the lower 2 digits Indicates the value of the ratio. The ratio indicator 422 is provided inside the housing 60 of the pachi-slot machine 1 because it is used by an administrator (such as a clerk at a game store) to check whether the pachi-slot machine 1 has been tampered with. At this time, in order to prevent fraud on the ratio display 422 itself, it is preferable that the ratio display 422 is provided inside the main control board case that covers the main control board 71.

As a specific mounting example, as shown in FIG. 118 (A-1), the ratio indicator 422 may be mounted on the main control board 71, and is also shown in FIG. 118 (A-2). As described above, it may be mounted on another board (ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71, and as shown in FIG. 118 (A-3), 7 segments as the ratio display 422. The LED unit may be attached by connecting it to the main control board. In any case, as shown in FIG. 118 (A), it is preferable that the main control board 71 is provided inside the main control board case together with the main control board 71.

Normally, a seal is attached to the main control board case, but when the ratio indicator 422 is provided in the main control board case, the seal may impair the visibility of the ratio indicator 422. It is preferable to attach a sealing sticker so that there is no such thing. Further, a sticker for caulking recording is also attached to the main control board case. The caulking record sticker is a sticker on which the person in charge of caulking opening record, a date entry field, a serial number of the main control board, and a two-dimensional code for identification used at the time of manufacturing are described. Depending on the model, a two-dimensional code sticker used at the time of manufacturing may be attached to the main control board case. It is preferable that the arrangement is such that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired by the sticking member such as a sticker.
Further, the front door (upper door 62a or lower) may also be made of a caulking member or harness to be assembled to the main control board, another board in the case of a board configuration in which a plurality of boards are arranged in an overlapping manner, or other members in the housing. It is preferable to design the door 62b) so that the visibility of the ratio indicator is not impaired when the door 62b) is opened, and by doing so, the efficiency of the manager's confirmation work of the ratio indicator is improved.

(Display contents of the ratio display)
Subsequently, a display example of the ratio display 422 will be described. As shown in FIG. 118 (B), the ratio display 422 shows the cumulative specific section ratio, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio between the latest 6000 games, and the cumulative continuous character ratio and the character ratio. , Is displayed. When displaying the cumulative specific section ratio on the ratio display 422, "AU" is displayed in the upper two digits of the 4-digit 7-segment LED, and when displaying the continuous character ratio between the latest 6000 games. , "= R" is displayed in the upper two digits, and when displaying the character ratio between the last 6000 games, "= b" is displayed in the upper two digits, and the cumulative continuous character ratio is displayed. If this is the case, "Ar" is displayed in the upper two digits, and "Ab" is displayed in the upper two digits when the cumulative percentage of the bonus is displayed. Further, the corresponding ratio is displayed as a percentage in the lower two digits of the four-digit 7-segment LED.

Here, the "specific section ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player to the number of games played (that is, the total number of games played) in all the game states. In this case, the gaming state advantageous to the player may include, for example, the bonus state during the bonus operation and the ART gaming state, as well as the CZ having a high expectation of transition to the ART gaming state (see FIG. 33). ).

The main control board 71 counts the total number of games, which indicates the number of games in all the game states, and the specific number of games, which indicates the number of games in the game state which is advantageous to the player, at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33. Then, the specific section ratio is calculated by the formula shown below.
Specific section ratio = specific number of games / total number of games x 100

The "continuous bonus ratio" is related to the first-class special bonus or the first-class special bonus with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all the gaming states (that is, the total number of medals paid out). The ratio of the total number of medals paid out while the accessory continuous operation device is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all game states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and a first-class special bonus or a first-class special bonus. The number of medals paid out during the first specific game, which indicates the total number of medals paid out while the continuous bonus actuating device according to the above is being operated, is counted, and the ratio of continuous bonuses is calculated by the following formula.
Consecutive character ratio = number of payouts during the first specific game / total number of payouts x 100

The "feature ratio" is the total number of medals paid out while any of the bonuses is in operation with respect to the total number of medals paid out in all game states (that is, the total number of medals paid out). The percentage that occupies. In addition, any of the characters is a type 1 special character, a character continuous operation device related to the type 1 special character, a type 2 special character, and a character continuous operation related to the type 2 special character. A device or an ordinary accessory. Further, since the player is in an advantageous state during the ART gaming state and the CZ, it may be included in the state in which any of the accessories is operating.

The main control board 71 has a total number of medals paid out indicating the total number of medals paid out in all gaming states at a predetermined counter provided in the main RAM 33, and medals paid out while any of the accessories is operating. The number of medals paid out during the second specific game, which indicates the total number of medals, is counted, and the bonus ratio is calculated by the following formula.
Character ratio = number of payouts during the second specific game / total number of payouts x 100

Further, "cumulative" means the entire period from the installation of the pachislot machine 1 to the present, and "between the latest 6000 games" means the period from the game before 6000 games to the present. When calculating the ratio of "cumulative", the main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result counted in the entire period, and when calculating the ratio of "between the latest 6000 games", The main control board 71 may calculate the ratio using the counting result that has been counted in the period from the game before 6000 games to the present.

The pachi-slot machine 1 is configured so that none of the counting items in the counter provided in the main RAM 33 is erased due to power failure. Specifically, the data is saved in the backup area provided in the main RAM 33 at the time of power failure, and the data is read from the backup area and reset at the time of recovery. As a result, even when the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened, data can be continuously accumulated from the time of installation.

Further, the right of the replay game accompanying the winning of the replay can be considered as the payout of the same number of medals as the medals used for the game, or can be considered as the payout of 0 medals. In the above-mentioned calculation of the ratio, the calculation result may differ between the calculation method A in which the right to replay is considered to be the payout of medals and the calculation method B in which the right to replay is not considered to be the payout of medals. For example, in calculating the ratio to the total number of medals paid out (total number of medals paid out) in all game states, such as the ratio of continuous characters and the ratio of characters, the calculation method A in which the right to replay is considered to be the payout of medals. Then, the total number of payouts will increase by the number of times the replay wins, and as a result, the ratio will decrease. On the contrary, in the calculation method B in which the right of replay is not considered as the payout of medals, the winning of the replay does not affect the total number of payouts, and as a result, the ratio becomes high. Such a gap between the calculation method A and the calculation method B increases as the number of times the replay wins increases, and therefore increases as the number of games increases.

Therefore, in the ratio display 422, the calculation result by the calculation method A and the calculation result by the calculation method B may be displayed in a switchable manner. In this case, the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method A and the upper two-digit identifier when displaying the calculation result by the calculation method B should be different. Further, if there is a margin in the size of the substrate on which the ratio display 422 is provided, a 7-segment unit of the ratio display 422 may be added to display both at the same time.
Further, when displaying the continuous accessory ratio or the accessory ratio on the setting screen (so-called hall menu) that can be displayed by the store manager, the results calculated by a plurality of calculation methods can be displayed in the same manner. Good.

(Display contents of ratio display (switching display))
The ratio display 422 switches and displays various ratios calculated by the main control board 71. The method of switching the content to be displayed on the ratio display 422 is arbitrary. For example, various ratios may be automatically switched at predetermined intervals, and depending on the operation of the changeover switch 423 (see FIG. 116). The various ratios may be switched manually, or the various ratios may be switched by combining automatic switching and manual switching.

(Display contents of the ratio display (when an error occurs))
Pachislot machines have rules in the industry so as not to increase gambling, for example, the ratio of gaming states that are advantageous to the player to all games does not become too high, and In order to be able to play games with peace of mind in the normal game state, the base (so-called coin holding) in the normal time is lowered by paying out more than a predetermined number of medals not only in the advantageous game state but also in the normal game state. There are regulations such as not to go too far. The above-mentioned various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 make it possible to confirm whether or not these regulations are satisfied. Although it may temporarily exceed the regulation value due to the continuous establishment of accidental bonuses, etc., from a statistical point of view, the value of the ratio shown on the display as the number of games increases is in line with the regulation. It converges as it approaches the created design value. Therefore, when the number of trials is large, such as 100,000 games, and a value that deviates from the design value is still displayed, it can be inferred that a fraudulent act has been performed. In addition, when a value having a large deviation from the design value is frequently displayed only on a specific table, the administrator can infer that a fraudulent act has been performed on that specific table, such as hanging an illegal board. In this way, whether or not the value displayed on the ratio display 422 exceeds the specified value functions as a clue for the administrator to detect fraudulent activity.

Therefore, when various ratios displayed on the ratio display 422 exceed the specified values, it is preferable that the administrator can appropriately grasp the fact. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the above-mentioned various ratios (specific section ratio, continuous accessory ratio, accessory ratio) calculated by the main control board 71 are equal to or higher than the specified values set for the ratio. The display mode of the ratio on the ratio indicator 422 is different depending on the case where the ratio is less than the specified value set for the ratio. For example, the ratio display 422 blinks the ratio when it is equal to or more than the specified value, and lights and displays the ratio when it is less than the specified value. As a result, the manager can grasp at a glance whether or not the various ratios satisfy the specified values.

In addition, if there is a ratio that is equal to or higher than the specified value, it may be notified to an external device (for example, a hall computer) to that effect (for example, a notification that the specific section ratio exceeds the specified value). Good. Specifically, when the calculated ratio includes a ratio equal to or higher than a specified value, the main control board 71 notifies the external device to that effect via the external centralized terminal plate 73. If the output pins from the external centralized terminal board 73 are limited, the output pins currently used as error output are used to notify the external device (that is, error output). May be good.

It should be noted that just because there is a ratio that exceeds the specified value, it cannot be said that it is an immediate fraudulent act. Therefore, in the case of a model equipped with a first error output that is output when an abnormality with a strong suspicion of fraud is detected and a second error output that is output when an abnormality that occurs in a normal game is detected, it is specified. An error based on exceeding the value is preferably a second error output. Here, abnormalities with a strong suspicion of fraud include, for example, RAM clear detection, RAM read / write inability, RAM software abnormality, magnetic detection, radio wave detection, communication abnormality, internal voltage abnormality, and non-winning role. There are cases such as a winning abnormality in which the symbol related to the above is displayed on the valid line, a case where a payout is detected at a timing when the payout cannot be originally made, and a case where the set value shows a value other than 6 steps. In addition, abnormalities that occur in normal games include, for example, a hopper empty where the medals of the hopper device 40 bottom out, a medal clogging detection at the payout exit of the hopper device 40, a medal overflow that fills the medal auxiliary storage, and medals. A door caused by a hall clerk opening the front door (upper door 62a or lower door 62b) to replenish medals when a medal jam or backflow of medals is detected at the time of insertion, or when the number of inserted medals is detected as an abnormal number such as four. For example, when it is detected that the wiring of the hopper is disconnected during an opening error or when replenishing medals.

By giving a predetermined notification to the external device when the ratio is equal to or higher than the specified value in this way, the administrator can perform various types without looking at the ratio indicator 422 provided inside the housing 60. Since it is possible to grasp whether or not the ratio satisfies the specified value, the burden on the administrator can be reduced.

(Display contents of the ratio display (immediately after installation))
Until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, such as immediately after the installation of the pachislot machine 1, various ratios have a large blur width and move up and down greatly. Therefore, various proportions may be displayed differently until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number. At this time, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of ratio to be calculated. For example, the cumulative ratio is displayed in a different mode (for example, displayed in yellow) until the total number of games reaches "17,500", and after the total number of games reaches "17,500", it is displayed. While displaying in a normal mode (for example, displayed in red), the ratio between the latest 6000 games is displayed in a different mode from the normal until the total number of games reaches "6000", and the total number of games is displayed. After reaching "6000 times", it may be displayed in a normal manner.

Further, the output to the external device may not be performed until the total number of games reaches a predetermined number, even if the various ratios are equal to or higher than the specified value. Even in this case, the predetermined number of times may be different depending on the type of ratio to be calculated.

(Modification example of ratio display)
By the way, since the existing pachislot machine does not have a ratio display, it is necessary to make a major modification to the existing pachislot machine in the installation example of the ratio display shown in FIG. 118 (A). Therefore, the display provided in the existing pachislot machine may be used as a ratio display for displaying various ratios. Specifically, in the existing pachislot machine, a display (information display 14) that displays the number of medals stored (number of credits) and the number of medals paid out in this game (number of payouts). Is provided. Therefore, when a special operation is performed on the pachislot machine, the display unit that displays the number of credits (described later) displays the type of ratio to be displayed on the display unit (credit lamp 145 described later) and displays the number of payouts (described later). The display of the display may be switchable so that the ratio of the type is displayed on the payout number lamp 146).

Although the special operation is optional, it is preferable that the operation uses a switch provided inside the housing 60. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally performing a special operation.

<Information display>
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the configuration of the information display 14 including the instruction monitor in which the main control board 71 notifies the information of the stop operation will be described.
As shown in FIG. 119, the information display 14 includes an insert lamp 141, a start lamp 142, a replay lamp 143, a bet number lamp 144, a credit lamp 145, a payout number lamp 146, an instruction monitor 147, and the like. It is configured to include a limit lamp 148.

The insert lamp 141 lights (or blinks (hereinafter omitted)) to notify the player that a medal can be inserted, and the start lamp 142 lights to play a game as the start lever 6 is operated. The replay lamp 143 notifies the player that the medal can be automatically inserted by the operation of the re-game by turning on the replay lamp 143. Further, the bet number lamp 144 informs the player of the number of medals bet by turning on the lamp, and the credit lamp 145 lights up to inform the player of the number of medals stored inside the pachislot machine 1 (number of credits). Is reported to the player, and the payout number lamp 146 is turned on to notify the player of the number of medals (payout number) paid out as a result of the game.

Further, the instruction monitor 147 includes a notification lamp 147a and a status indicator 147b (AT lamp). The notification lamp 147a is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, and lights up in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified, so that the information of the necessary stop operation is notified to the player. Further, the state display 147b is turned on to notify the player that the current game state is a game state (for example, an ART game state) for notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player. ..
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the notification lamp 147a is provided separately from the credit lamp 145 and the payout number lamp 146, but either the credit lamp 145 or the payout number lamp 146 is provided without providing the notification lamp 147a. May be used to notify the information of the stop operation.

Further, the limit lamp 148 is turned on when the gaming state favorable to the player continues for a long period of time. If the playing state that is advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, there is a risk that the gambling will be agitated. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state advantageous to the player continues for a long period of time, the ART gaming state is forcibly terminated even before the duration of the ART gaming state expires. (Limit processing). The limit lamp 148 lights up when the ART gaming state is completed by this limit processing, and notifies the player that the limit processing has been performed. Further, the limit lamp 148 may blink when the limit processing is about to be activated and turn on when the limit processing is actually performed.
The details of the limit processing will be described later in FIGS. 126 and 127.

The insert lamps 141 to limit lamps 148 are turned on, blinked, and turned off by LEDs (not shown) provided on the back surface. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 controls the lighting, blinking, and extinguishing of the LED to notify the player of various information related to the game.

<Status indicator>
Next, the state display 147b provided in the information display 14 will be described with reference to FIG. 120. FIG. 120 is a diagram showing an example of a lighting timing pattern of the status indicator 147b.
In FIG. 120, timing T1 is the start of the game, timing T2 is the start of reel rotation of the game, timing T3 is the first stop operation of the game, and timing T4 is the second stop of the game. It is an operation, timing T5 is a third stop operation of the game, timing T6 is a stop of all reels of the game, timing T7 is the end of the game, and timing T8 is the start of the next game. It's time.

In the example shown in FIG. 120, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section (for example, the ART game state) is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the state indicator 147b is turned on during the winning game. For example, in lighting pattern example 1, the state indicator 147b is lit at the start of the game (timing T1) that wins the transition lottery to a specific section. Further, in the lighting pattern example 2, the status indicator 147b is turned on at the start of reel rotation (timing T2) of the game won in the transition lottery to the specific section, and in the lighting pattern example 3, the transition lottery to the specific section is won. The status indicator 147b is turned on during the first stop operation (timing T3) of the game, and in lighting pattern example 4, the status indicator is turned on when all reels of the game won in the transition lottery to a specific section are stopped (timing T6). The 147b is turned on, and in the lighting pattern example 5, the state indicator 147b is turned on at the end of the game (timing T7) that wins the transition lottery to the specific section.

The lighting pattern example shown in FIG. 120 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the status indicator 147b may be turned on during the game in which the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, and the timing thereof may be set. Is optional.

By turning on the status indicator 147b during the game in which the transition lottery to the specific section is won in this way, the player can grasp that he / she has won the transition lottery to the specific section, and thus in the subsequent game. It is suitable because it can have expectations.

(Improvement of notification by status indicator)
By the way, if the presence or absence of the winning was announced only by turning on / off one lamp, the presence or absence of the winning can be immediately known, but the player feels that only the lamp should be turned on. As a result, there is a risk of losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is determined that the winning of the transition lottery to the specific section is notified during the game without becoming monotonous by the method shown below.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 1)
119 (B) and 119 (C) show another configuration example of the status indicator 147b. The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (B) has a plurality of lamps "a" to "i", each of which lights up, blinks, and turns off, and is based on a pattern of turning on, blinking, and turning off the plurality of lamps. , Inform that you have won the transition lottery to a specific section.

As an example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a plurality of lamps are lit in a specific pattern (for example, "a", "c", "d", "h", and "i" are lit). If not, multiple lamps will light up in a pattern other than this particular pattern. The specific pattern is not limited to one, and may have a plurality of patterns. This makes it possible to give a deeper notification than when one lamp simply lights up to notify the winning. For example, as the game is repeated and the lighting pattern at the time of winning is memorized, the detection of the winning becomes faster. It is possible to realize such playability.

It should be noted that the presence or absence of winning of the transition lottery may be reported not based on the lighting pattern but based on the number of lit lamps. For example, when the transition lottery is won, a specific number of lamps among the plurality of lamps are lit, and when the transition lottery is not won, a number other than the specific number of the plurality of lamps is lit. The lamp may be turned on. Further, for example, when the transition lottery is won, a specific number or more (or a specific number or less) of the lamps are lit, and when the transition lottery is not won, a plurality of lamps are lit. A number of lamps less than a specific number (or more than a specific number) may be turned on.

In addition, by controlling the lighting patterns of the plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game, it is possible to perform an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery by using the plurality of lamps. For example, when the lighting pattern for notifying the winning of the transition lottery is "all lamps are lit", the progress of the game (start operation, first stop operation, second stop operation, third stop operation). By increasing or decreasing the number of lamps that light up according to (when all reels are stopped, etc.), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of winning the transition lottery according to the progress of the game.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 2)
The status indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C) is similar to the status indicator 147b of FIG. 119 (B) in that each of the status indicators 147b has a plurality of lamps that are turned on, blinking, and turned off. The state indicator 147b is different in that the plurality of lamps have no meaning as a whole, whereas the state indicator 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C) has a meaning as a whole. That is, in the state display 147b shown in FIG. 119 (C), for example, the manufacturer name of the pachislot machine 1, the model name of the pachislot machine 1, the character name that became the motif of the pachislot machine 1 and the manufacturer, the shape of the character, and the like. Characters and shapes that you want to impress the player are also used as decorations. By using such decorations for a plurality of lamps, the characters and shapes represented by the decorations can be strongly memorized for the player, which leads to improvement of brand power.

Even in this case, by controlling the lighting pattern and the number of lamps to be lit, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether or not the transition lottery is won, and to control the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps according to the progress of the game. Then, it is possible to perform an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the winning of the transition lottery.

Note that some pachislot machines may have a plurality of types of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player as specific sections, and may shift to any specific section based on the result of the transition lottery. For example, in a pachislot machine having an ART game state and a CZ, a pachislot machine that shifts the game state to the ART game state or the CZ based on the result of the transition lottery, or an ART game state and an initial game in which the initial number of games is 50 games. A pachislot machine or the like having an ART game state in which the number of games is 100 and shifting the game state to the ART game state of the initial number of games determined by the transition lottery can be considered.

Here, when a plurality of lamps are used as in the above-mentioned devices 1 and 2, the plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) are turned on or off in different combinations of patterns according to the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery. You may let it. As an example, when the number of initial games is 50 games and the ART game state is won, the state indicator 147b is lit in the first lighting pattern, and when the initial number of games is 100 games and the ART game state is won. , The status indicator 147b may be lit in a second lighting pattern different from the first lighting pattern.

As a result, since the lighting pattern differs depending on the type of the specific section, it is possible to increase the variation of the lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b. For the player, as the variation of the lighting pattern increases, it becomes difficult to accurately grasp the content of each lighting pattern, so that the player does not lose interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

On the contrary, regardless of the type of the specific section won by the transition lottery, a plurality of lamps (status indicator 147b) may be turned on or off in the same combination pattern. In such control, since the lighting pattern is the same regardless of the type of the winning specific section, it is not possible to grasp the type of the winning specific section from the lighting pattern. Depending on the skilled player, the lighting patterns of a plurality of lamps may be memorized. Therefore, a specific section that is truly advantageous for the player (for example, a long ART game state such as 50 games) and a specific section that is not so advantageous for the player (for example, an ART game state that ends in one game) are defined. By providing the same lighting pattern of the status indicator 147b in any of these specific sections, it is possible to make it impossible to grasp the type of the winning specific section.

Further, as a consideration for beginners, the contents of each lighting pattern may be displayed on the waist panel 25 or the like. For example, the waist panel 25 of a generally introduced design does not display the contents of the lighting pattern, but is used for the waist panel 25 of a pachislot machine that is mainly shipped to stores with many beginners such as low ball rental stores. May display the contents of the lighting pattern. Further, the purchasing store may be able to order the desired waist panel 25 from the manufacturer based on the customer base. This makes it possible to report or not report the content of the lighting pattern according to the customer base of the game store.

Since the design change of the lumbar panel 25 does not require testing by a testing institution and the burden of manufacturing and development costs is not large, a pachislot machine with appropriate specifications can be provided by simply changing the panel according to the market environment. Can be and is suitable. Instead of changing the design of the lumbar panel 25 itself, it may be possible to switch between reporting and not reporting the content of the lighting pattern by a sheet member to which a predetermined seal member is attached or replaceable. Further, the place where the content of the lighting pattern is displayed may be a place other than the waist panel 25 as long as it can be recognized by the player during the game. However, it is desirable that the location is easy for the player to see.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 3)
Further, in order to prevent the presence or absence of winning from being known by whether or not one lamp is lit, the state indicator 147b may be arranged at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The position that is difficult to see may be, for example, an arbitrary location such as the medal receiving portion 16, the waist panel 25, the side surface of the housing 60, or the back of the medal insertion slot 22. Further, by covering the status indicator 147b with an opaque cover so that the status indicator 147b can be visually recognized only from the hole (peep hole) formed in the cover, the status indicator 147b is made difficult to be visually recognized. be able to. Further, for example, a bill clip or a clip for a parking lot use service ticket may be provided on the pachi-slot machine 1, and a status indicator 147b may be provided behind the clip.

(Ingenuity for status indicator 4)
In addition, if the status indicator 147b that informs the success or failure of the transition lottery to a specific section is in the same position, it will be immediately known if only that location is viewed, so even if the position of the status indicator 147b is switched. Good. As a specific method, it is conceivable that at least a plurality of lamps (LEDs) of the pachi-slot machine 1 have the function of the status indicator 147b, and the lamps for notifying the success or failure of the transition lottery are different for each hour. Be done. As a result, for example, at a certain timing, the lamp at the upper right portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b, but at another timing, the lamp at the lower left portion fulfills the function of the status indicator 147b. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the success or failure of the transition lottery only from the lighting pattern of the state display 147b, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in other effects on the liquid crystal display device or the like.

(Ingenuity from playability)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 121, a device from the playability regarding a method of making it difficult to understand that the lottery for transition to a specific section is won will be described. In the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, "F_3 choice bell_1st", "F_3 choice bell_2nd", and "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are provided as push order combinations, and nine medals are paid out when the push order is correct (bell's The combination of symbols is displayed), and 0 or 1 medal is paid out when the push order is incorrect (the combination of bell spilled or 1st symbol is displayed). Then, in the ART game state, when the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order according to the push order combination is notified. Therefore, during the ART game state, by playing the game according to the notification, a number of medals (for example, 9 medals) exceeding the medals used for the game (for example, 3 medals) will be paid out.

As a device from the playability, first, a push order combination is further provided in which medals less than or equal to the medals used in the game are paid out even when the push order is correct. In the example shown in FIG. 121, as shown in FIG. 121 (A), push order combinations such as "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _1st", "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination _2nd", and "F_3 alternative 1-sheet combination_3rd" are provided. For "F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination 3rd", when the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the combination of the first pattern is displayed, one medal is paid out, and the order of pressing is not correct. When the answer is correct, the combination of the outliers is displayed and 0 medals are paid out.
In addition, the newly provided push order combination does not have to increase the number of medals even when the push order is correct, and the number of medals (third quantity) equal to or less than the number of medals used in the game when the push order is correct is paid out. Then, when the push order is incorrect, a smaller number (fourth quantity) of medals than the corresponding number (third quantity) is paid out, or no medals are paid out (that is, 0 medals).

In addition, as a device from the viewpoint of game playability, at least two types of ART game states are provided as ART game states. Specifically, all push order combinations ("F_3 choice 1-sheet combination _1st" to "F_3 selection 1-sheet combination_3rd" and "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd") are determined as internal winning combinations. The correct answer is given when the ART game state that notifies the correct push order when the answer is made and "F_3 choice 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 choice 1-card combination_3rd" among the push order combinations are determined as the internal winning combination. When the push order is notified and "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, a one-card combination ART game state in which the correct push order is not notified is provided.

Then, as a device from the game property, the state indicator 147b is turned on regardless of whether the game state is the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state. The lighting pattern of the state indicator 147b may be different depending on the ART gaming state and the single-card combination ART gaming state, or the same lighting pattern may be used.

With such a device, the state display 147b can notify that the current game state is a game state for notifying the push order, but the state display 147b alone is truly advantageous for the player. It is possible to make it impossible to grasp whether the player is in the ART game state or the single-card combination ART game state.

It should be noted that the transition to the ART gaming state that is truly advantageous for the player is performed by winning the transition lottery to the specific section, but the transition to the single-card combination ART gaming state that is not necessarily advantageous for the player. Can be done arbitrarily.

In the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games other than the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state. Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state. During this ART game state, a 3-choice 1-card combination ("F_3 selection 1-card combination _1st" to "F_3 selection 1-card combination_3rd") and a 3-choice bell ("F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd") Regardless of which of the two is decided as the internal winning combination, the correct push order is notified.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (B), all the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state. In this one-card combination ART game state, in the game in which the three-choice one-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination (first game), the correct push order is notified, while the three-choice bell is the internal winning combination. In the game determined as the role (second game), the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, when all the games other than the ART game state are set to the single-card combination ART game state, the state indicator 147b is always lit regardless of whether or not the lottery for shifting to the ART game state is won. Therefore, the player cannot grasp that the transition lottery has been won only by turning on / off the status indicator 147b.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), among the games other than the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is set as the 1-card combination ART game state, and the other games are set. , ART game state and single-card combination ART game state (normal). Specifically, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), in the 11th game, the lottery for transition to a specific section (that is, the lottery for transition to the ART game state) is won, so that the games after the 11th time. Is in the ART game state.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 121 (C), among the games before winning the lottery to shift to the ART game state, only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination is selected as the 1-card combination ART. It is in a gaming state, and other games are in a normal gaming state. Specifically, since the three-choice one-card combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first game, the game state of this first game is set to the one-card combination ART game state, and the notification of the correct push order is notified. Is going. On the other hand, in the second game, since the three-choice one-card combination is not determined as the internal winning combination, it is in the normal game state and the correct push order is not notified.

In this way, even if only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the 1-card combination ART game state, the status indicator 147b has 3 choices. In a game in which one card combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the light is turned on regardless of whether or not the lottery for transition to the ART game state is won, so that the player can turn on / off the status indicator 147b. It will not be possible to know that the transition lottery has been won by itself. Further, even if it is said that the single-card combination ART game state is used, the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Therefore, if the single-card combination ART game state is always set as shown in FIG. 121 (B), There is a risk that the notification game state in which the push order is notified will continue for a long period of time, and the gambling of the game will be unnecessarily enhanced. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 121 (C), only the game in which the 3-choice 1-card combination of the games other than the ART game state is determined as the internal winning combination is set to the 1-card combination ART game state, so that the notification game The period of the state can be limited, and it is possible to prevent the gambling from increasing unnecessarily.

<Basic game flow>
Subsequently, the basic game flow of the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 122 is a transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification in the pachi-slot machine 1. Note that FIG. 122 shows only the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of notification, and the transition flow of the gaming state regarding the presence / absence of bonus operation is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 122, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a normal section that does not notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, and a specific section that notifies the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player. The normal section corresponds to, for example, the normal gaming state during the general gaming state in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment, and the specific section corresponds to, for example, the general game in the pachislot machine 1 of the first embodiment. The CZ and ART gaming states in the state correspond (see FIG. 33).

(Transition from normal section to specific section)
The transition from the normal section to the specific section is made by winning the transition lottery to the specific section. Here, the transition lottery to the specific section includes both the transition lottery to the CZ and the transition lottery to the ART gaming state. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the lottery for shifting to a specific section is performed based on the information having no difference in the set values. "Information with no difference in set values" means a combination that is determined as an internal winning combination with the same probability in all set values in the internal lottery process (unquestioned combination), or in all set values when all reels are stopped. It includes at least a combination of symbols that will be displayed with the same probability (a combination of symbols with no setting difference).

That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transition lottery to a specific section is performed, and the combination with the setting difference (setting difference combination) is determined as the internal winning combination. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section will not be performed. Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a combination of symbols having no setting difference is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to a specific section is performed and a combination of symbols having a setting difference is displayed. In that case, the lottery for transition to a specific section is not performed.

In addition, the lottery for transition to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and perfect probability that does not change at all. The "predetermined perfect probability that does not fluctuate at all" means at least a probability that does not fluctuate based on the set value (that is, the probability that the winning probability is the same regardless of the set value).

In this way, the transition lottery performed based on "information with no difference in the set value" is performed with the same probability of winning regardless of the set value, so that the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment can be used for a specific section. The degree of expectation regarding the transition can be made the same for each set value, and the difference in ball ejection performance can be suppressed to the winning probability of the setting difference combination with the setting difference.

(Example of lottery table used for transition lottery)
Here, an example of a lottery table used for a lottery for transition to a specific section is shown in FIG. 124. FIG. 124 (A) is an internal lottery table for determining the internal winning combination, and FIG. 124 (B) is a transition lottery table for performing a transition lottery to a specific section based on the internal winning combination. In the following, the internal lottery table has a probability denominator of 32768, and the transition lottery table has a probability denominator of 256.

As shown in the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), the internal lottery table defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. Here, the winning combination determined by lottery using the internal lottery table includes a setting difference combination in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and a set unquestioned combination in which the lottery value is the same regardless of the set value. In the example shown in FIG. 124 (A), the combination “F_BB1”, “F_maintenance lip A”, etc. are setting difference combinations in which the lottery value differs depending on the set value, and the combination “F_sabo1” “F_chili lip” “F_BB1 + F_reach eye lip”. , Etc. are set unquestioned roles with the same lottery value regardless of the set value. In the pachislot machine 1, when the set difference combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is not performed, and when the setting unquestioned combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the transfer lottery to the specific section is performed. be able to. It should be noted that not performing the transition lottery to a specific section includes not performing the transition lottery itself, and also including performing the transition lottery but always being a non-winning prize. In addition, the transition lottery to a specific section does not necessarily have to be performed when any of the setting unquestioned roles is determined as the internal winning combination, and the setting unquestioned role that performs the transition lottery and the setting unquestioned combination that does not perform the transition lottery are not required. A role may be provided.

Subsequently, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 124 (B), the transition lottery table defines information on the lottery value for the lottery result of the transition lottery for each set unquestioned combination determined as the internal winning combination. As described above, since the transition lottery to a specific section is performed based on a predetermined and perfect probability that does not change at all, the lottery value information specified in the transition lottery table is the same regardless of the set value. The value.

It should be noted that the "perfect probability that is predetermined and does not fluctuate at all" may be further included as the probability that is uniquely determined for "information that does not differ in the set value". In recent pachislot machines, a state in which a transition lottery is easy to win and a state in which it is difficult to win may be provided. In such a case, when the transition lottery is performed with the "probability uniquely determined for the information having no difference in the set value", for example, at the time of winning the setting unquestioned role, regardless of the gaming state. The transition lottery that wins with the same probability will be performed. On the contrary, when the transition lottery is performed with a "probability that is not a uniquely determined probability (that is, a probability that fluctuates) for information that does not have a difference in the set value", for example, when the setting unquestioned role is won, A transition lottery that wins with a probability according to the current gaming state, that is, if the current gaming state is a high probability state, a transition lottery that wins with a high probability is performed, and the current gaming state is a low probability state. In that case, a transition lottery, which wins with a low probability, will be performed.

(How to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
By the way, when the transition lottery is performed with the probability uniquely determined in this way, the transition lottery is performed with the same probability regardless of the game state, so that the transition lottery is performed as in the CZ (chance zone). In order to provide a state in which it is easy to shift to the ART gaming state, it is necessary to take some measures. Subsequently, an example of a method for realizing CZ will be described with reference to FIG. 125.

FIG. 125 (A) is a diagram showing an example of an ART lottery method in CZ. For example, it is decided to notify the correct push order of the push order combination with no setting difference in the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination during CZ, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed at the time of the push order combination winning with no setting difference. It will be performed based on the combination of displayed symbols. Specifically, as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (A), when a combination of bell symbols is displayed when all reels are stopped, a transition lottery to the ART gaming state is performed, and a bell spill or 1 is performed. When the combination of the symbols on the reels is displayed, the lottery for shifting to the ART game state is not performed.

Comparing the normal section and the CZ, the winning probability of the push order combination is the same, but since the correct push order is not notified in the normal section, it is difficult to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. On the contrary, since the correct push order is notified during CZ, it is easy to display the combination of symbols for which the transition lottery will be performed. As a result, the frequency of transition lottery is increased during CZ compared to the normal section, and even when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, CZ (chance) that makes it easy to shift to the ART gaming state. Zone) can be realized.

Further, FIG. 125 (B) is a diagram showing another example of the ART lottery method in CZ. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the winning probability of the winning combination (replay) related to the re-game can be changed by shifting the RT game state. Therefore, by making the winning probabilities of some of the roles (replays) related to the replay with no setting difference different in the RT game state, the ART game is performed between one RT game state and another RT game state. Transition to state The frequency with which lottery is performed can be different.

Specifically, in the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), the combination “F_Chillilip” is a setting-unquestioned combination with no setting difference, and as in the transition lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), this combination When "F_Chillilip" is determined as the internal winning combination, a lottery for transition to the ART gaming state is performed. Here, referring to the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 125 (B), the winning probability differs depending on the RT game state, although there is no setting difference in the combination “F_chili lip”, and the winning probability differs depending on the RT game state, and the RT2 game state is higher than the RT1 game state. It is decided as an internal winning role with a high probability.

Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the frequency of the transition lottery is higher than in the RT1 gaming state, and even when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability, the CZ that easily shifts to the ART gaming state (Chance zone) can be realized. More specifically, the RT2 gaming state can be used as the CZ.

(Another example of how to realize CZ when the transition lottery is performed with a uniquely determined probability)
Subsequently, FIG. 125 (C) is a diagram showing another example of a method for realizing CZ. In the method shown in FIG. 125 (C), CZ is realized by using MB (a continuous operation device for a special accessory of the second kind). The pachislot machine 1 in this method has a single bonus (hereinafter “SB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter “RB”) as the characters to be drawn during the MB, and the termination condition of the MB is (A). The number of medals exceeding the specified number has been paid out, (B) SB has been established during MB (determined as an internal winning combination, or a prize has been won), and (C) RB has been established during MB (determined as an internal winning combination). Or to win a prize), one of the three conditions shall be met. Then, the pachi-slot machine 1 shifts to the ART gaming state after the MB ends according to the satisfied end conditions. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), when the MB ends due to the establishment of RB, the state shifts to the ART game state after the end of the MB, and when the MB ends due to other conditions, the state shifts to the ART game state after the end of the MB. Will not migrate.

That is, in the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), if the MB ends (so-called puncture) due to the establishment of SB or the RB is established before the specified number of medals are paid out, the state shifts to the ART gaming state. It will function as a chance zone (CZ) to win.
As a reel stop control during MB, even in a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to preferentially stop a combination of symbols for which medals are paid out, so that the number of medals to be paid out exceeds the specified number. There may be a game in which there is a game and a game in which RB is determined as an internal winning role are the same game. In such a case, it is preferable to shift to the ART gaming state on the assumption that the end condition (C) is satisfied.

In the example shown in FIG. 125 (C), (1) When the MB wins in the normal section, the gaming state shifts to the MB which is the CZ. Then, (2) when the number of medals exceeding the specified number is paid out in the MB, or when the SB is established, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the gaming state shifts to the normal section. On the other hand, (3) when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination during the MB, the MB which is the CZ ends, and the game state shifts between the RB flags. Then, (4) when the RB wins between the RB flags, the gaming state shifts to the RB, and then (5) when the RB ends, the ART gaming state is started at the high RT generated when the RB ends. .. If the RB wins a prize in a game in which the RB in the MB is determined as the internal winning combination, the RB starts from the next game in which the MB ends without going through between the RB flags.

In such a pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of MB (functioning as CZ) in the normal section and the winning probability of RB (triggering the transition to the ART gaming state) in MB are common to all the set values. However, the winning probability of SB (which triggers the end of CZ) in MB may be a common probability for all set values or a different probability depending on the set values. For example, when the probability of winning SB in MB is different depending on the set value, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of winning SB, making it easier for MB to continue for a long time, so that the ART gaming state in CZ (MB) It is possible to raise the degree of expectation for the transition to, and to increase the variety of ball ejection specifications.
In addition, the winning probability of RB, which triggers the transition to the ART game state, can be arbitrarily set depending on the relationship with other end conditions, but it is better to set the probability that the winning can be expected realistically for better game balance. Therefore, it is preferable that the specified number of sheets is as small as 10 to 30 sheets, and RB is determined as an internal winning combination in MB with a relatively high probability.

(Another configuration example of the main control board)
Here, the internal lottery using the internal lottery table and the transition lottery using the transition lottery table are executed on the main control board 71. In the main control board 71, since the capacity of the storage means (main ROM) is limited, the variation of the lottery becomes monotonous when the transition lottery is performed in addition to the internal lottery. Therefore, an improved method of the main control board 71 is shown below.

FIG. 117 (B) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the main control board. In FIG. 117 (B), the main control circuit is provided with a first main control board 71a and a second main control board 71b. The first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are connected so that bidirectional communication is possible by serial communication or the like. Since the configurations of the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are the same as the configurations shown in FIG. 117, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, a plurality of first main control boards 71a and second main control boards 71b are provided as the main control boards, and for example, the first main control board 71a is subjected to internal lottery using the internal lottery table to perform the second main control. By performing the transition lottery using the transition lottery table on the substrate 71b, it is possible to secure a sufficient capacity of the storage means used for each lottery, and it is possible to perform the lottery rich in variation.

Note that, in FIG. 117 (B), the first main control board 71a and the second main control board 71b are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main control board 71a is used. The configuration may be such that communication is possible only in one direction (from the first main control board 71a to the second main control board 71b) with the upstream and the second main control board 71b as the downstream. By using only one-way communication, it is possible to reduce the communication load as compared with the case of two-way communication.

When the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed on different substrates (first main control board 71a and second main control board 71b), the order in which the internal lottery and the transition lottery are performed is arbitrary. For example, the transition lottery may be performed on one substrate first, and then the internal lottery may be performed on the other substrate. On the contrary, the internal lottery may be performed on one substrate first, and then the transition lottery may be performed on the other substrate. It may be that. In this case, if the transition lottery is performed first, the result of the internal lottery (internal winning combination) cannot be grasped at the time of the transition lottery, so that the transition lottery is performed in a form that is not affected by the result of the internal lottery. For example, in the case of a specification in which a transition lottery is performed with a predetermined probability for each unit game regardless of the internal winning combination, such a configuration may be used. As a result, even if a fraudulent act of illegally inputting the winning combination information different from the actual internal winning combination is performed, the result of the transition lottery is not affected, so that the fraudulent act of generating an advantageous transition lottery result is generated. Can be suppressed. Further, when the transition lottery is performed first, since the internal winning combination is irrelevant, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed only by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

On the contrary, when the internal lottery is performed first, the transition lottery may be performed with reference to the internal winning combination determined as a result of the internal lottery, or the internal winning amount determined as a result of the internal lottery may be performed. The transition lottery may be performed without referring to the winning combination. When the transition lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination, by performing the transition lottery based on the setting unquestioned combination as described above, the lottery can be performed based on the information with no difference in the set values, and the internal When the transition lottery is performed without referring to the winning combination, the lottery based on the information having no difference in the set values can be performed by performing the lottery with no difference in the set values.

Further, FIG. 117 (C) is a diagram showing still another configuration example of the main control board. Since what is lacking in the main control board 71 is the capacity of the storage means (main ROM), in FIG. 117 (C), one main control board 71 is shown, as in the first main ROM 32a and the second main ROM 32b. A plurality of main ROMs are provided on the top. In this case, for example, by storing various tables used for the internal lottery in the first main ROM 32a and storing various tables used for the transition lottery in the second main ROM 32b, the storage means used for each lottery can be stored. A sufficient capacity can be secured, and a variety of lottery can be performed.

(Transition from specific section to normal section)
Subsequently, returning to FIG. 122, the transition from the specific section to the normal section will be described. The transition from the specific section to the normal section occurs when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. As the end condition of the specific section, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. can be used. .. Further, the end condition may be different depending on the type of the specific section. For example, the end condition may be different between the CZ and the ART gaming state.

In this way, the specific section basically ends when the end condition is satisfied, but in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, exceptionally, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the end condition is not satisfied. , The transition from the specific section to the normal section (limit processing), and even when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, if the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is not performed, then the guaranteed number of times It continues without ending the specific section until the navigation is performed, and shifts from the specific section to the normal section according to the guaranteed number of navigations (navigation guarantee processing).

(Limit processing)
Here, the limit processing in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section, and FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a flow of limit processing in a specific section.
In pachislot machines, if a specific section such as CZ or ART game state is continuously performed for a long period of time, the profit gained by the player during the specific section will increase and the overall profit will be balanced. Therefore, it is necessary to reduce the profit that the player gets during the normal section, which increases the gambling of the game. Therefore, in recent years, it has been required to limit the duration of the advantageous state for the player to a certain period. The limit process is a process of limiting the duration of a specific section, which is advantageous for the player, to a certain period (for example, 1500 games).

(How to count the number of limit games)
First, with reference to FIG. 126, a method of counting the number of limit games in a specific section when performing limit processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 126 (A), when the specific section continues, the main control board 71 counts the number of continuous games (the number of limit games). For example, when the ART game state is continuous, the main control board 71 counts the number of limit games by adding the number of continuous games by 1 for each game. Further, for example, when the game shifts from the normal section to the CZ and then shifts to the ART gaming state, the specific section includes at least the CZ and the ART gaming state as described above, so that the main control board 71 is a continuation game of the CZ. The sum of the number and the number of continuous games in the ART gaming state that is continuously performed thereafter is counted as the number of limit games.

By the way, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (B), when shifting to the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the waiting section may be sandwiched without immediately shifting. For example, in a pachislot machine in which the RT gaming state is different between the normal section and the specific section, it is necessary to start the specific section after the RT gaming state is changed, so that the waiting section may be inserted once. As a specific case, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, a waiting section may be inserted when transitioning from a normal section to a specific section, and a bonus (role) may be given during the specific section. When activated, a waiting section may be inserted when returning to a specific section after the end of the bonus.

The main control board 71 may or may not count such a standby section as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 may count the games for the number of times "A1" to "An" in FIG. 126 (B) as the number of limit games, or may not count them as the number of limit games. Good.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not be counted as the number of limit games depending on the type of the standby section. For example, when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the specific section sandwiched between the normal section and the specific section is not counted as the number of limit games, and a bonus (feature) is activated during the specific section. In this case, the waiting section to be sandwiched when returning to the specific section after the end of the bonus may be counted as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in a series of advantageous states as a whole.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not be counted as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the standby section. When a waiting section is provided to transition the RT gaming state, it is necessary to notify at least to transition the RT gaming state during the waiting section, but the notification regarding the push order combination related to the increase or decrease of medals is not always required. You don't have to do it. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, since the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes changes the RT game state, it is necessary to notify the push order role "push order bell" related to the increase or decrease of medals. When the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is controlled so that the RT game state is not changed, the push order combination "push order bell" related to the increase / decrease of medals does not necessarily have to be notified during the waiting section.

Therefore, the main control board 71 counts the waiting section for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals as the number of limit games, assuming that it is in an advantageous state for the player, and pushes related to the increase / decrease of medals. The waiting section in which the notification of the forward combination is not performed may not be counted as the number of limit games.

In addition, depending on the pachislot machine, as shown in FIG. 126 (C), if the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination during the ART gaming state or CZ (specific section), the bonus flag is set during the specific section. There may be a gap and a bonus state. The main control board 71 may or may not count the games between these flags or in the bonus state as the number of limit games. That is, the main control board 71 counts the games for the number of times "C1" to "Cn" in FIG. 126 (C) and the games for the number of times "D1" to "Dn" as the number of limit games. Also, it may not be counted as the number of limit games.

In this case, the main control board 71 may count the games between the flags as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, between the flags. The games in the middle may not be counted as the number of limit games, while the games in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games. Further, both the game during the flag and the game in the bonus state may be counted as the number of limit games, and conversely, both may not be counted as the number of limit games.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not count as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed between the flags. Specifically, the main control board 71 counts the number of medals as the number of limit games during the period between the flags for notifying the push order combination related to the increase / decrease of medals, assuming that the player is in an advantageous state. The number of limit games may not be counted during the period between the flags that do not notify the push order combination related to the increase / decrease.

Further, the main control board 71 may or may not be counted as the number of limit games depending on the type of notification (navigation) performed during the bonus state. Depending on the pachislot machine, it may be possible to win a push order combination (that is, a combination in which the number of medals paid out differs depending on the push order) even during the bonus state. In such a pachislot machine, the player can obtain more profit by notifying the push order combination during the bonus state. Therefore, when the main control board 71 notifies the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the bonus state, the game in the bonus state is counted as the number of limit games, which is advantageous to the player during the bonus state. If the mode of the stop operation is not notified, the games in the bonus state may not be counted as the number of limit games.

(Flow of limit processing)
Subsequently, the flow of the limit processing will be described with reference to FIG. 127. As shown in FIG. 127 (A), when the number of limit games counted according to the counting method described above reaches a certain number of games (for example, 1500 games), the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Let me. That is, when the number of limit games reaches a certain number, the main control board 71 ends the specific section even if the number of games, the number of navigations, and the like still remain (when the end condition is not satisfied). ..

Then, at the end of the specific section, the main control board 71 performs an initialization process for initializing the values of variables related to the generation of notification (navigation). In this initialization process, the RT gaming state may be maintained as it is, or may be initialized to RT0, which is a low RT state. For example, in the RT game state for the ART game state, the RT game state ends when the specified number of games are exhausted or the bonus is won without shifting to the RT game state by combining symbols such as bell spills and fall replays. In this case, even if the navigation is not generated due to the limit processing, the high RT state that is advantageous to the player continues. Therefore, as the latter specification, it is desirable to set the game state with a low replay probability. In particular, when the specified number of games is a large value such as 6000 games and the RT game state is such that the RT game state is substantially continued until the next bonus, the gambling property can be appropriately suppressed by dropping the RT game state by limit processing. it can.

When the limit processing is performed in this way, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status indicator 147b until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and the specific section ends. Then, the status indicator 147b is turned off. Further, when the main control board 71 ends the specific section by the limit process, the limit lamp 148 is turned on for a predetermined period thereafter. As the predetermined period, when the limit processing is performed at the end of the game in which the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, for example, it may be during the next game of the game in which the limit processing is performed. Further, as described above, the main control board 71 may blink the limit lamp 148 when the limit processing is about to be activated to notify the player that the limit processing is about to be activated.

Here, for example, when counting the games in the bonus state as the number of limit games, the number of limit games may reach a certain number during the bonus state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 127 (B), the main control board 71 may perform limit processing even in the bonus state to shift the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. Further, as shown in FIG. 127 (C), the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing at the timing when the bonus ends without performing the limit processing during the bonus state. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 127 (B), the gaming state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, and in the example shown in FIG. 127 (C), the limit is set. The game state shifts from the specific section to the normal section at the timing when the bonus state ends, not at the timing when the number of games reaches a certain number of games.

Of course, when counting as the number of limit games during the waiting section of a specific section or during the bonus flag, the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the waiting section or between the flags. Then, the limit processing may be performed even during the waiting section or between the flags, and the timing of shifting from the waiting section to the specific section after the number of limit games reaches a certain number, or the number of limit games After reaching a certain number of games, limit processing may be performed at the timing of shifting from between flags to a specific section through a bonus state.

(Signal output to external device during limit processing)
Further, when the specific section is completed by the limit processing, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal indicating that fact to an external device (data counter or hall computer). By receiving the output of this signal, the hall side can grasp that the limit processing has been performed in the pachislot machine, and can grasp new information that could not be grasped in the past.
If the number of limit games reaches a certain number during the bonus state, the main control board 71 uses the external device at the timing when the number of limit games reaches a certain number (that is, during the bonus state). A predetermined signal may be output to the external device at the timing when the bonus state ends (that is, the main control board 71 outputs a predetermined signal to the external device (that is, the main control board 71 is in the bonus state during the specific section). When the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, a predetermined signal may be output to an external device at the end of the bonus state).

Further, the main control board 71 is not only a signal (limit signal) indicating that the limit processing is performed when the limit processing is performed more times than normally expected in one pachislot machine 1. , A signal (error signal) indicating that the limit processing has been performed more times than expected may also be output to the external device. Specifically, the main control board 71 is specified to the outside when the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games (that is, the number of times limit processing is performed) reaches a predetermined number of times within a specific period. Output a signal. As an example, when the main control board 71 performs limit processing more times than expected between the time when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on and the time when the power is turned off, the error signal is also sent to the external device together with the limit signal. Output. This makes it possible for the hall side to grasp that, for example, when the limit processing is performed an unusual number of times such as 10 times in a day.

(Navigation guarantee processing)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 128, the navigation guarantee process in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a flow of navigation guarantee processing at the end of a specific section.
In the case of a pachislot machine that manages the end conditions of a specific section based on the number of games, if the number of times the winning combination to be notified (for example, push order bell, etc.) is determined as an internal winning combination during the specific section, it will be during the specific section. There are few medals to be paid out, and the player may feel a sense of loss. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when shifting to a specific section, the minimum number of navigations is guaranteed, and the specific section is continued without ending until the navigation for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Here, in FIG. 128, the end condition of the specific section is managed by the number of games, and in FIGS. 128 (A) to 128 (C), the end condition of the specific section is satisfied at the end of 50 games. It is assumed that there is. In the example shown in FIG. 128 (A), when the specific section continues for 50 games (that is, the end condition is satisfied), the notification (navigation) for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed. In such a case, the main control board 71 continues the specific section even if the end condition is satisfied. In the example shown in FIG. 128A, after that, in the 54th game, the winning combination of the notification target (for example, the push order bell) is determined as the internal winning combination, and the combination of the notification target is notified. When the main control board 71 is notified for the guaranteed number of times in connection with this notification, the main control board 71 ends the specific section. On the other hand, the main control board 71 continues without ending the specific section if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed even by the notification after satisfying the end condition of the specific section.

By the way, in the pachislot machine, as push order combinations, a plurality of types of push order combinations in which the number of medals paid out at the time of correct answer of the push order are different are provided, and the main control board 71 is used for these push order combinations during a specific section. May inform you of the correct push order. As multiple types of push order, for example, even if the correct answer is given in the push order, the number of medals does not increase (that is, the number of payouts is less than or equal to the number of inserts), or the increase of medals is extremely small (for example, payout at the time of 3 bets). It is conceivable that the number of medals is increased (for example, the number of medals paid out at the time of 3 bets is 9) when the number of medals is correct. It should be noted that, in any push order combination, when the answer is incorrect in the push order, the number of medals paid out is smaller than when the answer is correct in the push order, or the number of medals paid out is 0 in common.

From the player's point of view, even if the medals do not increase or the increase is extremely small when the push order is answered correctly, the total number of medals to be acquired during the specific section does not increase. Does not need to guarantee the number of navigations during a specific section. On the other hand, for the push order combination, in which the number of medals increases when the push order is correct, the total number of medals acquired during the specific section is affected, so the player is guaranteed the number of navigations during the specific section. Is preferable.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, among a plurality of types of push order combinations in which the number of medals paid out when the push order is correct is different, only for the push order combination in which the number of medals paid out when the push order is correct is larger than the number of inserted numbers. The number of navigations may be guaranteed, and the number of navigations may not be guaranteed for a push order combination in which the number of payouts when the correct answer is the number of insertions is less than or equal to the number of input. In addition, among multiple types of push order combinations with different numbers of medals paid out when the push order is correct, only the push order combination with the largest number of payouts when the push order is correct is guaranteed the number of navigations, and other push order combinations. The number of navigations may not be guaranteed.

Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the number of navigations when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied in a situation where the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section. Regardless of the number of notifications to the unguaranteed push order combination, the specific section is ended on the condition that the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. On the other hand, the main control board 71 does not notify the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations more than the guaranteed number of times during the specific section, and if the end condition of the specific section is satisfied, the specific section Is continued without ending, and then the specific section is terminated at the timing when the notification to the push order combination that guarantees the number of navigations is performed for the guaranteed number of times.

By doing so, the number of notifications (navigation) about the push order role that affects the total number of medals acquired in a specific section is guaranteed, so that the loss felt by the player can be reduced. ..

Next, a case where the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times while sandwiching the bonus state will be described. In FIGS. 128 (B) and 128 (C), when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied (at the end of 50 games), the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not been performed yet, but during the specific section before the end condition is satisfied. An example of transitioning to the bonus state once is shown.

Since the bonus state is basically a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player when the specific section as a whole is viewed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 128 (B), the main control board 71 is in the specific section even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied. When the state has been changed to the bonus state even once, the specific section may be terminated when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 128 (C), when the main control board 71 satisfies the end condition of the specific section, if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed, the main control board 71 is in the specific section. Regardless of whether or not the system has transitioned to the bonus state, the specific section may be continued until the guaranteed number of notifications is given, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the guaranteed number of notifications are given. Good.

Subsequently, a case where the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games without being notified for the guaranteed number of times will be described. If the specific section continues until the number of limit games reaches a certain number of games, it can be considered that a certain profit is given to the player. Therefore, the main control board 71 is shown in FIG. 128 (D). As shown, when the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the specific section may be terminated even if the notification for the guaranteed number of times has not yet been performed. On the contrary, as shown in FIG. 128 (E), even if the number of limit games in a specific section reaches a certain number of games, the main control board 71 has not yet been notified for the guaranteed number of games. The specific section may be continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, and then the specific section may be terminated at the timing when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

In addition, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, it is optional whether or not the so-called additional lottery is performed during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. That is, the main control board 71 may perform the additional lottery until the end condition is satisfied during the specific section, while the additional lottery may not be performed even during the specific section after the end condition is satisfied. On the contrary, the main control board 71 may perform an additional lottery for a period from the time when the termination condition is satisfied until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed.

Further, when the specific section is continued until the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed by the navigation guarantee process, the normal screen is returned to the normal screen at the timing when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied on the liquid crystal display device such as the display unit 100, and then. When the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the push order notification (navigation) may be performed on this normal screen. That is, when the end condition of the specific section is satisfied without being notified for the guaranteed number of times, the main control board 71 keeps lighting the status indicator 147b, but the sub control board 72 displays the display screen during the specific section. Switch the display screen to the display screen during the normal section. After that, when the push order combination to be notified is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 notifies the push order via the notification lamp 147a of the instruction monitor 147, and the sub-control board 72 notifies the push order combination. , The push order is notified on the normal screen. Then, when the notification for the guaranteed number of times is performed, the main control board 71 may turn off the status indicator 147b.

<Outline of each game state>
The outline of the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described above. Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 123, an outline of each gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 123, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment is roughly classified into a normal section, a standby section, and a specific section. The normal section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and the specific section is a state in which the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. In addition, the waiting section is a state after winning the transition lottery to the specific section and before the transition from the normal section to the specific section.

In the normal section, the waiting section, and the specific section, the winning combination related to the bonus is not determined as the internal winning combination, and the bonus is activated, depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is won or whether or not the bonus is activated. Set to the probability that "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" that is not activated and the winning combination related to the bonus are determined as the internal winning combination, and "between the flags" that the bonus is not activated and determined as the internal winning combination. There is no difference. The bonus according to the bonus combination is operating "Bonus state (no setting difference)" and the bonus according to the bonus combination with the probability of being determined as the internal winning combination is operating " "Bonus state (with setting difference)" and the game state of.

As shown in FIG. 123, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 , The status indicator 147b is turned off, and when the combination related to the notification is determined as the internal winning combination, these combinations are grouped and transmitted to the sub-control board 72. Specifically, when any of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st", "F_3 selection bell_2nd", and "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 groups these combinations. Information is transmitted to the sub-control board 72, assuming that the combination "pushing order bell" is determined as the internal winning combination.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" of the normal section, the main control board 71 draws a transition to a specific section based on the information having no difference in the set values. On the other hand, in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the normal section, the main control board 71 does not perform the transition lottery to the specific section. Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the normal section, the main control board 71 continues the specific section. No additional lottery for the period or notification at the time of winning the push order will be given.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 is the state indicator 147b. Turn on. The main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes during the standby section and during the specific section.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins the push order. It may or may not be notified of the order of pressing the correct answer at the time. When notifying the correct push order, the main control board 71 transmits to the sub control board 72 without grouping the roles related to the notification. Specifically, when any of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st", "F_3 selection bell_2nd", and "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 actually has the internal winning combination. Information that can identify the type of combination determined as is transmitted to the sub-control board 72. On the other hand, when the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer is not performed, the main control board 71 groups the combinations related to the notification and transmits the combination to the sub control board 72.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 wins. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in the standby section, the main control board 71 does not perform an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section. In the "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the standby section, the main control board 71 may perform an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section based on the information having no difference in the set value. It may not be.

Further, in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section, the main control board 71 is the state indicator 147b. Is lit, and the correct push order is notified when the push order is won. Therefore, the main control board 71 has a role related to notification in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. Is transmitted to the sub-control board 72 without grouping.

In addition, the main control board 71 wins in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)", "between flags", "bonus state (no setting difference)" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" in a specific section. The transition lottery to the specific section is not performed (however, the transition lottery may be performed for the specific section different from the specific section to be won). Further, the main control board 71 adds the duration of the specific section based on the information that there is no difference in the set values in the "bonus non-operation (between non-flags)" and "bonus state (no setting difference)" of the specific section. While the lottery is performed, the additional lottery for the duration of the specific section is not performed in the "between flags" and "bonus state (with setting difference)" of the specific section.

The main control board 71 may perform a lottery for shifting to a specific section only at the time of 3 bets or an additional lottery for the duration of the specific section, and may not perform these lottery at the time of 1 bet or 2 bets.

<Output of the transition lottery result to an external device>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131, the flow when the result of the transition lottery to the specific section is output from the pachislot machine to an external device such as a data counter or a hall computer will be described.

At the amusement store, external devices such as a data counter and a hall computer are installed together with the pachislot machine. For example, when the bonus state starts in the pachislot machine, a signal is output from the pachislot machine to the data counter and data is output. Count the number of bonuses at the counter. In the conventional pachislot machine, since the lottery for transition to a specific section is performed on the sub (sub control board 72) side, the main control board 71 is an event that can be recognized on the main (main control board 71) side (for example, in the RT state). The lottery result was estimated from the transition and the stop operation was performed multiple times in a specific pressing order, and the signal was output to the external device based on the estimation. However, in such a conventional method, the timing of outputting the winning of the transition lottery is delayed by several games from the timing of actually winning, and a specific pushing order is accidentally repeated by the player's stop operation. If this happens, it is presumed that the game has won even though the game has not won the transition lottery, and as a result, an erroneous signal may be output.
In addition, in the specification that outputs a signal based on the transition of the RT game state, when the bonus is subtracted during ART, the signal is also displayed when the RT game state at the end of the bonus is returned to the RT game state for ART after the bonus is exhausted. Was sometimes output. In such a case, the signal is output more than the accurate number of winning ARTs and the number of digested sets, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the accurate information when guessing the setting or selecting the machine. Was occurring.

In this regard, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery to a specific section itself is output to the external device as it is, not from the estimation result, so that the result of the transition lottery is accurately output to the external device. Can be output.

FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a signal output timing pattern to an external device. In FIG. 129, the timing T1 is the start of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (for example, the ART game state), the period P1 is the period between one game of the game, and the period P2 is. This is the period between one game of the next game.

In the example shown in FIG. 129, at the timing T1 (that is, at the start of the game), the lottery for transition to the specific section is won. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the transition lottery to the specific section is performed on the main (main control board 71) side, so that the main control board 71 can grasp that the transition lottery has been won from the time of the timing T1. ..

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game period P1 in which the transition lottery is won. For example, in the output pattern example A, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at the start of the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section (that is, when the start lever 6 is operated). doing. Similarly, in the output pattern example B, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device when the reel rotation of the game starts, and in the output pattern example C, the external device is used during the first stop operation of the game. The result of the transition lottery is output to the device, and in the output pattern example D, the result of the transition lottery is output to the external device when all the reels of the game are stopped.

Further, as shown in the output pattern examples E and F, the main control board 71 can output the result of the transition lottery to the external device in the game after the game won in the transition lottery. For example, in the output pattern example E, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device when the medal is inserted for the next game of the game won in the transition lottery. Further, in the output pattern example F, the main control board 71 is subjected to a transfer lottery to the external device during an arbitrary game in which a plurality of games are subsequently performed (for example, at the start of a game in which a specific section starts). The result is output.

Note that the output pattern example shown in FIG. 129 is only an example, and in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the result of the transition lottery is displayed to the external device at an arbitrary timing after winning the transition lottery to the specific section. Can be output.

Further, by arbitrarily combining the lighting pattern example of the state display 147b shown in FIG. 120 and the signal output pattern example to the external device shown in FIG. 129, it is possible to realize an unprecedented novelty. Specifically, a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device before the status indicator 147b is turned on. On the contrary, the external device may be turned on after the status indicator 147b is turned on. A signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device, or a signal indicating that the transition lottery has been won may be output to the external device at the same time as the status indicator 147b is turned on. Good.

For example, by outputting the signal to the external device before the status display 147b, the counter is updated in the external device (data counter) before the status display 147b is turned on, so that the pachislot machine It is possible to detect the transition of a specific section from an external device other than 1. Further, for example, in consideration of the processing time in the external device, by outputting the signal to the external device slightly before the lighting of the status display 147b, the status display 147b is lit (notification in the pachislot machine 1). The timing can be matched with the update timing of the external device (notification other than the pachislot machine 1), and the player's discomfort can be reduced.

In addition, for example, when there are many types of bonuses and there is no free output pin in the 8-pin signal line that outputs a signal to an external device, or when the output pin from the external centralized terminal board 73 is limited. The main control board 71 may not output a signal to an external device even when the transition lottery is won.

Further, in the above embodiment, the signal is output when the transition lottery is won, but the signal may be output when a specific section such as ART continues. For example, in the case of a game specification in which one set of 30 games is set in the ART game state and the number of sets is managed, a signal is output when the transition lottery is won (so-called first hit), and two sets are output after the first set of 30 games is digested. It is possible to output an external signal at the timing when the eyes are started. By outputting the signal in this way, the exact number of sets can be grasped. Further, the signal for the first hit and the signal for the continuation may be different signals, and the number of first hits and the number of continuations may be accurately grasped by the data counter. In this case, the accuracy of grasping the game situation can be further improved. ..

In such a game machine that manages the number of sets, if the bonus state starts in the middle of the ART game state, a pachislot machine or a pachislot machine that restarts the game from the number of games remaining from the time of winning the bonus in the set after the bonus ends. , There is a pachislot machine that starts a new set from the beginning after the bonus ends.
In the former case, for example, when 25 games out of 30 games in one set of ART game state are consumed and the bonus state is started, the number of remaining games is 5 games after the bonus ends (remaining at the time of bonus winning). The ART game state is restarted from the number of games). In such a case, it is desirable not to output a signal when the ART is restarted because one set is simply separated in the middle. On the other hand, in the latter case, as a benefit of winning the bonus during the ART game state, one set of ART is substantially added, so it is desirable to output a signal when the ART is restarted. The same signal output processing can be applied not only to the type of ART in which the predetermined number of games is set as one set, but also to the type in which the number of sets of ART is managed by the difference number or the number of navigations.

It should be noted that a pachislot machine having both a pattern of restarting the game from the number of games remaining from the time of winning the bonus in the set after the end of the bonus and a pattern of starting a new set from the beginning after the end of the bonus can be considered. For example, if the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, one set is added as a remedy, and if the number of remaining games is more than the predetermined value and the bonus is won, the remaining after the bonus ends. Specifications such as restarting the game from the number of games can be considered.

In such a pachislot machine, the main control board 71 controls the signal output depending on whether or not ART is added at the time of winning the bonus. That is, when the addition of ART occurs at the time of winning the bonus, the main control board 71 outputs a signal when the ART game state resumes after the end of the bonus, and the addition of ART does not occur at the time of winning the bonus. The main control board 71 does not output a signal when the ART gaming state is resumed after the end of the bonus. More specifically, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than a predetermined value, it assumes that an additional ART has occurred and outputs a signal when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends. If the bonus is won when the number of remaining games is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, the signal is not output when the ART is restarted after the bonus ends, assuming that the ART has not been added.
In other words, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is less than the predetermined value, the ART game state of a set different from the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. Is restarted and a signal is output to the outside. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the bonus when the number of remaining games in the ART game state is equal to or more than a predetermined value, the main control board 71 resumes the ART game state of the same set as the set executed at the time of winning the bonus after the bonus ends. At the same time, no signal is output to the outside.

Further, it may be determined whether or not the signal is output depending on not only whether or not the ART is added at the time of winning the bonus but also whether or not the ART is added from the bonus winning to the start of the ART.

The signal output described so far is a signal in which the value of the data counter is increased by 1 by one output, but when starting a high-value ART gaming state, the data counter is increased according to the magnitude of the value. It may be a signal in which the value of is increased by a plurality of values. For example, when a long ART consisting of 90 games per set is started, which is usually an ART of 30 games per set, a signal may be output so that the value of the data counter increases by 3. ..
In addition, although it is usually an ART of 30 games per set, when starting an ART that continues until the next bonus, the signal is output so that the value of the data counter rises according to the average number of games up to the bonus winning. May be good. For example, when the winning probability of the bonus is 1/150, the average number of continuous games is 150 games, which corresponds to 5 sets, so that a signal in which the value of the data counter increases by 5 is output. In this case, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the bonus, the average number of continuous games determined from the bonus probability of a specific setting value (for example, setting 6) regardless of the setting so that the setting is not specified. Outputs a signal according to. By doing so, even if the pachislot machine has a plurality of ART gaming states having different values at the start, it becomes easy to determine how much profit has been obtained from the data counter or the like after the fact. The signal in which the value of the data counter rises by a plurality of values may be a signal in which a signal for raising the value by one is transmitted a plurality of times at intervals so that an external device can identify it, or a dedicated signal for raising the value by a plurality of values. May be transmitted in one shot.

(Example of production linked with an external device)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, an example of an effect performed in cooperation with an external device will be described when a lottery for transition to a specific section is won. FIG. 130 shows an example of an effect in which a signal is output to an external device during the game of winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and FIG. 131 shows the external in the game after winning the transition lottery to the specific section. An example of production when a signal is output to a device is shown.

(Production example 1)
In the production example 1 shown in FIG. 130, in the game winning the transition lottery, the main control board 71 reversely rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R prior to the start of reel rotation, and then rotates the reels 3L, 3C, 3R forward. The game is progressing by letting it. In this production example 1, the timing T1 is the timing at which the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the timing T2 is the timing at which the forward rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started (that is, at the start of reel rotation). ), And the timing T3 is when all reels of the game are stopped. Further, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b at the timing of the lighting pattern example 4 (when all reels are stopped), and externally indicates that the transition lottery has been won at the timing of the output pattern example B (when the reel rotation starts). Output to the device.

As shown in the timing T1, in the game winning the transition lottery to the specific section, the main control board 71 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R based on the operation of the start lever 6. At this time, the main control board 71 first rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the opposite directions. Further, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to display that attention is paid to the data counter installed on the upper part of the pachi-slot machine 1, and also displays a countdown of 5 seconds. Here, the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R means that the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate from the bottom to the top, so that the player sees the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. As a result, the line of sight is guided from the bottom to the top. Further, in addition to guiding the line of sight by the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, the display unit 100 also attracts the attention of the data counter, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the data counter.

At timings T1 to T2, the sub-control board 72 controls the display unit 100 to proceed with the countdown. After that, at the timing T2, the main control board 71 rotates the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the forward direction, and outputs a signal to the data counter indicating that the transition lottery has been won. Upon receiving this signal, the data counter updates the counter and displays "hit" or the like.

As described above, in the production example 1, the line of sight is guided to the data counter by using the reverse rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display by the display unit 100, and then a signal is output to the data counter. , Notifies that the player has won the lottery for transition to a specific section on the data counter that gathers the line of sight of the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect linked with not only the pachislot machine 1 but also an external device (data counter).

Further, in the production example 1, when the timing T3 is reached, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b. The sub-control board 72 displays an image or the like indicating that the display unit 100 has won a specific section in accordance with the lighting timing of the status display 147b. As described above, in the effect example 1, various effects can be performed in conjunction with each other by performing the effect according to the lighting timing of the status display 147b and the output timing of the signal to the external device, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Can be done.

(Production example 2)
Subsequently, an effect example 2 will be described with reference to FIG. 131. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, the specific section is not started immediately after winning the transition lottery to the specific section, and the specific section is started after a predetermined number of games have passed after winning the transition lottery. In some cases, so-called precursory effects may be performed during the predetermined number of games. By the way, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery performed by itself to the external device as it is, as in the output pattern examples A to D shown in FIG. , Even in the game that wins the transition lottery, the result of the transition lottery can be output to the external device. Here, if the result of the transition lottery is output to an external device in the game that wins the transition lottery, the counter is updated on the data counter (external device), so the data is being produced during the precursory effect. The effect result (that is, the success or failure of the transition lottery) is known from the value of the counter, and the interest is lost.

Therefore, in the production example 2 shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 outputs the result of the transition lottery to the external device at an arbitrary timing during the game 32 games after the game won in the transition lottery of the specific section. To do. Then, as shown in the effect example A, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 perform a precursory effect during the 32 games. As a result, the value of the data counter is not updated during the 32 games in which the precursor effect is performed, and the player can be interested in the precursor effect.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the transition lottery of a specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game, but the result of the transition lottery from the status indicator 147b during the precursory effect is obtained. It is preferable that the result of the transition lottery is difficult to understand from the status indicator 147b, because if it can be grasped, the interest will be lost. The method of making the result of the transition lottery difficult to understand from the status indicator 147b is as described above.

Further, when the registration operation is accepted from the player, the period for performing the precursory effect may be customizable. In the example shown in FIG. 131, the precursory effect is performed for 32 games in the effect example A, but the precursory effect is performed for 16 games in the effect example B, and after that, the winning of the specific section is confirmed. It is decided to perform a later standby production. The standby effect may be, for example, an introduction of a character appearing in the pachislot machine 1, a story introduction, or the like, or an effect that suggests a set value. Further, even when the period of the precursory effect can be customized in this way, the main control board 71 outputs a signal to the external device at the same timing regardless of the presence or absence of customization. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 131, the main control board 71 is 32 games after the game won in the transition lottery of the specific section regardless of whether the effect example A is performed or the effect example B is performed. The result of the transition lottery is output to the external device during the game of.

<How to secure navigation in a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 132, a navigation securing method for securing the number of times to notify the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player during the specific section will be described. In a pachislot machine having a specific section such as an ART game state, if navigation is not performed during the specific section, the game in the specific section becomes monotonous, which may reduce the interest of the player. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by creating a state in which navigation is easily performed in a specific section, it is possible to prevent the game in the specific section from becoming monotonous.

Specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, the timing to start a specific section is set to the start of the bonus state, and during this bonus state, there is a higher probability that the push order role (notification target role) is higher than when the bonus is not activated. Is determined as an internal winning role. Then, when the specific section is also started at the start of the bonus state, the correct push order is notified to the winning push order combination during the bonus state, and the specific section is not started at the start of the bonus state. Does not notify the push order during the bonus state. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which navigation is not performed during a specific section, and as a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the specific section.

In particular, since the timing to start the specific section is the start time of the bonus state, it is once in the situation where the bonus state is never reached during the specific section, that is, the situation where navigation is easy to be performed during the specific section (bonus state). As a result, the player can receive a certain number of times of navigation during a specific section.

(Example of how to start a specific section at the start of a bonus)
Here, the method of setting the start timing of the specific section as the start time of the bonus state is arbitrary. For example, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-1), the main control board 71 responds to the fact that the combination related to the bonus, which is a non-setting unquestioned combination, is determined as the internal winning combination (that is, the bonus winning) during the normal section. Then, a transition lottery is performed. Then, when the main control board 71 wins the transition lottery and a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state and the main control board 71. The 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed in the state where the main control board 71 has not won the transition lottery, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section. The control board 71 and the sub-control board 72 do not notify the correct push order even if the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the bonus state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-2), the main control board 71 does not determine the combination related to the bonus as the internal winning combination, but serves as the combination related to the bonus which is an unquestioned combination during the normal section. Depending on the combination of the corresponding symbols being displayed (that is, the bonus winning), the transition lottery may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 132 (A-3), the main control board 71 may perform a transition lottery during the normal section regardless of the winning combination related to the bonus. Specifically, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to a specific section based on information having no difference in set values during the normal section, and if the transition lottery is won, the right to shift to the specific section. Is given. Then, when a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination related to the bonus is displayed after that, the main control board 71 starts a specific section together with the bonus state when the transition right is granted, and the main control board 71 starts the specific section together with the bonus state. The board 71 and the sub-control board 72 notify the correct push order to the push order combination determined as the internal winning combination with high probability during the bonus state. On the other hand, when the transition right is not granted, the main control board 71 starts the bonus state without starting a specific section, and the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 push forward during the bonus state. Does not notify the correct push order even if is determined as the internal winning combination.

(Data example)
FIG. 132 (B) is an example of a data configuration for realizing a navigation securing method in a specific section. As shown in FIG. 132 (B), during the bonus state, there is a higher probability that the push order combination (“F_3 selection combination_1st”, “F_3 selection combination_2nd”, “F_3 selection combination_3rd”” is higher than that during the non-bonus state. ) Is determined as an internal bonus. For this push order combination, for example, if the correct answer is given in the push order, a combination of symbols for which 9 medals are paid out is displayed, and if the answer is incorrect for the push order, a combination of symbols for which 5 medals are paid out is displayed. It is what is displayed. Further, the bonus state is terminated when, for example, 10 or more medals are paid out.

According to such a data example, when notifying the push order of the correct push order to the push order combination during the bonus state, the player has 18 medals (= 9 medals x 2 times) during the bonus state. If the player does not notify the push order of the correct push order during the bonus state, the player can receive 10 cards (= 5 cards x 2 times) during the bonus state. You may not be able to pay or receive medals.

<Method of realizing precursors using a specific section>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134, a method of realizing the precursory effect in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a transition lottery to a specific section is won, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the game to notify that the transition lottery has been won. Is not suitable for notifying the result of the transition lottery using. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a specific section (first specific section) different from the specific section (second specific section) for which the result is reported is used, and a precursor effect is produced during the first specific section. Is to be done.

(Precursor method 1 regarding transition to a specific section)
First, with reference to FIG. 133, one method of realizing a precursor for the transition to the second specific section will be described. In this method, a plurality of specific sections having different durations, a short ART (first specific section) and a long ART (second specific section), are provided, and the game during the short ART is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the long ART. ..

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), in the pachislot machine 1, a short ART that continues for the first period (for example, three games) and a second period that exceeds the first period (for example, for example). A long ART that continues (for 53 games (3 + 50)) is provided, and a lottery for transition to a short ART or a long ART is performed during the normal section. FIG. 133 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. Based on the information (internal winning combination) that does not differ in the set value, the main control board 71 performs a lottery for transition to the short ART or the long ART with a probability that does not fluctuate depending on the set value.

In this transition lottery, if either the short ART or the long ART is won, the pachislot machine 1 performs a precursory effect of notifying whether or not the long ART is won during the period in which the short ART continues. More specifically, in the pachislot machine 1, when the short ART is won, a precursor effect is performed to notify that the long ART is not won during the first period, which is the continuation period of the short ART. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when the long ART is won, the long ART is won from the start to the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In addition to performing a precursory effect to notify that, an effect unique to long ART is performed after this precursory effect.

When the precursor effect is performed using the short ART, the main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b because both the short ART and the long ART are specific sections. That is, as shown in FIG. 133 (A), when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. Further, when the long ART is won in the transition lottery, the status indicator 147b is turned on during the second period, which is the continuation period of the long ART. The main control board 71 may light the status indicator 147b in different modes for the short ART and the long ART, or may light in the same mode.

In addition, the method of outputting a signal to an external device when performing a precursory effect using a short ART is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the short ART in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the long ART in the transition lottery, it signals to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device regardless of whether the short ART is won or the long ART is won in the transition lottery.

In addition, as the end condition of the short ART and the long ART, any condition such as the number of games in the specific section, the number of navigations performed in the specific section, the number of medals paid out in the specific section, the difference number, etc. Can be used. In this case, the end condition used for the short ART and the end condition used for the long ART may be of the same type or may be of different types. The same type means, for example, when the number of games is used as the end condition of the short ART, the number of games is also used as the end condition of the long ART. When the number of games is used as the condition, a condition other than the number of games is used as the end condition of the long ART.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 133 (C), an example of an effect in the case of performing a precursory game using the short ART will be described. When the short ART or the long ART is won, the sub-control board 72 performs an effect of, for example, "explosion chance rush" in the display unit 100. This "explosion chance" effect is an effect of notifying the winner of the long ART depending on whether or not the bomb can be detonated during the first period, which is the duration of the short ART. In the example shown in FIG. 133, it is assumed that the duration of the short ART is between three games.

If the sub-control board 72 has won the short ART in the transition lottery (that is, if it has not won the long ART), the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and wins the long ART in the transition lottery. If so, perform a production that succeeds in blasting the bomb in the "Bombing Chance" production. It should be noted that the timing at which the bomb is successfully detonated when the long ART is won is arbitrary. For example, if the duration of the short ART is 3 games, the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 1st or 2nd game, or the bomb may be successfully detonated in the 3rd game. You may succeed in exploding the bomb at the beginning of the fourth game.

Further, since the short ART and the long ART are specific sections, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 can notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode during the precursory effect. In the example shown in FIG. 133 (C), since the push order combination is won during the “explosion chance” effect, which is the precursor effect of the long ART, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the push order combination. On the other hand, the order of pushing the correct answer is notified. In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can notify the player of the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player during the precursory effect, so that the player is given a sense of loss during the precursory effect that should enhance the interest of the game. It won't happen.

(Precursor method 2 regarding transition to a specific section)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 134, another method of the precursor realization method regarding the transition to the second specific section will be described. In the above-mentioned precursor method 1, since the result of the transition lottery has already been determined at the start of the “explosion chance” effect, the result of the precursor effect has already been determined at the start of the precursor game. Another method described below is a method in which the result of the precursory effect can be determined during the precursory game. In this method, a plurality of specific sections of CZ (first specific section) and ART game state (second specific section) are provided, and the game in CZ is treated as a precursor game related to the transition to the ART game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 134 (A), the pachislot machine 1 performs a transition lottery to CZ during the normal section and a transition lottery to ART during CZ. FIG. 134 (B) is a diagram showing an example of a transition lottery table used for the transition lottery. On the main control board 71, the lottery for shifting to the CZ is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the lottery for shifting to the ART gaming state is performed based on the combination of symbols. Specifically, when the combination of bell spilled stitches or the first symbol is displayed on the main control board 71, the transition to the ART gaming state is not performed, and the combination of bell symbols is displayed. , ART game state transition lottery is performed. Then, by notifying the push order bell of the correct push order during the CZ, it is possible to easily shift to the ART gaming state during the CZ.

In the pachislot machine 1, when the CZ is won in the transition lottery performed during the normal section, the “explosion chance” effect shown in FIG. 134 (C) is produced. This "explosion chance" effect continues, for example, for three games, and if the push order bell is determined as the internal winning combination during these three games, the correct push order is notified, and as a result, the game shifts to the ART game state. You can get a lottery. Then, when the CZ ends without winning the transition lottery to the ART game state, the sub-control board 72 ends the "explosion chance" effect without being able to explode the bomb, and shifts to the ART game state before the end of the CZ. If the lottery is won, the effect of successfully blasting the bomb is executed in the "explosion chance" effect.

The main control board 71 lights the status indicator 147b in both the CZ and ART gaming states, but the lighting mode of the status indicator 147b is arbitrary. That is, the main control board 71 may light the state indicator 147b in different modes depending on the CZ and the ART gaming state, or may light in the same mode.

Further, the method of outputting the signal to the external device is also arbitrary. For example, when the main control board 71 wins the CZ in the transition lottery, it does not output a signal to the external device, and only when it wins the ART gaming state in the transition lottery, the signal is sent to the external device. May be output. Further, the main control board 71 may output a signal to an external device regardless of whether the CZ is won in the transition lottery or the ART gaming state is won.

Further, the end conditions of the CZ and ART gaming states are arbitrary, and different types of end conditions may be used, or the same type of end conditions may be used.

Further, as a modification of the above example, a specification in which a short ART or a long ART is started at the start of the so-called gap MB can be considered.
Here, the gap MB is, for example, a payout of medals whose end condition of the MB exceeds 14, and a combination of symbols in which 14 medals are paid out or a combination of symbols in which 15 medals are paid out in the MB. In the MB in which is displayed, in the state where the notification is performed, in the first game in the MB, the push order in which the combination of the symbols to which 14 medals are paid out will be displayed is notified, and in the next game. , The combination of symbols for which 15 medals will be paid out will be displayed. By notifying the push order, 29 medals can be paid out, but in the state where the notification is not performed, 15 medals will be displayed. A combination of symbols to be paid out is often displayed, and refers to an MB that ends with the payout of 15 medals.

In the above example, it is necessary to wait until the push order combination is determined as the internal winning combination, but if the short ART is started at the start of such a gap MB, the push order is pushed in the game of starting the short ART and the next game. Since the forward navigation occurs, it is not necessary to keep waiting until the push forward role is decided as the internal winning role, and the game is not delayed, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. Also, even if you finish with a short ART, the game will not be delayed due to the gap MB, so you can get more medals than you can get more medals than you can digest the number of bell navigation in a normal game, and you can experience the profitable navigation consumption, so you can experience the long ART It is possible to reduce the disappointment caused by not connecting to the game and suppress the decrease in the player's motivation to play.

<How to save the number of navigations>
In a so-called pachislot machine that manages the number of navigations, which uses the number of navigations performed during the specific section as the end condition of the duration of the specific section, if the roles to be navigated (the roles to be notified) are concentrated and won Navigation is concentrated, and as a result, a specific section ends immediately. If the specific section ends immediately, it may cause the player to feel dissatisfied. Therefore, the method of saving the number of navigations will be described below with reference to FIG. 135.

When the number of navigations is used as the end condition of the continuation period of the specific section, in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135 (A), the notification of the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player even during the bonus state is notified. A necessary bonus (MB1) and a bonus (MB2) that does not require notification of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player during the bonus state are provided. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 starts the MB1 gaming state when the combination of symbols corresponding to MB1 is displayed, and sets the MB2 gaming state in which the combination of symbols corresponding to MB2 is displayed. Start.

As shown in FIG. 135 (B), during the MB1 game state, the main control board 71 displays a combination of symbols having different numbers of payouts according to the pressing order, “F_maintenance lip_1st + all small combinations” and “F_maintenance”. While rip_2nd + all small wins and "F_maintenance rip_3rd + all small wins" are determined as internal winning combinations, only the combination in which the combination of symbols with the same number of payouts is displayed regardless of the push order is inside during the MB2 game state. Determined as the winning role. Then, during the MB1 game state, the number of payouts may differ depending on the push order. Therefore, when these combinations are determined as the internal winning combinations, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are in the correct push order. Notify (pushing order in which 9-card combination is displayed).

By doing so, if the MB1 gaming state starts during the specific section, the game will be played while consuming the number of navigations, but if the MB2 gaming state can be started during the specific section, Can play a game without consuming the number of navigations, and can reduce the speed of consumption of the number of navigations.

In the MB1 game state, a combination in which a combination of symbols having different payout numbers is displayed according to the push order is determined as an internal winning combination, while in the MB2 game state, the payout number is the same regardless of the push order. The method of realizing that only the winning combination for which the combination is displayed is determined as the internal winning combination is arbitrary. As an example, the MB1 game state is set as a 3-bet-only game state, and during the MB1 game state, only the winning combination related to the replay is individually drawn, and all the small winning combinations are individually drawn when the internal winning combination is determined. The stop control is different depending on the type of replay that has been saved. As a result, during the MB1 game state, it is possible to determine as the internal winning combination a combination in which a combination of symbols having a different number of payouts is displayed according to the pressing order. On the other hand, the MB2 game state is set to the game state dedicated to 2 bets, and the number of medals paid out is the same for all small wins at the time of 2 bets. As a result, during the MB2 game state, only the winning combination in which the combination of symbols having the same number of payouts is displayed regardless of the pressing order can be determined as the internal winning combination.

<Individual management of Lip Navi and Bell Navi>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 141, a method of individually managing the lip navigator and the bell navigator in the specific section will be described. In a conventional pachislot machine, it is common to perform both notifications for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state and notifications for increasing medals during a specific section. By managing each of the above, it is possible to realize a new playability that has never existed before.

(Game example 1)
First, with reference to FIGS. 136 to 138, a game example 1 in the case of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation will be described. This game example 1 has a plurality of types of specific sections, Lipnavi AT and Bernavi AT, as specific sections. The Lipnavi AT provides notifications for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state, but does not provide notifications for increasing medals. Further, in the Bernavi AT, at least the notification for increasing the number of medals is given, and the notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in the high lip state is given as necessary.

FIG. 136 (A) is a game flow in Game Example 1. As shown in FIG. 136 (A), the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with three types of RT game states, an RT0 game state to an RT3 game state, in which the types of internal winning combinations related to replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. .. The RT0 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state in which the player stays after the bonus ends, the initialization process, the setting change, or the like. Further, the RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and is a gaming state mainly used in the normal game. In addition, the RT2 game state is a game state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and if it shifts according to the notification, it is treated as a Lipnavi AT, and if it shifts regardless of the notification. Is a game state that is treated as a normal game. Further, the RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is high, and is a gaming state mainly used in the Bernavi AT.

There is a possibility of shifting from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the bell spilled symbols is displayed in the RT0 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), the combination of the bell spilled symbols is the combination of the push order combination “F_3 selection bell_1st” to “F_3 selection bell_3rd”. Is displayed when the answer is incorrect in the push order in the game in which "" is determined as the internal winning combination. In the game in which the roles "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, when the correct answer is in the push order, the combination of bell symbols is displayed and nine medals are paid out.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Specifically, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed in the RT1 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT1 game state, the winning combinations “F_RT2 transition lip_123” to “F_RT2 transition lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state. Specifically, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combinations “F_maintenance lip_123” to “F_maintenance lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed. When the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, the main control board 71 maintains the game state in the RT2 game state, and the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed by the incorrect answer in the push order. In this case, the gaming state is changed from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed in the RT2 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT3 gaming state. Here, as shown in the internal lottery table of FIG. 136 (B), in the RT2 game state, the winning combinations “F_RT3 transition lip_123” to “F_RT3 transition lip_321” are used as internal winning combinations with a predetermined probability. decide. Then, as shown in the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol in FIG. 136 (B), in the game in which the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, the correct answer is given in the order of pressing. In the case of, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and in the case of an incorrect answer in the pressing order, the combination of the symbols of the replay is displayed. When the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed by the correct answer in the push order, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the RT2 game state to the RT3 game state, and the combination of the symbols of the replay is changed by the incorrect answer in the push order. When it is displayed, the gaming state is maintained in the RT2 gaming state.

In addition, there is a possibility of shifting from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. Specifically, when a combination of bell spilled eyes or RT1 transition lip symbols is displayed in the RT3 gaming state, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state. That is, in the game in which the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" are determined as the internal winning combination, the main control board 71 displays a combination of bell symbols according to the correct push order. While paying out 9 medals, the game state is maintained in the RT3 game state, and if a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed due to an incorrect push order, the number (or 0) is less than 9. While paying out the medals, the gaming state is changed from the RT3 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 137 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT based on the internal winning combination. It should be noted that this transition lottery table indicates that the transition lottery to the Lipnavi AT is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the type of combination for which the transition lottery is to be performed is merely an example.

Further, as shown in the transition lottery table of FIG. 137 (C), in the pachislot machine 1, the main control board 71 performs the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT based on the combination of the displayed symbols. In this game example 1, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to the Bernavi AT only when the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed, and the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed. Be sure to win the Bernavi AT.

In the illustrated example, the combination of the symbols of the RT3 transition lip is displayed for the transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT, that is, the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. It is supposed to be performed on the condition that the correct answer is given in the push order in the played game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the main control board 71 simply has the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" inside. If it is decided as the winning combination, a lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT may be performed.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 determines the winning combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination during the RT2 gaming state, and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_321" during the other RT gaming states. F_RT3 transition lip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition lip_321 "are not determined as the internal winning combination, or during other RT game states, there is a lower probability than during the RT2 game state" F_RT3 transition lip_123 "to" F_RT3 transition lip_321 ". Is determined as the internal winning role. Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, the transition lottery to the Bell Navi AT is performed more frequently than in the other RT gaming states, and the main control board 71 is in the other RT gaming states (particularly, the RT1 gaming state) during the RT2 gaming state. ) More frequently, the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT is performed.

In the pachislot machine 1 (main control board 71 and sub control board 72), when neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bernavi AT is won, the player is notified of the advantageous stop operation mode (correct answer pressing order). do not. On the other hand, in the pachislot machine 1, when the Lipnavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Lipnavi AT is performed, and when the Bernavi AT is won, the notification associated with the Bernavi AT is performed.

Specifically, in the case of winning the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the roles "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to. When either "F_RT3 transition lip_321" or the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the order of pressing the correct answer is notified. On the other hand, even when the Lipnavi AT is won, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. Even if it is done, the order of pressing the correct answer is not notified.

Further, when the bell navigation AT is won, one of the combinations "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination for the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72. , Notify the correct push order. In the case of winning the Bell Navi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". When either "Rip_321" or the combination "F_Maintenance Lip_123" is determined as the internal winning combination, the correct push order may be notified or may not be notified.

By doing so, it is possible to treat during Lipnavi AT as a specific section for notifying to maintain the RT2 gaming state where the frequency of transition to Bernavi AT is high, and during Bernavi AT, medals can be awarded. It can be treated as a specific section for notifying to increase. As described above, in the game example 1, since the Lipnavi AT and the Bernavi AT have specific sections having different roles, the meaning of the notification differs depending on the type of the specific section for the player. It is possible to prevent a decline in interest without the notification becoming monotonous.

Further, during the Lipnavi AT, the notification for increasing the number of medals is not performed, so that the increase of medals can be suppressed. With pachislot machines, it is necessary to balance the profits of the player and the game store, but if the period of increase in medals is long, the profits that the player will get will be excessive, making it difficult to shift to a specific section. It is necessary to balance profits in other parts. In this regard, according to the pachislot machine 1 of the game example 1, there is a specific section called the Lipnavi AT, which does not notify the number of medals, in addition to the Bellnavi AT, which notifies the number of medals. It is possible to balance the interests of the player and the amusement store while realizing the playability that is easy to shift to.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section is made the same for each set value by performing the transition lottery performed based on the information that does not differ in the set values. .. In this respect, the transition lottery itself may be performed based on information that does not differ in the set values, but the degree of expectation regarding the transition to a specific section may be different for each set value. The specific method is shown below.

In the above-mentioned game example 1, in response to the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" being determined as the internal winning combination (more specifically, the correct answer when determined as the internal winning combination). (According to the stop operation in the push order), the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be performed. Since the transition lottery is performed based on the information that does not differ in the set values, the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" have a probability according to the current gaming state regardless of the set value. Must be determined as. Specifically, the main control board 71 determines the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination with a predetermined probability regardless of the set value during the RT2 gaming state. As described above, even in the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state, the winning combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" may be determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the main control During the RT gaming state other than the RT2 gaming state (for example, the RT1 gaming state), the substrate 71 has a probability lower than a predetermined probability regardless of the set value, and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321". Is determined as the internal winning role.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the probability of winning the transition lottery to a specific section is the same regardless of the set value, the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are internal. Depending on the winning combination (more specifically, depending on the stop operation in the correct push order when determined as the internal winning combination), the winning combination has the same probability regardless of the set value. It is necessary to carry out a transition lottery. Therefore, when the transfer lottery to the Bell Navi AT is performed, the main control board 71 performs the lottery so as to win with the same probability regardless of the set value.

By doing so, the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321", which trigger the lottery for transition to Bernavi AT, are determined as the internal winning combination with the same probability regardless of the set value. In addition, the lottery for transition to the Bernavi AT will be won with the same probability regardless of the set value. Therefore, at first glance, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT is the same for each set value, but in this method, by giving a setting difference regarding the transition to the RT gaming state, the transition to the Bernavi AT is related. The degree of expectation is different for each set value.

Specifically, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT1 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state with a probability corresponding to the set set value. As described above, during the RT2 game state, the transition lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed more frequently than in other RT game states. Therefore, this RT2 game is performed without setting a difference in the trigger of the transition lottery and the winning probability. By providing a setting difference regarding the transition to the state, as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT can be made different for each set value. More specifically, in the internal lottery table for RT1 shown in FIG. 136 (B), the probability (lottery value information) of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is determined. , By making it different for each set value, it is possible to provide a setting difference regarding the transition to the RT2 gaming state. As a result, the set value with a high probability of determining the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" as the internal winning combination is likely to shift to the RT2 gaming state, and as a result, the degree of expectation regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, it is possible to show the characteristics of each set value regarding the transition to the Bernavi AT.

(Example of production in Game Example 1)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 138, an production example in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 1 will be described. FIG. 138 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the flow of the game when the effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 138 (A), the first game is in the RT1 game state, and is a game in which neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bernavi AT is won. In the first game, since neither the Lipnavi AT nor the Bellnavi AT was won, the status indicator 147b was turned off, and both the number of Lipnavi and the number of Bellnavi remained 0. The number of rip navigators includes any of the roles "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321", the roles "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition rip_321", and the role "F_maintenance rip_123". It is the number of times to notify the push order of the correct answer when it is decided as the winning combination, and the number of bell navigations is that any one of the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination. It is the number of times to notify the pressing order of the correct answer in the case.

Subsequently, in the second game, the lottery for transition to Lipnavi AT is won. Therefore, the status indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1, and the number of times of lip navigation is 5 times. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) (a) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays that the number of times of lip navigation has been given to the display unit 100, and also displays that the "search challenge" effect is started. The "search challenge" effect is an effect of searching for treasures performed during Lipnavi AT, and if the treasure can be found while the number of times of Lipnavi remains, it will be a success (Bernavi AT). Is.

Subsequently, in the third game, any of the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from 5 to 4 in the third game. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) (b) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 game state) to the treasure room (RT2 game state) on the display unit 100. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, and then, as shown in (b) of FIG. 138 (B), the sub-control board 72 is displayed on the display unit 100. Displays that it has arrived between the waiting period and the treasure.

Subsequently, in the fourth game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the third game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the fourth game, any of the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the fourth game is in the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and prompt the player to maintain the RT2 game state. Along with this notification, in the fourth game, the number of rip navigators has decreased from four to three. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in FIG. 138 (B) (c) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for maintaining the RT2 gaming state on the display unit 100. When the player performs the stop operation in accordance with this notification, the RT2 gaming state is maintained and the search among the treasures is continued.

Subsequently, in the fifth game, any of the roles "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd" is determined as the internal winning combination, but since it is in the Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub The control board 72 does not notify the correct pressing order. Therefore, as shown in (d) of FIG. 138 (B), the sub-control board 72 displays the display unit 100 indicating that the pressing order is unknown. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 138, since it is assumed that the answer is incorrect in the order of pressing, the combination of the symbols of the bell spilled eyes is displayed. The main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 gaming state to the RT1 gaming state in accordance with the display of the combination of the bell spilled symbols. Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 that the display unit 100 has fallen from the treasure room (RT2 game state) to the standby time (RT1 game state).

Subsequently, in the sixth game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 1 because the transition to the RT1 game state was performed in the fifth game. Further, in the sixth game, any of the combinations "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the Lipnavi AT is in progress, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order and promote the transition to the RT2 gaming state. Along with this notification, in the sixth game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from three to two. Further, as shown in FIG. 138 (e), the sub-control board 72 displays the push order for shifting from the standby state (RT1 game state) to the treasure room (RT2 game state) on the display unit 100. After that, when the combination of the symbols of the RT2 transition lip is displayed, the display unit 100 is displayed to indicate that it has arrived between the waiting period and the treasure.

Subsequently, in the seventh game, since the transition to the RT2 game state was performed in the sixth game, the state indicator 147b is lit in the lighting pattern 2. Further, in the seventh game, any of the combinations "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination. Since the seventh game is in Lipnavi AT, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 notify the correct push order. Along with this notification, in the seventh game, the number of rip navigators has been reduced from two to one. At this time, the sub-control board 72 performs the effect illustrated in (f) of FIG. 138 (B) on the display unit 100. That is, the sub-control board 72 displays the correct pressing order on the display unit 100.

Here, when any of the roles "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the correct answer is given in the order of pressing, the transfer lottery to the Bernavi AT is performed and the winning is won to the Bernavi AT. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 displays on the display unit 100 indicating that the Bell Navi AT has been won. Further, depending on the winning of the Bell Navi AT, the initial value (10) is added to the number of Lip Navi and the number of Bell Navi, respectively. It should be noted that the number of rip navigators at the time of winning the Bell Navi AT is 11 because one time remains as the number of rip navigators when winning the Bernavi AT.

After that, the game state becomes the Bell Navi AT from the eighth game, and the main control board 71 lights the state display 147b in the lighting pattern 3. In this Bell Navi AT, as long as the number of rip navigations remains, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 have the combinations "F_RT2 transition rip_123" to "F_RT2 transition rip_321" and the combinations "F_RT3 transition rip_123" to "F_RT3 transition". Notify the correct answer pressing order to the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" and the role "F_maintenance lip_123", and press the correct answer for the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection_3rd" as long as the number of bell navigations remains Notify the order.

(Game example 2)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 139 to 141, a game example 2 in the case of individually managing the lip navigation and the bell navigation will be described. In this game example 2, both Lip Navi and Bell Navi are performed during the specific section, and the number of notifications of both is managed individually. That is, in this game example 2, the number of times of both Lip Navi and Bell Navi is used as the end condition of the specific section. The lip navigator is a notification for maintaining the RT gaming state in a high lip state, and the bell navigation is a notification for increasing the number of medals.

FIG. 139 (A) is a game flow in Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (A), the game example 2 has a normal section and a specific section, and during the specific section, there is a high probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination. (For example, the RT2 gaming state or the RT3 gaming state in the game example 1) and the lip low probability (for example, the RT1 gaming state in the game example 1) in which the probability that the winning combination related to the replay is determined as the internal winning combination is low.

In the game example 2, the main control board 71 performs a transition lottery to a specific section during the normal section, and when the transition lottery is won, the main control board 71 shifts the game state from the normal section to the specific section. .. In Game Example 2, the lottery for transition to a specific section may be performed by an arbitrary method.

Further, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation become 0 times in the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section. That is, in the game example 2, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 give notifications for maintaining the RT game state in the high lip state for the number of times indicated by the number of rip navigations, and medals for the number of times indicated by the number of bell navigations. Notify to increase. Then, when both the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation reach 0, the main control board 71 ends the specific section and shifts the gaming state from the specific section to the normal section.

Further, when the combination of the fall replay symbols is displayed during the specific section, the main control board 71 shifts the RT game state from the high rip state to the low rip state, and when the promotion replay symbol combination is displayed. , The main control board 71 shifts the RT gaming state from the low lip state to the high lip state. The combination of the symbols of the fall replay and the promotion replay is arbitrary, but in accordance with the expression of Game Example 1, for example, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the fall replay, and the RT2 transition. The combination of the symbols of the lip and the RT3 transition lip corresponds to the combination of the symbols of the promotion replay.

In addition, the combination of the symbols of the RT1 transition lip is displayed when the push order is incorrect when the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination, and the RT2 transition lip and RT3 The combination of the symbols of the transition lip is the correct answer when the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. Sometimes displayed. Therefore, the lip navigation in the game example 2 is a combination of the symbols of the fall replay by notifying the correct push order when the roles "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination. When the combination "F_RT2 transition lip_123" to "F_RT2 transition lip_321" and the combination "F_RT3 transition lip_123" to "F_RT3 transition lip_321" are determined as internal winning combinations. It includes notifying the pressing order of the correct answer and prompting the display of the combination of symbols of the promotion replay.

If the combinations "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" are determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, the combination of the replay symbols is displayed and the RT game state is displayed. Is maintained in the current RT gaming state. That is, when the combination "F_maintenance lip_123" to "F_maintenance lip_321" is determined as the internal winning combination in the high lip state, the main control board 71 displays the combination of the replay symbols (press). (Correct answer), while maintaining the RT game state in the high rip state, when the combination of the fall replay symbols is displayed (push order incorrect answer), the RT game state is changed from the high rip state to the low rip state. ..

Subsequently, FIG. 139 (B) is a diagram showing the characteristics of the specific section of Game Example 2. As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the game example 2 has a plurality of states of a normal ART and a special state in a specific section. Comparing the normal ART and the special state, the normal ART is a state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is faster than that in the special state. Further, in Game Example 2, the number of rip navigators and the number of bell navigators are added during a specific section. When comparing the normal ART and the special state, the amount of the extra number of bell navigators is reduced during the special state as compared with the normal ART. On the other hand, increase the amount of additional Lipnavi. That is, in the special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the number of lip navigations is given priority over the number of bell navigations and added.

(How to realize a special state)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 140, a method of realizing a special state capable of suppressing the consumption speed of the number of times of bell navigation will be described. In the pachislot machine 1, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st", "F_3 choice bell A_2nd", "F_3 choice bell A_3rd", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_12t", "F_3 choice bell B_2nd", and "F_3 choice" are the targets of the bell navigation. Bell B_3rd ". In the following, the roles "F_3 choice bell A_1st" to "F_3 choice bell A_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3 choice bell A", and the roles "F_3 choice bell B_1st" to "F_3 choice bell B_3rd" are simply referred to as the role "F_3". Sometimes called "Choice Bell B".

As shown in FIG. 140 (A), when the bonus is not won, that is, when the winning combination is not carried over as the internal winning combination, either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B" The combination of symbols displayed according to the pressing order is different. Specifically, for both the combination "F_3 selection bell A" and the combination "F_3 selection bell B", when the push order is correct, the combination of bell symbols is displayed, 9 medals are paid out, and the push order is irregular. When the answer is correct, a combination of bell-spilled symbols is displayed, and a number (or 0) of medals less than 9 is paid out.

Therefore, in the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72, when either the combination "F_3 selection bell A" or the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section when the bonus is not won, Performs bell navigation (notification of correct push order) for the number of bell navigations. In other words, during a specific section when the bonus is not won, the number of bell navigations will decrease regardless of whether the role "F_3 choice bell A" or the role "F_3 choice bell B" is decided as the internal winning role. Become.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), during the flags, that is, in the state where the winning combination related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning combination, the combination "F_3 choice bell B" is displayed according to the pressing order. Although the combinations of symbols are different, the combination of symbols displayed in the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is the same regardless of the pressing order. Specifically, for the role "F_3 choice bell B", a combination of bell symbols is displayed when the push order is correct, nine medals are paid out, and a combination of bell spilled symbols is displayed when the push order is incorrect. Is displayed, and a number (or 0) of medals less than 9 is paid out. On the other hand, for the role "F_3 choice bell A", the combination of bell symbols is displayed regardless of the pressing order, and nine medals are paid out.

Therefore, when the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section between the flags, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 do not notify the push order and between the flags. When the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination during the specific section of the above, the bell navigation (notification of the correct push order) is performed for the number of times of the bell navigation. In other words, during the specific section between the flags, even if the combination "F_3 selection bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination, the number of bell navigations does not decrease, and the combination "F_3 selection bell B" is determined as the internal winning combination. The number of bell navigations will be reduced.

In this way, by distinguishing between the normal ART and the special state depending on whether or not the role related to the bonus is carried over as the internal winning role, the realization of a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations can be suppressed. can do. That is, in the case of the above example, by setting the specific section when the bonus is not won as a normal ART and setting the specific section between the flags as a special state, it is possible to realize a special state in which the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations can be suppressed. can do.

(Additional example)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 141, a method of adding the number of times of lip navigation and the number of times of bell navigation will be described. The additional lottery table of FIG. 141 (A) defines information on the lottery value for the additional amount of the number of bell navigations and the number of lip navigations for each internal winning combination and game state. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 adds the number of times of bell navigation and the number of times of lip navigation with reference to the addition lottery table shown in FIG. 141 (A). Note that FIG. 141 (B) is a diagram showing an outline of the degree of expectation of addition according to the addition lottery table of FIG. 141 (A).

With reference to FIGS. 141 (A) and 141 (B), it can be seen that the expected degree of addition of the number of times of bell navigation and the degree of expectation of addition of the number of times of lip navigation are different between the normal ART and the special state. Specifically, in the addition based on cactus and weak cherry, the number of bell navigations is usually more likely to be added during ART, while the number of lip navigations is more likely to be added during special conditions. More specifically, during the special state, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is smaller than that during normal ART, and conversely, the amount of addition of the number of lip navigations is increased.
In the example shown in FIG. 141, the addition based on the strong cherry has the same addition expectation in the normal ART and in the special state.

In such a pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, the lip navigation and the bell navigation are individually managed in a specific section, the lip navigation is performed as many times as the number of lip navigations, and the bell navigation is performed as many times as the number of bell navigations. As a result, even if either the role targeted for Lip Navi or the role targeted for Bell Navi is concentrated and determined as the internal winning combination during a specific section, only one of the navigation times is consumed. And since the other number of navigations is not consumed, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the game example 2, a normal ART and a special state are provided as specific sections, and the degree of expectation of addition differs depending on the current state. Specifically, during normal ART where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is high, it is easy to add the number of bell navigations, and conversely, during the special state where the consumption speed of the number of bell navigations is suppressed, the amount of addition of the number of bell navigations is reduced. , Increase the amount of additional lip navigation. As a result, the consumption speed of the number of navigations can be relaxed, and as a result, the interest in a specific section is not impaired.

<How to select CZs with different end periods>
Subsequently, a method of selecting CZs having different end periods will be described with reference to FIG. 142. In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the specific section continues for a long period of time, the transition from the specific section to the normal section is performed without satisfying the end condition (limit processing). Further, since the specific section includes the CZ in addition to the ART gaming state, when the limit processing is performed, the ART gaming state continuously performed from the CZ has a gaming period corresponding to the number of games in which the CZ continues. It will be shortened. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player can select the CZ to be executed from the CZs having different end periods, and at the time of selection, the CZ considered to be preferable for the player can be easily selected. There is.

As shown in FIG. 142, the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a plurality of CZs having different end periods. Specifically, the CZ "short-term battle" shown in FIG. 142 (A) is a CZ having a end period of 0 games, and the CZ "game" shown in FIG. 142 (B) is a CZ having an end period of 1 game. Yes, the CZ "stable" shown in FIG. 142 (C) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games, and the CZ "turbulence" shown in FIG. 142 (D) is a CZ with an end period of 10 games. The CZ "long-term battle" shown in (E) is a CZ with an end period of 30 games. In the pachi-slot machine 1, when the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and shifts the gaming state to the normal section. On the other hand, if the main control board 71 wins the lottery for transition to the ART gaming state before the duration of the CZ exceeds the end period of the type of CZ to be executed, the main control board 71 ends the CZ and changes the gaming state to the ART gaming state. Transition.

Here, a method of selecting CZ will be described. FIGS. 142 (A) to 142 (E) are selection screens for selecting CZ. A selection cursor for selecting a CZ is provided on this selection screen. In FIG. 142, the selection cursor points to the CZ “short-term battle” in FIG. 142 (A), the CZ “game” in FIG. 142 (B), and the CZ “stable” in FIG. 142 (C). In FIG. 142 (D), it refers to CZ “disturbance”, and in FIG. 142 (E), it refers to CZ “long-term battle”. This selection cursor, for example, switches the CZ to be selected with the passage of time.

The selection screen accepts the player's operation on the chance button (not shown), and the main control board 71 executes it assuming that the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor is selected at the timing when the chance button is operated. Accepts the selection of CZ and then starts the selected CZ. That is, when the chance button is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A), the main control board 71 accepts the selection from the player as selecting the CZ “short-term battle”, and then accepts the selection from the player, and then the CZ “short-term battle”. Start the battle. The method of specifying the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor by the main control board 71 is arbitrary. For example, the main control board 71 can also count the interval at which the CZ pointed by the selection cursor is switched. The CZ pointed to by the selection cursor on the substrate 71 can be specified.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the selection cursor points to the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period in the initial state, and then points to other CZs in the order of the shortest end period with the passage of time. .. For example, the selection cursor points to CZ in the order of CZ "short-term battle", CZ "game", CZ "stable", CZ "turbulence", and CZ "long-term battle" with the passage of time.

Here, when the limit processing is performed as described above, the game period in the ART game state is shortened by the number of games in which the CZ continues, so that the CZ "short-term battle" with the shortest end period is a game. It is considered to be preferable for the person. In the pachislot machine 1, the CZ is selected based on the CZ pointed to by the selection cursor, but by pointing to the CZ "short-term battle" as the initial state of the selection cursor, the CZ that is kind to the player The selection method can be realized.

Further, depending on the player, the game may proceed without making any selection on the selection screen. For example, when the start lever 6 is operated and the game is started (that is, when a predetermined operation is performed) without accepting the operation for the chance button on the selection screen, the player has not made a selection. become. When the game is started without accepting the selection of the CZ in this way, the main control board 71 starts the CZ having the shortest end period among the plurality of CZs having different end periods. That is, when the player starts the game without selecting the CZ, the main control board 71 performs the CZ "short-term battle" having the shortest end period regardless of the position of the selection cursor at the timing when the game is started. It is automatically selected, and then the CZ "short-term battle" is started. This makes it possible to realize a CZ selection method that is kind to the player.

It should be noted that such a selection screen is displayed, for example, at the start of CZ, in other words, in a state where the right to shift to CZ is granted. That is, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the CZ for performing a shift lottery as to whether or not to shift to the ART gaming state, and in a state where the right to shift to the CZ is granted, a plurality of types of CZs. Accepts the selection of one CZ from among.

<Reel control at the start of a specific section>
Subsequently, the reel control at the time of starting the specific section will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the reel stop control can display a combination of specific symbols such as "7-7-7" (hereinafter referred to as "AT start number") when starting a specific section. I do. Specifically, the main control board 71 grants the right to shift to the specific section when it wins the lottery to shift to the specific section. The right to shift to the specific section is carried over until the gaming state shifts to the specific section, and is cleared (deprived) when the gaming state shifts to the specific section. That is, when the main control board 71 satisfies the transition condition to the specific section (for example, the AT start result is displayed) while the transition right is granted, the game state is shifted to the specific section and the transition right is given. clear. Then, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in different modes depending on whether the transfer right is granted or not (that is, the reel stop control). To make it different).

143 and 144 are views showing an example of a rotation cylinder stop initial setting table used for reel stop control, and are used in steps S9 and S12 of FIG. 75 described above. This rotation cylinder stop initial setting table is referred to when determining the reel stop control information for stopping the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel stop initial setting table is used when the winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination in association with the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination, the current gaming state, and the presence or absence of the right to shift to a specific section. Specifies reel stop control information. The main control board 71 refers to the reel stop initial setting table, acquires reel stop control information corresponding to the internal winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transition right, and uses the reel stop control information to obtain the reel 3L. Stop 3C and 3R.

The reel stop control information associated with the winning combination, the game state, and the presence / absence of the transfer right includes the rotation cylinder stop number, the determination data for each pressing order (pull-in priority table number, pull-in priority selection table number), and table number selection. Value (change status, stop table data), 1st cylinder 1st stop table change data, 1st cylinder stop data table selection data (left 1st stop table), 1st cylinder 1st stop Table change Information including initial data selection value (change status, table number) and search order data table number.

The "judgment data for each pressing order" includes a pull-in priority order table number and a pull-in priority selection table number. The “draw-in priority table number” is a number for selecting a pull-in priority table (not shown). The "draw-in priority selection table number" is a number for selecting the pull-in priority selection table (not shown).

The "table number selection data" is a value referred to when all reels are stopped when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L, and includes a change status and stop table data.

The "stop table number" is a number for selecting a stop table to be referred to when stopping all reels when the first stop reel is other than the left reel 3L. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referenced in the stop table selected based on the stop table data, and is the initial stage of the line status in the present embodiment. The state is A line. Here, when the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, and when the change status is "2", if the line status is A line, it is changed to B line.

The first stop reel is the first cylinder for the first cylinder first stop table change data, the first cylinder stop data table selection data, and the first cylinder first stop table change initial data selection value. That is, it is the data referred to when the left reel is 3L.

"Table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder" indicates whether to use or change the same stop table after the first stop on the left after the second stop when the first stop reel is the left reel 3L. It is the data which shows. If there is a value (value other than 0) in the table change data for the first stop of the first cylinder, select the change data search table based on the planned stop position, search the data, and perform the second and subsequent stops. Select the stop table for.

The "first cylinder stop data table selection data" is a number for selecting the first cylinder stop data table (not shown) referred to when the first cylinder is stopped.

The "first table change initial data selection value for the first cylinder stop" is data referred to when the second and third cylinders are stopped, and includes a table number and a line status. The "table number" is a number for selecting a stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder, which is referred to when stopping the second and third stop reels. The "change status" is data for changing the line status for each game representing the line referred to in the stop data table after the first stop of the first cylinder selected based on the table number. If the change status is "0", the line status is not changed, if it is "2", it is changed to B line if the line status is A line, and if it is "3", it is changed to B line. If the line status is A line or B line, it is changed to C line.

The "search order table number" is a number for selecting a search order table (not shown) for determining the number of sliding pieces.

As shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 143 (B), in the pachislot machine 1, different reel stop control information is used depending on whether or not the winning combination related to the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Specifically, in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (A), which is referred to when the winning combination related to the bonus is not won, the reel stop number "17" is used for the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". In the reel stop control information of the above, and in the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (B), which is referred to when the combination related to the bonus is won, for the same combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the reel stop number "31" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information is different depending on the presence or absence of the winning combination of the bonus, so that the reel stop control is different when the winning combination of the bonus is determined as the internal winning combination. Can be made.

Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 143 (A) and 144 (C), the pachislot machine 1 uses different reel stop control information depending on whether or not the transfer right is granted. Specifically, in the reel stop initial setting table of FIG. 143 (A), which is referred to when the transition right is not granted, the reel stop number "17" is assigned to the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". In the reel stop stop initial setting table of FIG. 144 (C), which is referred to when the reel stop control information is specified and the transition right is granted, the reel is rotated for the same combination "F_3 selection bell_1st". The reel stop control information of the stop number "41" is specified. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control information can be changed depending on the presence or absence of the transfer right, so that the reel stop control can be changed when the transfer lottery to a specific section is won.

Subsequently, FIG. 145 shows the correspondence between the winning combination and the stop symbol when the reel stop control is performed using the rotation cylinder stop initial setting table shown in FIGS. 143 and 144. As shown in FIG. 145, in a normal section to which the right to shift to a specific section is not granted, if the internal winning combination is "off", a combination of "out of place" symbols is displayed, and the internal winning combination is also displayed. When is the role "F_3 choice bell_1st" to "F_3 choice bell_3rd", the combination of bell symbols is displayed when the correct answer is given in the pressing order, and the bell spilled or first appearance symbol is displayed when the pressing order is incorrect. The combination is displayed.

On the other hand, in the waiting section of the specific section to which the right to shift to the specific section is granted, when the internal winning combination is "off", if the push operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result. Is displayed, and if the eye-pressing operation is inaccurate, a combination of "missing" symbols is displayed. In addition, when the internal winning combination is the combination "F_3 selection bell_1st" to "F_3 selection bell_3rd", if the eye-pressing operation is accurate, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is displayed, and the eye-pressing operation is not possible. If it is accurate, a combination of bells, spilled bells, or the first pattern is displayed.

In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to make the reel stop control different depending on the presence or absence of the right to shift to the specific section, the combination of the symbols of the AT start result is changed according to the stop operation of the player at the start of the specific section. The rotation of the reel can be stopped as shown.

Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the reel stop control may be different depending on the type of the specific section of the transition destination. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a plurality of specific sections having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the main control board 71 is granted the right to shift to one specific section and the one specific section. The reel stop control may be different depending on the case where the right to shift to another specific section different from the above is granted. Specifically, when the same winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, depending on whether the right to transfer to one specific section is granted or the right to transfer to another specific section is granted. A reel stop initial setting table may be provided so that the reel stop control information used is different.

As a result, the reel stop control can be changed according to the type of the specific section of the transfer destination. Therefore, for example, when shifting to a specific section which is more advantageous for the player and when shifting to a specific section other than that. Therefore, the combination of symbols displayed at the start of a specific section can be changed. For the player, the degree of advantage of the subsequent game differs depending on the combination of symbols displayed at the start of the specific section, so that the player has a strong interest in the stop operation at the start of the specific section. The interest of the game is improved.
In the pachislot machine 1, the winning probability of the internal winning combination differs depending on the bonus state and the RT game state, but the winning probability of the internal winning combination does not differ depending on the type of the specific section.

Here, in recent years, a pachislot machine in which another reel (hereinafter, “second main reel”) is provided in addition to a reel (hereinafter, “first main reel”) controlled according to the result of internal lottery is also known. ing. For example, a pachi-slot machine having three reels of the above-mentioned reels 3L, 3C, and 3R as the first main reel and a reel provided in only one row to the right of the reel 3R as the second main reel is known. .. The reels having different stop controls depending on the result of the shift lottery may be the first main reel or the second main reel.

When the stop control of the second main reel is changed according to the result of the shift lottery, the main control board 71 uses the first main reel according to the operation of the start lever 6 in the game in which the shift lottery to the specific section is performed. The rotation of the second main reel is started before the rotation of the second main reel is started. Then, when the stop button 7R is operated, the main control board 71 stops the rotation of the second main reel according to the result of the transition lottery to the specific section. Specifically, when the lottery for transition to a specific section is won, the rotation of the second main reel is stopped so that a symbol that is not displayed if the lottery is not won can be displayed. When the rotation of the second main reel is stopped according to the result of the transition lottery to the specific section in this way, the main control board 71 then starts the rotation of the first main reel.

In the above example, the second main reel is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 7R. However, in addition to the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R, a stop button dedicated to the second main reel may be provided. Good. Further, the second main reel may be provided in a plurality of reels instead of one.
By separating the stop operation for the result of the transition lottery of the specific section and the stop operation for the result of the internal lottery in this way, both sides can be enjoyed and the player can easily grasp the game.

<Control when changing settings>
Subsequently, the control at the time of changing the setting will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the control contents when the setting is changed and when the main RAM 33 is cleared. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a new set value is set (when the setting is changed), the main control board 71 is a combination related to a bonus carried over as an internal winning combination even during the flag period. Is maintained without clearing, the specific section is maintained even during the specific section, and the result of the transition lottery is maintained even during the waiting section that is winning the transition lottery of the specific section. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, even if a new set value is set during the flag interval, the specific section, or the standby section, the gaming state before the new set value is set is maintained as it is. ..
The case where a new setting value is set (when the setting is changed) is not limited to the case where the setting value is changed from setting 1 to setting 6 and the same setting such as setting 1 to setting 1. It also includes the case of resetting the value (so-called resetting to the same setting).

On the other hand, when the main RAM 33 is cleared (when the RAM is cleared), the main control board 71 clears all the gaming states. That is, the main control board 71 clears the winning combination related to the carried-over bonus when the RAM is cleared during the period between the flags, and ends the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section. The game state is shifted to the normal section, and when the RAM is cleared during the standby section, the result of the shift lottery is cleared.

In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 clears the specific section when the RAM is cleared during the specific section, but maintains the specific section as it is when the setting is changed during the specific section. From the game store side, it is possible to select whether to maintain / clear a specific section while changing the set value, so that the game store side can be given various options regarding the operation of the pachislot machine.

The setting change operation can be performed, for example, via the setting key type switch 430 (see FIG. 116), and the RAM clear operation can be performed, for example, via the reset switch 442 (see FIG. 116). It can be carried out.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Subsequently, the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 164. The detailed description of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment and the same configuration and control as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the third embodiment will be omitted. The "specific section" described in the third embodiment is referred to as an "advantageous section" in the fourth embodiment, and a gaming state in which so-called navigation and production modes are added is referred to as a "ball ejection state". In addition, when different terms are used with the same or similar elements as those described in the first to third embodiments, the terms used in the first to third embodiments are added in parentheses at the end of the terms. The features of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment shown below can be similarly applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first to third embodiments.

[Game flow of the pachislot machine of the fourth embodiment]
First, the game flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149. FIG. 147 is a transition flow of the ball ejection state of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a process during the MB operation in the ball ejection state. FIG. 149 is a diagram showing an outline of a ball ejection state and a game state in a list.

As shown in FIG. 147, the ball ejection state is roughly divided into a normal section and an advantageous section. In the normal section, the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) is turned off by the control of the main control board 71, and in the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) is turned on. The advantageous section lamp notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the off state, and notifies the player that he / she is not staying in the advantageous section depending on the lit state. However, in the present embodiment, even if the player stays in the advantageous section and the advantageous section lamp is lit, it is possible to suppress the notification of the necessary stop operation information to the player depending on the lighting mode of the notification lamp 147a. There are (unacceptable) and acceptable states. As shown in FIG. 148, the MB operates according to the winning of the MB in both the normal section and the advantageous section. In this embodiment, a short MB (abbreviated as "SMB") that always wins a prize in any pushing order at the time of winning and ends with 1G with the payout of more than one medal as an end condition, and basically the winning. There is a long MB (abbreviated as "LMB") that wins a prize after passing through a state between flags and ends by digesting a plurality of games on the condition that more than 81 medals are paid out. LMB has no setting difference in winning probability, and SMB has a setting difference in winning probability. In the following description, SMB and LMB are collectively referred to as MB.

In the normal section, "normal" is executed as the ball ejection state. As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, "normal" is an initial state after the power is turned on or after the setting is changed, and all variables are cleared after the end of the advantageous section described later, and the state shifts to this "normal" state. To do. In "normal", navigation is not performed, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed for each unit game (one game). If you win in the advantageous section transition lottery, you will win the advantageous section. There are "normal winning" and "GG winning" in the advantageous section winning. In the case of "normal winning", the next game shifts to "normal advantage", which will be described later, as a ball-out state. On the other hand, in the case of "GG winning", it shifts to "GG precursor" which will be described later as a ball ejection state. The advantageous section transition lottery will be described later.

In the advantageous section, "normal advantage", "JOT", "GG precursor", "MB_HZ", "JM", and "GG" can be executed as the main ball ejection states. The advantageous section is a state in which a navigation (bell navigation) that can win a prize in the push order small winning combination (in this embodiment, "push order bell" or "batting order bell") of the maximum number of payouts can be generated, and the bell navigation is generated (push). It is in a state where it cannot be terminated until at least one of the termination conditions such as the winning of the forward bell) or the operation of the bonus (MB) is satisfied. When the above-mentioned end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section end lottery described later is executed, and the process shifts to "normal" according to the lottery result. Advantageous section end Depending on the lottery result of the lottery, the advantageous section may be continued. However, in the present embodiment, except when the MB is activated, the bell navigation is not generated even if the push order bell is hit from the start of the advantageous section to, for example, 100G (notification suppression state, Also called "waiting section"). That is, in the present embodiment, as a general rule, the first bell navigation can be generated according to the winning of the push order bell on the condition that the predetermined number of games (100 G) has passed without the MB operating from the start of the advantageous section ( Bell navigation can be generated, notification is allowed). As an exception, even before the predetermined number of games (100G) has elapsed from the start of the advantageous section, if the MB is won, the bell navigation can be generated (notification allowable state). In addition, regardless of the number of games, the winning of the push order bell may be managed by a flag, and the bell navigation non-occurrence state and the bell navigation generation possible state may be controlled according to the presence or absence of the flag and the number of flags. Further, in the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is set even before the end condition of the advantageous section (pushing order bell winning, bonus (MB) operation) is satisfied. Limit processing such as forcibly ending and shifting to the normal section (“normal” state) is executed. For example, when the ART state of "GG", which will be described later, reaches 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section, the limit process is executed even if the number of remaining games in the ART remains. As a result, the advantageous section is terminated together with ART, and the section is shifted to the normal section.

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, the "normal advantage" shifts to the "normal win" by the advantageous section lottery in the "normal". In addition, "normal advantage" refers to the case where a lottery result that continues in the advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART (GG), which will be described later, is obtained, and the case where the remaining 0G is left due to GG non-winning in "JOT", which will be described later. Also move to. In the "normal advantage", the JOT lottery and the GG lottery described later are executed. When the JOT lottery is won, the state shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "JOT" described later, and when the GG lottery is won, the state shifts from "normal advantage" to the state of "GG precursor" described later.

The "normal advantage" includes a normal mode in which the "GG" winning probability of the GG lottery is different, such as "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor". The type of the normal mode is initially determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery, which will be described later, when the advantageous section lottery results in the "normal win" in the "normal". In the normal mode in the "normal advantage", the normal mode transition lottery is executed according to the winning combination, and basically the mode is promoted to the mode in which the winning probability of the GG lottery is high or the mode is maintained according to the lottery result. Further, the "normal advantage" includes a JOT lottery mode in which the winning probability of "JOT" is different, such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", and "high accuracy C". The type of JOT lottery mode is initially "low accuracy", and the JOT lottery mode in "normal advantage" is selected by the JOT lottery mode transition lottery or the JOT lottery mode transition lottery dedicated when the specified number of games is reached, depending on the winning combination. Promoted / fallen or maintained. Basically, in the JOT lottery mode transition lottery, the mode is dropped to a mode in which the winning probability of "JOT" is low, or the mode is maintained. In the JOT lottery mode transition lottery dedicated to reaching the specified number of games, for example, when the number reaches 20G, 40G, 80G, the lottery is executed, and the mode is promoted to a mode having a high probability of winning the JOT lottery or the mode is maintained. After 120G, it becomes a dedicated lottery mode, and the winning probability increases from the beginning in JOT lottery and GG lottery. In addition, after the "Hamari Ceiling", which is a dedicated lottery mode, is set, the advantageous section end lottery (see Fig. 155), which will be described later, which triggers the transition from "normal advantage" to "normal", shall not be performed. It is desirable to confirm the "GG" winning. By taking such a remedy, it is possible to give benefits to the player who has reduced the number of medals by advancing the game for about 120 games without winning the push order bell or MB. Even if you are unfortunately unable to pull the push order bell or MB (winning) in the "normally advantageous" state, you will be able to proceed with the game with the expectation of reaching the "Hamari ceiling", and the game will be played. It is possible to prevent the decline in the interest of the game. Further, in the "Hamari Ceiling" mode, only "GG" may be drawn, or only "JOT" may be drawn. In addition, the lottery probability of "GG" and "JOT" is higher than that of each normal mode and JOT lottery mode, and when the "Hamari ceiling" is reached, it becomes difficult to win "GG" or "JOT". It is desirable to prevent the occurrence of the game in order to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, even if the "JOT" is won and the "JOT" fails, it is desirable to return to the "Hamari Ceiling" mode and guarantee the benefits beyond the "GG" winning, which is the medal increase section. .. In addition, if "JOT" is won in the "Hamari Ceiling" mode in which the benefits of "GG" or higher are confirmed, the number of games until the start of "GG", which is a medal increase section, will increase as a result. However, if you win the "GG" via the "JOT", the ART will start from the "JM" (additional specialization zone) described later, so the medals consumed during the "JOT" of about 5 games. Even if you consider, the expected value of medals that can be obtained is higher than when you win directly to "GG", so even though "GG" is confirmed, medals can be reduced by extra chance games. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable.

Further, in the "normal advantage", the winning probability of the MB described later is about 1/17, and the possibility of winning the MB is high by the time it reaches 100G. Then, when the MB wins, the bell navigation can be generated, the advantageous section end lottery described later is executed after the MB operation is completed, and the process shifts to "normal" according to the lottery result. In short, if the game shifts to "normal advantage" and exceeds the predetermined number of games (100G), the bell navigation can be generated, but there is a possibility that a prize will be won in a game in which MB is established by the time the MB reaches 100G or through a state between flags. Since it is high, the average number of "normally advantageous" staying games is about 25G. As will be described in detail later, the MB symbol combination is pulled in 1 (in all push orders, which) so that the player does not intentionally delay the winning of the MB and the ball output rate increases. It is desirable to configure the symbol arrangement and reel stop control so that the prize can be won even if the stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R are stopped at the timing.

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, "JOT" shifts by becoming a JOT winning by JOT lottery in "normal advantage". "JOT" is a chance game state in which it is relatively easy to win the "GG" described later. There are types of "JOT" such as "normal" and "legend" in which the winning probability of the GG lottery differs depending on the JOT lottery mode. For example, when the JOT lottery mode is "high accuracy A" and the type is "legend", the GG winning probability is higher than when the JOT lottery mode is "high accuracy A" and the type is "normal". Basically, the GG winning probability is higher when the type is "Legend" than when it is "Normal". The type of JOT is determined by lottery regardless of the role. When the GG lottery is won, the state shifts from "JOT" to the state of "JM" described later. When the specified number of games (5G) of "JOT" is completed without winning the GG lottery, the game shifts to "normal advantage". In "JOT", the navigation of the winning push order bell is basically not performed. Further, the type of "JOT" may be determined by referring to the internal winning combination of the unit game (game) won in the JOT lottery. For example, when the "JOT" is won with the winning of the "strong bell", the "legend" may be selected more easily than when the winning of another role is used. Further, as the type of "JOT", the JOT lottery mode at the time of winning "JOT" may be referred to, and the JOT lottery such as "low accuracy", "high accuracy A", "high accuracy B", and "high accuracy C" may be referred to. The selection rate of "Legend" may be different for each mode or a part thereof. In addition, in the above-mentioned "Hamari Ceiling" mode, by providing benefits such as the confirmation of "Legend" and providing relief measures for the player who has reduced the number of medals, the specification that suppresses the decrease in the player's motivation to play. May be. In addition, during "JOT", GG lottery is performed with reference to the internal winning combination for 5 games, but at the time of loss, it is considered that the internal winning combination is in a non-winning state, so GG lottery is not performed. May be. In addition, the GG lottery may be performed with reference to at least one of the internal winning combination and the stop result. When the GG lottery is performed based on the stop roll, the player can enjoy the roll on the reel, and when the GG lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination, the control load of the main control board 71 is reduced. can do.

"As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, the" GG precursor "shifts by becoming a GG win by GG lottery in" normal "or" normal advantage ". The "GG precursor" shifts to "GG" through the GG preparation state after the specified number of games have been exhausted. However, if the normal mode stays in "special" and shifts to "GG precursor" due to GG winning, it shifts to "GG" via "JM" described later. In the "GG precursor", the rank-up lottery of the GG initial mode lottery is executed from the start. Basically, the higher the rank of the GG initial mode lottery, the more advantageous the player is.

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, "MB_HZ" is transferred by winning the LMB regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section. In "MB_HZ", the HZ mode promotion lottery and the GG lottery regardless of the role are executed. In the HZ mode, the higher the rank, the more advantageous the player. When the operation of the LMB is completed by winning the GG lottery, the process shifts from "MB_HZ" to "GG" through the state of "JM" described later. When the operation of the LMB is completed without winning the GG lottery, the state shifts from "MB_HZ" to the original payout state (for example, "normal" or "normal advantage").

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, "JM" is a so-called ART addition special zone, and shifts after the GG winning in "JOT" or "MB_HZ" or the specified number of games of "GG precursor" is completed. .. In "JM", an additional lottery for the number of GG games is executed according to the JM type. After the specified number of games of "JM" is exhausted, if the end lottery is won, if there is JM stock, it will be in the state of "JM" as it is, and if there is no JM stock, it will shift to "GG".

As shown in FIGS. 147 and 149, "GG" is a so-called ART state, and shifts from "JM" or "GG precursor". "GG" has modes having different degrees of advantage such as additional lottery such as "GG", "chance A", "chance B", and "chance C", and additional lottery and various mode transition lottery are executed. For "GG", for example, 100G is given as the initial number of games, and the number of games is added according to the result of the additional lottery. At the end of the number of games of "GG", an advantageous section lottery regardless of the winning combination is executed, and if the lottery result is "continuation", it shifts to "normal advantage", while if it is "end", it shifts to "normal". To do.

As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, "MB" is a so-called bonus state, and can be generated according to a winning in either a normal section or an advantageous section except during LMB operation. In "MB", a normal mode transition lottery, a JOT mode transition lottery, a GG mode transition lottery, a lottery for adding the number of games, and the like are executed.

[Game state controlled by the main control board]
Next, with reference to FIG. 150, a gaming state under the control of the main control board 71 of the pachislot machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 150 is a transition flow of the gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 150, the gaming states include RT0 and RT1 having a relatively low replay winning probability, and RT2 and RT3 having a relatively high replay winning probability. RT0 is the initial state after the setting change or the game state after the end of MB, and is the state of staying when the ball ejection state is "normal". Move to. RT1 is a state of staying mainly when the ball ejection state is "normal", and when the RT2 transition lip is displayed, it shifts to RT2. RT2 is in the middle of the transition to RT3, and when the RT3 transition rip is displayed, it shifts to RT3. The RT3 is a so-called ART state in which the ball ejection state corresponds to "GG" or "JM", and shifts to RT1 via the display of a bell spill or an RT1 transition lip.

The initial state after the setting change is always the "normal" state at RT0, while the initial state after the power is turned on without the setting change is the gaming state (generally RT1) before the power is turned off. Until then, it will be in the "normal" state. In the initial state after the setting change, if the advantageous section is won in the "normal" state of RT0, the advantageous section becomes relatively advantageous compared to the case where the advantageous section is won in the initial state after the power is turned on without the setting change. .. This will be described later with reference to FIG. 164.

[Various data tables on the main control side]
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 32 will be described with reference to FIGS. 151 to 156.

<Internal lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described. The internal lottery table is provided for each game state, and defines the lottery value information corresponding to each combination. FIG. 151 is an internal lottery table referred to in each of RT0 to RT3, MB inside, and MB (operating).

In the present embodiment, the lottery random value extracted from the predetermined numerical range "0 to 65535" is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value corresponding to each combination, and whether or not the result of the subtraction is negative ( An internal lottery is performed by determining (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the winning combination to which this is assigned is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, the winning probability of each number can be expressed by "the lottery value corresponding to each number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)".

In the internal lottery table, basically, the type of the combination related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination and the winning probability change according to the type of the RT gaming state. Comparing the internal lottery tables of RT0 to RT3 shown in FIG. 151, it can be seen that the types of the winning combination and the winning probability related to the replay determined as the internal winning combination are different in each game state. The most characteristic point is that in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, "SMB (No. 48)" to "LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)" have a probability of about 1/17 as an internal winning combination in RT0 to RT3. Is decided as an internal winning role. By the way, in RT0 to RT3 or MB, the push order bells ("F_4 choice bell 1A (No.34)" to "F_4 choice bell 4B (No.41)") have an internal winning probability of about 1/4. Determined as a role. In addition, SMB is a bonus role with a setting difference and can be determined as a single winning role of "SMB (No. 48)", while LMB is a bonus role with no setting difference and is "LMB + F_fan lip". It can be determined as a duplicate winning combination of "B (No. 49)" or "LMB + F_XD lip (No. 50)". In addition, "SMB" is only a single win, and the symbol combination corresponding to "SMB" is pulled in 1 (in all pressing orders, at what timing the stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R are stopped, it can be used for other roles. The symbol arrangement and reel stop control are designed so that the prize can be won unless it is hindered), and the prize is always won in the established game (the game that won the prize for the first time, not carried over from the non-winning bonus state), so it may be carried over. Absent. In the established game, "LMB" is internally won in duplicate with the replay, and the replay is given priority over "LMB". Therefore, when "LMB" is established, there is always a gap between the flags. It shifts to the inside of MB which is the state. Then, since the symbol combination corresponding to "LMB" is also drawn in 1, a prize is always won unless a small winning combination or a replay winning combination that gives priority to the bonus is established at the same time in the inter-flag state. With such a role configuration, the player intentionally avoids winning the MB by pushing, delaying the satisfaction of the end condition of the advantageous section, and increasing the arrival rate to the "Hamari ceiling". It is possible to prevent the strategy and prevent unexpected damage on the hall side.

<Normal_Advantageous section transition lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table will be described. The normal_advantageous section transition lottery table is a table that is referred to when performing an advantageous section transition lottery based on the internal winning combination for each game (unit game) in the "normal" state. As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous section transition lottery table, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance lip, weak chance", "medium chance, fanning""Rip","strongbell","fixedrole", and "LMB" are defined, and the lottery values of "non-winning", "normal advantage", "specific role", and "LMB" indicating the lottery result for each reference item are specified. Is regulated. As the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 151, the "batting order bell" corresponds to "F_4 selection bell 1A (No. 34)" to "F_4 selection bell 4B (No. 41)", and "common bell, 1 sheet" is , "F_common bell A (No.45) to F_common bell B (No.46)", "F_1 card combination (No.47)", and "common lip, chance lip, weak chance" is " Corresponds to "F_common lip (No.25)", "F_chance lip (No.26)", and "F_weak chance role (No.44)", and "medium chance, fanning lip" is "F_medium chance role". (No. 43) ”,“ F_Further Lip A (No.31) ”to“ F_Further Lip B (No.32) ”, and“ Strong Bell ”is“ F_Strong Bell (No.42) ” The "fixed role" is "F_black BAR lip (No.37)", "F_red BAR lip (No.28)", "F_purple 7 lip A (No.29)" to "F_purple". 7 Lip B (No. 30) ”, and“ LMB ”corresponds to“ LMB + F_Further Lip B (No. 49) ”to“ LMB + F_XD Lip (No. 50) ”. The "specific combination" as a result of the lottery serves as a "fixed combination" and triggers a specific process.

According to the advantageous section transition lottery using such a normal_advantageous section transition lottery table, if a "batting order bell" is won in the "normal" state, there is a 1/256 probability that the "normal advantageous" lottery result will be obtained. Obtained, and based on the lottery result, the state becomes "normally advantageous" from the next game. In addition, for example, if a player wins a "medium chance" or a "fanning lip", a lottery result of "normal advantage" is obtained with a probability of 248/256, and based on the lottery result, a state of "normal advantage" is obtained from the next game. In addition, a lottery result of "GG" may be obtained with a probability of 8/256, and in this case, the state of "GG precursor" is set from the next game based on the lottery result. The winning probability of such "GG" is about 3.2% at the time of winning "Medium chance, fanning lip", about 12.5% at the time of winning "Strong bell", and winning in "advantageous section". It is kept lower than the probability of doing.

<Normal_Advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 153, the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table will be described. Normal_advantageous section initial normal mode The lottery table sets the normal mode of the first game to the advantageous section in the first game (unit game) immediately after shifting to the "advantageous section" by winning the advantageous section transition lottery from "normal". It is a table referred to when determining by the initial normal mode lottery. As shown in the figure, in the normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, chance lip, weak chance", "medium chance" , "Further Lip", "Strong Bell", "Definite Role", "LMB" are specified, and as the types of normal mode that shows the lottery result for each reference item, "Low accuracy", "Heaven preparation", "Heaven", The lottery values for "super heaven", "special", and "next precursor" are specified.

According to the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery using such a normal_advantageous section initial normal mode lottery table, for example, when the "batting order bell" is won in the first game of "normal advantage", there is a probability of "low" of 248/256. A “probability” lottery result is obtained, and in the first game, the “low probability” normal mode is set based on the lottery result. On the other hand, for example, in the case of winning the "batting order bell", the lottery result of "preparation for heaven" is obtained with a probability of 6/256, and in this case, in the first game of "normal advantage", " It becomes the normal mode of "heaven preparation". After the first game of "normal advantage", the normal mode may be promoted according to the lottery result of the normal mode transition lottery. In normal mode, you are promoted in the order of "low probability", "preparation for heaven", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next precursor" (including promotion of two or more stages), and basically promoted. The winning probability of "GG" (see Fig. 154) is getting higher, but in the case of "special" which can be the normal mode in the first game, the winning probability of "GG" is "super heaven". It is not always higher than the case (see FIG. 154). Also, the winning probability of "GG" when the normal mode is "low probability" or "preparation for heaven" in the "normal advantage" state is lower than the winning probability of "GG" in the "normal" state. (See FIGS. 152 and 154). As a result, immediately after the transition from "normal" to "normal advantage", it tends to be more difficult to win the "GG" than in the "normal" state. This will be described in detail with reference to the usual advantage_GG lottery table described below.

<Normal advantage_GG lottery table>
Next, the usually advantageous_GG lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 154. Normal advantage_GG lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode ("low accuracy", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special", "next precursor"), and "normal advantage" It is a table referred to when deciding the transition to "GG"("GGwinning") based on the internal winning combination for each normal mode of "". As shown in the figure, in the normal advantage_GG lottery table corresponding to each normal mode, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak chance", "Chance lip", "medium chance", and "strong bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (non-winning, winning) is defined for each reference item.

According to the GG lottery using such a normal advantage_GG lottery table, in the "normal advantage" state, for example, in the "low probability" normal mode, if the "weak chance" is won, 1/256 The lottery result of the "GG" win is obtained with a probability, and then the state shifts to the "GG" state via the "GG precursor".

Here, when the normal mode is "low probability" or "preparation for heaven", the probability of winning "GG" is the probability of winning "GG" or "heaven" when the winning probability of the internal winning role is also taken into consideration. Preparation ") = 0.4% × 0.8 + 0.8% × 0.3 + 12.5% × 0.1 = 1.81%. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 152, the probability of winning the "GG" by the advantageous section transition lottery in the "normal" time is the probability of winning the "GG" winning (normal time) = 2. It will be about 5%. That is, in the present embodiment, the initial normal mode (mainly "low accuracy" or "preparation for heaven") that shifts to "normal advantage" has a lower probability of winning "GG" than the "normal" state. It is suppressed, and it is more difficult to shift to "GG" immediately after shifting to "normal advantage" than in the "normal" state. This raises the expectation that even in the "normal" state, the player may shift to the "GG" without going through the "normal advantage", and the interest of the game can be enhanced. In addition, even if the advantageous section ends and the advantageous section lamp <status indicator 147b) is turned off, it cannot be said that the situation is the most disadvantageous, so let's stop the game when the lamp is turned off. It is possible to motivate the player who thinks that the game is to be continued. In addition, in amusement parks other than immediately after the store opens, a vacant platform will be selected from the situation where the predecessor was left with the game stopped. Even if the above-mentioned measures are taken, there is a tendency for more units to be left unattended with the advantageous section lamp turned off, and even if the advantageous section lamp is turned off, the situation where the advantageous section lamp is turned off is the relatively most disadvantageous situation for that model. Once that is confirmed, the player may hesitate to start the game, thinking that it may not be necessary to start the game from the most unfavorable situation. It can be said that a player has a very high motivation to play when he / she goes to the amusement park to see the model, but if such a player's motivation is discouraged, the utilization rate will decrease. As mentioned above, by making the specification that the situation where the advantageous section lamp is off is not necessarily the most disadvantageous situation in the game state of the model, it cannot be said that it is the most disadvantageous situation for the time being, and the game is played by this. It is also possible to expect the effect of suppressing the decrease in the operating rate by making the player feel the desire to go.

<Normal advantage_advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 155, the usually advantageous_advantageous section end lottery table will be described. Normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table is provided for each type of normal mode ("low accuracy", "heaven preparation", "heaven", "super heaven", "special"), and "normal advantage" It is a table referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section based on the internal winning combination for each normal mode. When the normal mode is "next precursor", there is no advantageous section end lottery table corresponding to "next precursor" in order not to end the advantageous section. As shown in the figure, in the normal advantage_advantage section end lottery table corresponding to each normal mode, as reference items, "batting order bell", "common bell, 1 sheet", "common lip, fake lip", "weak""Chance","ChanceLip","MediumChance", and "Strong Bell" are defined, and the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined for each reference item.

According to the advantageous section end lottery using such a normal advantageous_advantageous section end lottery table, after reaching, for example, 100 G from the start of the advantageous section, in a "normally advantageous" state, for example, a "low probability" normal mode. In the case of, if the batting order bell is won, a lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained with a high probability of 252/256, and from the next game, the state of the "normal advantage" of the advantageous section changes to the "normal" of the normal section. Transition to the state of. On the other hand, for example, even when the "batting order bell" is won in the "low accuracy" normal mode, the lottery result of continuing the advantageous section may be obtained with a low probability of 4/256. In this case, the advantageous section is continued without being terminated. It should be noted that the transition to the "normal" state of the normal section may be made after the predetermined number of games has elapsed after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained. In addition, after the lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained, the advantageous section is continued or the advantageous section is continued by winning in the predetermined number of games by providing the transition waiting state of the predetermined number of games before the transition to the "normal" state of the normal section. It may be possible to perform continuous production over a plurality of games such as / and GG winning, and the end of an advantageous section due to defeat, which can enhance the interest of the game. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off during the continuous production and the defeat is confirmed during the continuous production, which reduces the interest. In addition, the continuous production is configured so that the basic settlement can be made with the number of games one or more shorter than the predetermined number of games waiting for the transition, so that the pattern will be revived in the next game in which the defeat production as the basic settlement occurs. You may do it. If the advantageous section lamp is turned off at the time of the third stop of the game in which the defeat confirmation effect has occurred, for example, there is no possibility that the advantageous section will be continued or the GG will be won in the revival effect, so that the motivation to continue the game of the next game is reduced. Therefore, it is a consideration to avoid such a situation. As a specific example, there is a case where the predetermined number of games is 5 games, and the content up to the conclusion of the continuous production excluding one game for the revival production is composed of a maximum of 4 games, and the revival production is performed in one game. By turning off the advantageous section lamp after the player confirms that the revival effect does not occur, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the interest of the continuous effect is lowered in the middle. When the limiter (limit processing) is activated, the transition waiting state cannot be set until the transition from the "normal advantage" to the "normal" of the normal section. Therefore, immediately before the limiter is activated, the above-mentioned advantageous section is used. It is preferable to suppress the occurrence of continuous production related to continuation and prevent the situation where the continuous production is terminated by the limiter.

<Common_End of advantageous section end lottery table>
Next, with reference to FIG. 156, the common_end advantageous section end lottery table will be described. The common_end advantageous section end lottery table is, for example, a table that is referred to when determining the end of the advantageous section at the end of "GG" (ART) regardless of the internal winning combination. As shown in the figure, the lottery value corresponding to the lottery result (continuation, end) is defined in the common_end advantageous section end lottery table.

According to the end-time advantageous section end lottery using such a common_end-time advantageous section end lottery table, for example, at the end when the number of games of "GG" is exhausted, 243/256 is irrespective of the internal winning combination. The lottery result of the end of the advantageous section is obtained with a probability, and the state shifts to the "normal" state of the normal section from the next game. On the other hand, for example, at the end of the number of games of "GG", a lottery result of continuation of an advantageous section may be obtained with a probability of 13/256 regardless of the internal winning combination. In this case, the advantageous section is continued by shifting from the "GG" to the "normally advantageous" state without ending the advantageous section. As shown in FIGS. 152 to 156, in the AT-related processing, a common table is adopted for all the settings 1 to 6. As a result, it is possible to suppress excessive gambling due to the extremely high AT setting difference, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity required for AT lottery on the main control board 71.

[About the flow of advantageous sections]
Next, the flow of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 to 164. FIGS. 157 to 159 illustrate the specification example 1 in which the bell navigation is generated from the beginning of the advantageous section, and the flow of the advantageous section is described for the three patterns in which the batting order bell combination and the winning order of the MB are different in the specification example 1. It is a figure for doing. FIG. 160 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment of the fourth embodiment. As a difference from the specification example 1, in the first embodiment, the bell navigation is suppressed (the bell navigation is not generated) immediately after the start of the advantageous section. FIG. 161 is a diagram for comparing the payout amount in the advantageous section between the specification example 1 and the first embodiment, and shows the effect of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 160. FIG. 162 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the specification example 2, and FIG. 163 is a diagram for explaining the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment of the fourth embodiment. Is. FIG. 164 is a diagram for explaining, as the third embodiment of the fourth embodiment, after the power is turned on when the setting is not changed and after the power is turned on when the setting is changed. The specification example is a specification exemplified for explaining the effect of each embodiment, but each specification example is not a well-known technique, and when adopted, the effect according to each specification is exhibited. , It is a specification that can be appropriately adopted as a means of solving a problem depending on the playability intended by the planner. Since "MB" shown in FIGS. 158 to 160 corresponds to both "SMB" and "LMB" shown in FIG. 151, these are collectively referred to as "MB", but "SMB" having a high winning probability is mainly used. , And the state between flags is not shown.

<End condition of advantageous section>
The end conditions of the advantageous section in Specification Example 1 shown in FIGS. 157 to 159 and Example 1 shown in FIG. 160 are as follows.
Condition 1: Occurrence of push order notification by winning the batting order bell at least once Condition 2: MB winning or operating at least once (because it operates by winning, it may be judged based on either)
Condition 3: A predetermined end condition is satisfied on the premise that at least one of condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied. When the predetermined end condition in this condition 3 is satisfied, the advantageous section is terminated. There is no difference between 1 and Example 1.
In addition, a predetermined period elapses from the start of the advantageous section (20 games or more have passed) or the end lottery of each game advantageous section is performed from the start of the advantageous section, and the end lottery is performed before the above-mentioned condition 1 or condition 2 is satisfied. If you win in, you can set the end flag and end the advantageous section by assuming that condition 3 is satisfied in the game that satisfies condition 1 due to the occurrence of bell navigation or the game that satisfies condition 2 by MB operation. Good. Further, a state of waiting for transition of a predetermined number of games of at least one game may be provided between the time when the condition 3 is satisfied and the time when the advantageous section is completed. Although it is described as MB for convenience of explanation, the operation of a predetermined bonus other than MB may be the termination condition. In addition, as a modification, in a model without a bonus, or a model having only a single bonus (SB) or a CT bonus (CB) for only one game as a bonus, navigation occurs due to the establishment of a batting order bell without setting condition 2. There is no problem even if only is set as a prerequisite for the end of the advantageous section.

<Specification example 1>
Specification example 1 is characterized in that the bell navigation is confirmed from the start of the advantageous section until the batting order bell is first won. In this specification, after the batting order bell is hit in the advantageous section, the bell navigation (pushing order notification) is performed as soon as possible, the bell navigation is confirmed immediately after the start of the advantageous section, and if the batting order bell is hit, the first bell navigation is performed accordingly. Will be generated, and then the advantageous section will be terminated according to the result of the lottery. The purpose of this specification is to shift the advantageous section to the endable state as soon as possible when the player does not win the "GG" which is the ART state in which the number of medals increases uniformly. For example, when a player wins an advantageous section of "normal advantage", the number of games that is excessively long is notified as an advantageous section even though the result is GG non-winning, and the game is played in a situation where it is difficult for the player to stop the game. When forced to continue, a player who feels that he / she has been shown an extremely long tilt that is likely to hit in the end may significantly reduce his / her interest in the game machine, and appropriately suppress such a case. It is a specification that can be done.
As a flow until the end of the advantageous section, the three patterns of FIGS. 157 to 159 will be described below in the order shown in the drawings.
First, FIG. 157 shows a case where the batting order bell is won before the MB after the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section ends without winning the MB. In this case, since the batting order bell is acquired by the player by the navigation, the "payment by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 161 will occur. The winning probability of the batting order bell is about 1/4, and although there is a setting difference in the winning probability of MB, it is about 1/15 to 1/17, so this pattern that the batting order bell wins before MB is The frequency of occurrence is high. In addition, it may happen that you win the MB before the end of the advantageous section after hitting the batting order bell and the push order navigation occurs more than once, but the winning number of MB and the number of acquisitions during MB operation are pushed. It is not affected by the occurrence of forward navigation, and does not affect the "payment by bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / for high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 161. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 159. As will be described together, the MBs of this specification example and the embodiment have the same specifications, and the specifications are such that 9 sheets can be paid out when the correct answer of the eye-pressing position and 8 sheets can be paid out when the correct answer of the eye-pressing position is incorrect. In order to secure the minimum skill intervention, there is a case where 8 cards are won, but for example, 9 cards can be obtained by stopping the red BAR symbol on at least one reel. The specifications are such that even beginners can play games with peace of mind as they can easily win prizes.

Next, FIG. 158 shows a pattern in the case where the MB is won before the batting order bell in Specification Example 1, and then the advantageous section is completed without hitting the batting order bell. As described above, this pattern does not cause the "payment by the bell navigation of the advantageous section (CZ / high accuracy)" shown in FIG. 161. It occurs less frequently than the pattern shown in 157. In addition, when only the winning probability is considered, if the MB winning probability is set to a higher probability than the batting order bell, it is considered that the frequency of occurrence of bell navigation can be suppressed, but even if the number of payouts by the MB is small, it will be issued. In the ball test, there is a possibility of nonconformity in the item of the character ratio (nonconformity reason due to the ratio of the bonus payout to the total payout being too high), and the solution of increasing the MB winning probability than the batting order bell is adopted. In that case, the degree of freedom in batting design is extremely low.

Next, FIG. 159 shows a pattern in which the batting order bell wins before the MB and the bell navigation occurs in the specification example 1, but the MB wins before the end of the advantageous section thereafter. In this case, as a result, the end condition of the advantageous section can be satisfied by satisfying the above condition 2 by winning and operating the MB, so that the ball ejection by the navigation in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section is suppressed. By that amount, I want to increase the number of balls that can be played in GG (sometimes referred to as this AT) and increase the interest of the game by getting enough balls in "GG", which is the "hit" that players have been waiting for. From the point of view of the ball ejection design concept, it can be said that the specification that allows the batting order bell navigation to occur immediately after entering the advantageous section has acted in an unfavorable direction. This event can be suppressed by the method of immediately ending the advantageous section when the first bell navigation occurs, but since the batting order bell is established with a high probability of about 1/4, immediately after the advantageous section lamp lights up. In an average of about 4 games, when the bell navigation occurs once and the advantageous section ends, a state of "normal advantage" is set and it is directed whether or not to win the GG for an appropriate number of games. Since it is difficult to entertain with the game, if this method is adopted, the degree of freedom in batting design and production design will be greatly reduced.

<Example 1>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 160. As shown in the figure, in the first embodiment, the following conditions are applied to the advantageous section.
First condition: From the start of the advantageous section until 100 G has passed, even if the batting order bell is hit, the bell navigation is not generated and the bell navigation is not generated.
Second condition: The probability of winning MB is about 1/17, which is relatively high (see FIG. 151).
Third condition: After the MB operation is completed, the advantageous section is terminated according to the lottery result of the advantageous section end lottery.
As a result, from the start of the advantageous section until it reaches 100G, even if the batting order bell is hit, the advantageous section cannot be ended (bell navigation non-occurrence state), but the probability of winning the MB is relatively high, so 100G. It is easy to win the MB by then, and then the end lottery of the advantageous section is performed for each game (unit game) as the end possible state of the advantageous section (bell navigation generation possible state), and the MB is activated by winning the end of the advantageous section. After the end, the advantageous section will end. According to the first embodiment, the player suppresses the ball ejection by the navigation in the "normal advantageous" state of the advantageous section, and increases the acquisition of the ball ejection in the GG (sometimes referred to as the main AT) by that amount. From the ball-out design concept of wanting to get enough balls with the long-awaited "hit""GG" and enhance the interest of the game, as shown in Fig. 157 and Fig. 159, the batting order Bell Navi is "normally advantageous". It is possible to suppress an unfavorable event in which a bell is won by the occurrence and a ball is obtained. In addition, since the acquisition of medals by MB operation is not affected by navigation, by suppressing the navigation occurrence rate in "normal advantage", the base value (input) of "normal" and "normal advantage" in the normal section The ratio of the number of medals to be paid out to the number of medals) can be suppressed to a value close to each other, and the amount of balls to be paid out can be distributed to "GG".

In such a flow of the advantageous section according to the first embodiment, the occurrence of push order navigation in the advantageous section can be appropriately suppressed, and the degree of freedom in ball ejection design can be increased. Specifically, the number of balls to be ejected in the "normally advantageous" state of the advantageous section is not increased, and the amount of balls to be ejected indicated by the white arrow is allocated to the balls to be ejected such as ART ("GG") as shown in FIG. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in designing the ball.

In the explanation so far, the MB has been illustrated and described as an "SMB" that always wins a prize in the established game. On the other hand, in "LMB", winning is hindered by replay in the established game, and a bonus flag-to-flag state (carrying over) occurs. Here, in the state between the flags of the bonus, the specification may be such that the push order navigation is generated, or the specification may not be generated. From the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of bell navigation in the above-mentioned "normally advantageous" state, it is effective to have a specification that does not generate push-order navigation. In addition, based on the fact that the LMB was won with a winning probability of about 1/448 (see winning numbers No. 49 and No. 50 in FIG. 151, the winning probability is 146/65536) during the advantageous section, the "GG" was won. In the case of making the game proceed, the game progresses in the flow of "GG" during the inter-flag state, LMB winning, LMB operation, and the inter-flag state is also a gaming state that the player can equate with the GG winning state. It is desirable to have specifications that generate. In the case of the first embodiment, there is only one type of carry-over bonus, but in the case of a model equipped with a plurality of types of carry-over bonuses such as LMB1 and LMB2, push order navigation is performed according to the type of bonus being carried over. May be generated or not generated so that the player can guess the type of bonus depending on the presence or absence of navigation, and in the batting order bell winning game being carried over, the specification is such that navigation is always generated. Alternatively, it may be processed uniformly as a specification that does not occur at all, and the bonus type may be narrowed down by the stop roll (so-called reach) of the main reel because it is difficult to narrow down the bonus type depending on the presence or absence of navigation.

<Specification example 2>
Next, the flow at the end of the advantageous section according to the typical example 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 162. As shown in the figure, in the typical example 4, when the ART (“GG”) finishes after digesting a predetermined number of games (for example, 100G), the advantageous section also ends and the initialization process is performed accordingly. As a result, after the ART is completed, the next game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section). According to the flow at the end of such an advantageous section, it is possible to play the game while expecting to get a certain amount of balls during ART, but in exchange for that, it shifts to the normal section after the end of ART. Since it is confirmed that the game will end, the player tends to end the game at the end of the ART. That is, if the specifications are such that the advantageous section ends at the same time as the end of ART, not only the interest of the game cannot be enhanced, but also the operating rate of the game machine is likely to decrease.

<Example 2>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 163. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, when the ART (“GG”) finishes after digesting the predetermined number of games (for example, 100G), the above-mentioned end-time advantageous section end lottery is performed. When the result of the end-advantageous section end lottery is "end", as in the typical example 4, after the ART ends, the game shifts to the normal section (non-advantageous section) from the next game.

On the other hand, if "continue" is won as a result of the end-advantageous section end lottery at the end of ART, the normal mode is determined by the advantageous section initial normal mode lottery without shifting to the "normal" of the normal section, and the advantageous section "normal" is determined. Shift to "usually advantageous". At this time, in the "normally advantageous" state, since the predetermined number of games (100G) is basically exceeded from the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end lottery is performed for each game, and thus the advantageous section end lottery is performed. If you win, it will shift to the "normal" state of the normal section through the initialization process of the advantageous section.

Also, in the "normal advantage" state, if the rank of the normal mode is promoted and becomes higher (for example, in the case of "super heaven" or "next precursor"), it becomes easier to win the GG lottery, and then the GG win. , "GG precursor" and so on, and will shift to ART ("GG") again.

According to the flow at the end of the advantageous section of the second embodiment, the expectation that the advantageous section may continue and shift to the ART even after the end of the ART is raised, so that the interest of the game is enhanced. This can contribute to increasing the operating rate of game machines.

<Example 3>
Next, the flow of the advantageous section according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 164. As shown in the figure, in the third embodiment, for example, the mode displayed on the display unit 100 at the time of opening the store may be different.

For example, in the initial state after the power is turned off after the store is closed and the power is turned on before the store is opened without changing the settings, as shown in (a) of the figure, a general display according to the "normal" state is displayed. The aspect is displayed on the display unit 100. At this time, in general, the gaming state is RT1.

On the other hand, in the initial state after the setting is changed (for example, the setting is changed from the setting 1 to the same setting again after the setting change work is performed) before the store opens, (b) in the figure. ), In order to suggest that it is in RT0, which is different from RT1 which generally stays as a game state at the time of opening, the display unit 100 has a display mode such as "early rising is Sanbun no Toku stage". Is displayed in. That is, in the initial state at the time of opening after changing the setting, the game state is RT0, and it is suggested in the display unit 100 that this RT0 is in the "normal" state.

When the advantageous section is won in the "normal" state between RT0 and another RT (for example, RT1), a difference in advantage is provided in any of the first to third patterns as shown below. ..
(First pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: It is easy to win the ART (“GG”) with the push order navigation twice or more and there is a ball.
In the case of winning the advantageous section in other RTs: It is easy to win the CZ ("JOT") with one push order navigation without any balls.
(Second pattern)
In the case of winning the advantageous section at RT0: The winning of ART (“GG”) is confirmed.
If you win an advantageous section at another RT: You can win either ART (“GG”) or CZ (“JOT”).
(Third pattern)
In the case of winning an advantageous section at RT0: Of ART (“GG”) and CZ (“JOT”), the ratio of winning ART is relatively high. In addition, "relatively high" may include the case where the ratio of winning ART is 100% and the ratio of winning CZ is 0%.
In the case of winning an advantageous section in other RTs: Of ART (“GG”) and CZ (“JOT”), the ratio of winning ART is relatively low. In addition, "relatively low" may include the case where the ratio of winning ART is 0% and the ratio of winning CZ is 100%.

According to such an initial state of the third embodiment, it is possible to determine a state in which an advantage can be expected even in a "normal" state depending on the display mode at the time of opening, and when the player selects a game machine in the morning. It can be effectively used as a guide.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned specifications have a demerit that the setting change is easy for the amusement park side. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to guess whether or not the set value has changed from the previous day by re-setting to the same setting, but if the number of installed units is large, the work of changing the setting of all units is enormous. It takes effort. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the same screen as shown in FIG. 164 (a) may be displayed after the power is turned on, provided that a predetermined time has elapsed since the previous power failure. In this case, the predetermined time is generally set to about 2 hours or 4 hours after the midnight power failure so that the suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 164 (a) is not displayed due to a temporary power failure during business hours. It is desirable to set the length of time that will elapse.

Then, the player performs the operation of turning on the mobile terminal interlocking function with the player so that the user can actively use the services provided by the manufacturer such as the mobile terminal interlocking function (Unimemo (registered trademark)). The specification may be such that the advantageous screen at the time of opening as shown in FIG. 164 (a) is displayed only when this is done. Further, on the customer waiting screen in which the player has not inserted any medals, a common customer waiting screen (demo screen) may be displayed so that it cannot be determined whether or not the setting has been changed. .. By doing this, it becomes possible to determine the state for the first time by borrowing a medal and actually inserting the medal, so the motivation to first sit down and borrow the medal and from the time of opening the store Can motivate customers to visit the store. However, in a store where the number of players at the time of opening is extremely small, a player who takes a borrowed medal and walks across a plurality of medals to monopolize the advantageous RT0 may appear. As a countermeasure against such a player, the player can change the setting by allowing the staff of the game hall to arbitrarily set whether or not the setting change suggestion screen as shown in FIG. 164 (a) can be displayed in the hall menu. A store that does not want to be discriminated against may be provided with a function that enables a setting that displays a normal screen as shown in FIG. 164 (b) even when the setting is changed.

[Various functions of the main control board and sub control board]
The pachislot machine 1 according to the present invention has been described above. Subsequently, various functions of the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 of the pachislot machine 1 will be described.

The main control board 71 is connected to the start switch 6S and the stop switch 7S, and in order to control the progress of the game shown in FIG. 1, the fluctuation control means, the internal winning combination determination means, the stop control means, the state control means, and the advantageous state notification. It functions as a means, a mode control means, and an RT control means. The stop buttons 7L, 7C, and 7R function as stop operation means. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 function as variable display means. The sub-control board 72 and the notification lamp 147a function as operation mode notification means. The status indicator 147b functions as an advantageous status notification means. These functions will be described in the following appendix, and the corresponding ones in the embodiment will be written in parentheses at the end.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may have functions as described below, for example.

For example, in the case of winning (continuing) in the end-advantageous section end lottery at the end of "GG" (ART), a state of a guaranteed section is provided in which stay in the "normally advantageous" advantageous section is guaranteed for a predetermined number of games. You may do so. If a guaranteed section is provided, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the game ends in one game or two games even though the lottery for the end of the advantageous section at the end is won, and even if the advantageous section is continued, the game is played. It is possible to suppress a person's feeling of stress.

As the guarantee section, a fixed period such as 20 games may be given. When the fixed period is set, the load due to the processing of the payout lottery by the main control board 71 can be reduced, and the game playability becomes clear. On the other hand, the number of games to be granted as the guaranteed section may be determined by lottery based on the conditions regarding the continuation and termination of the guaranteed section. The grant of the guarantee section itself may also be decided. Further, the number of games in the guaranteed section may be collectively determined together with the continuation of winning by the lottery at the end of the advantageous section at the end. In such a case, the data required for the lottery process can be reduced. When the number of games in the guaranteed section is determined by a lottery separate from the end lottery for the advantageous section at the end, various game characteristics can be realized.

Further, the guarantee section may be continued until a predetermined number of wins or a prize is won by a predetermined combination (for example, bell or replay, MB, etc.) without managing the number of games.

The lottery for the end of the advantageous section in the "normal advantage" may not be performed until the end of the guaranteed section, or may be performed during the guaranteed section. If you win (end) in the advantageous section end lottery during the guaranteed section, store the winning result as a flag, for example, and go to the normal section ("normal") at the end of the guaranteed section or in the next game at the end. You may make the transition.

It may be suggested or notified that the guarantee section is in progress or that the end condition of the guarantee section is satisfied. In such a case, it becomes easy to understand that it is an opportunity after the end of ART (“GG”), the decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed for the player, and the operating rate of the gaming machine can be increased. For example, the display unit 100 may be clearly notified by displaying "chance state continuation confirmed 20 games remaining" or the like, or a stage or the like suggesting that ART ("GG") is likely to win is displayed. You may try to produce a different effect. Further, the production may be executed in the production mode dedicated to the guaranteed section by the production execution means such as video, sound, and lamp.

Regarding the possibility of the guarantee section, a setting difference may be provided, and the degree of advantage in the decision regarding the guarantee section may be different based on the set value. For example, when determining the number of games in the guaranteed section by lottery, setting 1 is set to 20 games on average, setting 6 is set to 50 games on average, and the higher the setting, the more ART (“GG”). The specification may be such that pullback (winning the ART again immediately after the ART is completed) is likely to occur. In such a case, the player can surely detect the end of the advantageous section by confirming that the state indicator 147b is turned off, and can surely grasp the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of ART. Furthermore, the player can estimate the set value according to the number of games in the advantageous section after the end of the ART, and even if the number of balls to be played after the end of the ART is reduced, the expected value of the set value and the pullback can be expected. By playing the game while holding the game, the fun of the game can be enhanced.

Further, as a modification of the fourth embodiment, for example, the flow of the gaming state as shown in FIG. 165 may be used, and the ball ejection state as shown in FIG. 147 may be applied to such a gaming state. ..

Further, in the fourth embodiment, it has been described that the lighting / non-lighting state of the advantageous section lamp (state indicator 147b) corresponds to the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section (normal section), but is shown in FIG. 166, for example. As described above, a standby section related to a bonus (BB or the like with no setting difference) may be set as a section in the middle of transitioning from a non-advantageous section (normal section) to an advantageous section.

The standby section means a section in which the advantageous section lamp (status indicator 147b) is not turned on until the bonus is won, even if the advantageous section is won when the bonus is won without any setting difference. That is, from the winning of the bonus to the winning, the advantageous section lamp is not lit and the standby section is set, and when the bonus is won, the advantageous section lamp is lit and the advantageous section progresses.

For such a waiting section, for example, the waiting section flag is set by winning "BB1 + watermelon", and the waiting section progresses until the winning of BB1, while the waiting section flag is not set by winning "BB1 + cherry", and the winning section is not set. It is also possible to determine whether or not to set the waiting section for each flag so that the advantageous section is started without going through the waiting section on the condition of. However, it is desirable not to distinguish whether the standby section is set or not with the same flag. As described above, in the bonus corresponding to the setting of the waiting section, the advantageous section lamp can be turned off as the waiting section during the bonus carry-over even if the winning of the bonus is won and the advantageous section is won at the same time.

<Modification example>
In the examples and specification examples so far, the concept that the advantageous section is only one advantageous section is premised, and by devising a state in which the batting order combination instruction (navigation) is likely to occur and a state in which it is difficult to occur. I have explained the invention that enhances the fun of the game while increasing the degree of whiteness of the ball-out design. From here, by further subdividing the concept of advantageous sections, we will organize the game characteristics and
It is also possible to improve the efficiency of development. Hereinafter, as an example, a proposal will be described in which a section in which the number of balls is less likely to increase is defined as an “directing section” and a section in which the number of balls is likely to increase is defined as an “increased section”.

First, as a premise, each section is defined as follows.
Normal section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (instruction is optional), and the transition rate to the production section or increase section is set at a rate of 1.
Production section: A section in which the payout rate does not exceed 1 (instruction is optional), and the transition rate to other production sections or increase sections is the same as in the normal section, but the transition destination (processing related to the instruction function). Sections with different contents). Included in the advantageous section.
Increased section: This is the section where the number of game medals increases (the ball output rate does not always exceed 1), and unlike the normal section and the production section, instructions are given for each state of the increased section predetermined in the increased section. A section in which processing related to functions can be performed freely. Included in the advantageous section.
On the premise of this definition, it is preferable that the advantageous section lamp is turned on when the production section or the increasing section is won and the ball output rate exceeds 1, and is turned off when the ball is initialized. .. By doing so, the situation in which the number of medals does not increase even though the advantageous section lamp is lit does not occur. Therefore, at least the number of medals increases, so that the gaming machine has specifications that are easy for the player to understand.
Further, when the increasing section is terminated, the fairness among the players can be ensured by initializing the parameters related to the performance related to the instruction function and shifting to the normal section. Then, as in the case of winning the advantageous section continuous lottery at the end of the above-mentioned "GG", in the game state where the player shifts to the production section after the increase section and expects the "GG" consecutive villa, the number of balls is reduced. Even so, the specifications may be made from the viewpoint that the advantageous section lamp is maintained in the lit state and the player does not stop the game in a state where "hits" may be continuous.

The fact that the transition ratio (winning probability) to another production section or increase section is the same and the transition destination (contents of processing related to the instruction function) is different refers to the following game specifications as an example.
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in the normal section Winning probability of the advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100
Transition destination distribution production section (CZ) 75% increase section (ART) 25%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (CZ) approx. 1/133 Increase section (ART) approx. 1/400
1: Advantageous section transition lottery in the production section (CZ) Winning probability of advantageous section transition lottery: 1/100 This winning probability 1/100 is common and the transition ratio is the same.
Transition destination distribution Production section (upper CZ) 10% Increase section (ART) 90%
Transition occurrence probability Production section (upper CZ) Approx. 1/1000 Increase section (ART) Approx. 1/111
In this way, by changing the distribution of the transition destination, while referring to the same value for the winning coefficient of the advantageous section lottery, the advantageous section can be shifted to an increasing section where medals increase, such as "GG". Like "normal advantage" and "JOT", although the increase in medals can not be expected so much, it is possible to widen the distribution of whether to make it a chance state of GG winning, and the overall processing flow is simplified. At the same time, it is possible to create various transition variations of the gaming state.
If the production section is too long, the player will be forced to play the game excessively without expecting an increase in medals, which may cause discomfort to the player. Therefore, for example, the number of games should be 16 or less, or 32. A certain number of games may be set as an upper limit, such as a game. In addition, the number of games that function as an index that does not excessively restrain the player, such as when the number of medals consumed reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50) or when the number of times the batting order bell is established reaches a predetermined number (for example, 8 times). It may be set as the end condition of the effect section by referring to the parameters other than.

In the above-described embodiment, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination with no setting difference, but in this modified example, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed based on the determination of the internal winning combination with the setting difference. Is supposed to be done. Even in this case, there is no setting difference in the lottery table related to the advantageous section. By referring to the lottery table common to all settings, the difference in the payout rate and the ART occurrence rate are based on the difference in the winning probability of the internal winning combination. To make a difference. As a result, it is possible to create a difference in the ball output rate and an ART occurrence rate without increasing the capacity of the lottery table itself related to the advantageous section.

If the "directing section" is won during the bonus operation, it is desirable to turn on the advantageous section lamp because the advantageous section, the directing section, and the bonus operation can be expected to increase the number of game medals. You can enjoy the game while paying attention to the advantageous section ramp without digesting work while the bonus is operating. In this case, if the player temporarily shifts to the production section (CZ, etc.) after the bonus, the advantageous section lamp is turned off when the bonus ends. When shifting to an increasing section (ART, etc.) after the bonus, it is advisable to keep the advantageous section lamp lit as it is.
During the so-called ART preparation to shift RT to high RT, it is definitely confirmed that the right to shift to ART, which is very advantageous for the player, has already been granted, although the ball output rate does not necessarily exceed 1. By notifying, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the game is inadvertently stopped while leaving the ART right.

In addition to the internal winning combination, lottery and determination related to the advantageous section may be performed based on the display appearance (also referred to as symbol combination, winning result, result display) on the effective line of the main reel. For example, there is an internal winning combination A that can win either a 3-card combination or a 1-card combination depending on the timing of pressing. In this case, if the 3-card combination wins, the advantageous section-related lottery will not be performed, or if the 1-card combination wins, the lottery will be performed under more disadvantageous conditions than if the 1-card combination wins. By recommending a batting method that intentionally pushes the player to avoid winning the 3-card role, as a condition that is more favorable than when the 3-card role wins, the base at normal times is For players who choose a low batting method, the specifications can be such that ART is easy to win.
With such specifications, you can enjoy a long game with a game that makes it difficult to win ART instead of pushing the role of 3 cards in normal times and not reducing the number of medals so much, or push the role of 1 card in normal times. Then, instead of the speed at which medals are reduced is fast, it is easy for the player to win the ART, which means that the game can be enjoyed for a short period of time, or the player can arbitrarily select, and the range of the game can be expanded.
It should be noted that the above is just an example, and it is not limited to the one that requires a small number of payouts such as a single role, but the RT transition roll (small role spilled eye or fall replay) that shifts to an RT with a low degree of advantage by pushing. ) May be displayed, or the lottery related to the advantageous section may be performed under better conditions than when the advantageous display result is derived.
To summarize this idea, when a predetermined internal winning combination whose display result differs depending on the stop operation mode is determined, it is most advantageous in terms of the benefit of winning judgment for granting a game value (medal), transitioning RT, or operating a bonus. It is more advantageous than when a predetermined advantageous section-related lottery is performed based on the derivation of the display result that is not, or the lottery content of the advantageous section-related lottery is derived with the most advantageous display result regarding the benefit of the payment judgment. When it comes to being done in, it can be expressed.

By overlapping and determining the internal winning combination so that the number of medals is substantially reduced during some bonus operations, the number of cards increased per game during ART is increased to about 3 by the amount of the reduced bonus. There is no method, and during the bonus operation, only the non-net increase is established and the net increase is 0, so the bonus is used in the game machine type test to offset the speed of increase during ART and adapt it. Specifications are also possible. In addition, as a lottery related to the advantageous section inside the bonus, the normal section, the production section, and the advantageous section also stay at the RT inside the bonus, and by increasing the small winning probability, the bonus that the bonus is extremely difficult to win can be contained. Various specifications may be adopted according to the modified example to provide a game machine having an appropriate ball ejection speed, which is highly desired by players and playgrounds.
In addition, since some players feel that gambling is high when the ball ejection speed is high, it is necessary to shorten the number of limiter games from 1500 games to 1200 games to appropriately suppress gambling and prevent so-called immersiveness. Consideration may be given from the viewpoint.
Further, regarding the number of games that is a condition for activating the limiter, the count may be started from the start of the advantageous section including the effect section, or may be started from the start of the increase section. In addition, in the game of the day, the difference other than the advantageous section is activated, such as activating the limiter when 3000 medals increase from the starting point of the difference number at the time when the most negative point is seen from the customer side. With reference to the situation such as the number of medals, the gambling may be suppressed by a limiter according to factors other than the number of games.

[Appendix 1]
The gaming machines in Appendix 1 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted by a player (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a device for facilitating the design related to so-called ball ejection, a gaming machine in which the internal winning combination is duplicated so that the ball ejection rate is less than 1 in some bonus states is known. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202331). In addition, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, there is also a game machine elaborately designed by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. It is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, it is premised that the player mainly plays in the bonus carry-over state, and the pleasure of winning the ball with the bonus winning is lost. Further, the gaming machine of Patent Document 2 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and a game machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and increasing the degree of freedom in ball ejection design by a method different from the conventional one. The purpose is to provide.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of "GG" (ART)) in which the possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means is higher than that of the advantageous state.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
In the first advantageous state, a notification suppression state (for example, a bell navigation non-occurrence state) in which notification is not performed by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the specific combination It has a notification permissible state (for example, a bell navigation generation possible state) in which notification by the operation mode notification means is permitted in the unit game determined as the internal winning combination.
The notification is suppressed from the start of the first advantageous state until a specific condition (for example, the passage of a predetermined number of games (100 G)) is satisfied.

According to such a configuration, a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state having different possibilities of notification are provided, and the first advantageous state is basically terminated as a notification suppression state until a specific condition is satisfied. Therefore, by appropriately setting such a specific condition, it is possible to suppress the notification of the operation mode and balance the advantages between the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom in ball ejection design while making it easier to understand.

A preferred embodiment of the present invention is
The specific condition is that a predetermined number of unit games (for example, 100G) are executed, and the predetermined number of times is larger than the average number of unit games until the predetermined bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is characterized by many.

According to such a game machine, there is a high possibility that a predetermined bonus combination will be determined and a determination result of ending the advantageous state will be obtained by the time the specific condition is satisfied, so that the advantageous balance between the advantageous state and the bonus will be obtained. Can be properly planned.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and increasing the degree of freedom in ball ejection design by a method different from the conventional method.

[Appendix 2]
The gaming machines in Appendix 2 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted by a player (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate game machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. In addition, since the precursory production ends without any profit being obtained, there is a risk that the interest of the game will decline.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of easily grasping an advantageous state for a player and enhancing the interest of the game.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of "GG" (ART)) that can shift from one advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state is provided.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
The modes in the first advantageous state include the first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "preparation for heaven" in the normal mode) and the second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven", and "special" in the normal mode. , "Next time precursor") and at least
The first mode and the second mode are characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "GG") is different.

According to such a configuration, the first advantageous state and the second advantageous state having different possibility of notification are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the first mode and the first mode having different possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state are provided. Since the two modes are provided, the player can play the game while expecting to stay in either mode and shift to the second advantageous state, and while making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, while making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that makes it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state and enhances the interest of the game.

[Appendix 3]
The gaming machines in Appendix 3 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted by a player (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate game machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easier for the player to grasp an advantageous state, reduces the risk of the player overlooking it, and makes the game state related to the AT lottery various. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control hand (for example, main control board 71) stage that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be executed. Board 71) and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of "GG" (ART)) that can shift from one advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
A mode control means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of controlling a mode (for example, a normal mode) in the first advantageous state is provided.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
The modes in the first advantageous state include the first mode (for example, "low accuracy" and "preparation for heaven" in the normal mode) and the second mode (for example, "heaven", "super heaven", and "special" in the normal mode. , "Next time precursor") and at least
The second mode is more likely to shift to the second advantageous state than the first mode.
The general state is characterized in that the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state (for example, the winning probability of "GG") is higher than that of the first mode.

According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and in the first advantageous state, the state shifts to the second advantageous state. A first mode and a second mode are provided, which have different possibilities. Then, since the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the general state is higher than the possibility of shifting to the second advantageous state in the first mode of the first advantageous state, the player may be notified. Even in a general state where it is not possible, the game can be played while expecting a transition to the second advantageous state, making it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, and reducing the risk of the player overlooking the so-called AT. It is possible to make various game states related to lottery.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 4]
The game machines of Appendix 4 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted by a player (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate game machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easier for the player to grasp an advantageous state, reduces the risk of the player overlooking it, and makes the game state related to the AT lottery various. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, main control) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means can be executed and a general state (for example, a normal section) in which notification by the operation mode notification means cannot be executed. Board 71) and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the advantageous state, a first advantageous state (for example, a "normally advantageous" state) capable of being notified by the operation mode notification means when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the advantageous section transition lottery is won) and the first advantageous state. It has at least a second advantageous state (for example, a state of "GG" (ART)) that can shift from one advantageous state and has a higher possibility of notification by the operation mode notification means than the first advantageous state.
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
When the end condition of the second advantageous state (for example, the number of games of "GG" (ART) is 0) is satisfied, a determination as to whether to shift to the first advantageous state or the general state (for example,). It is characterized in that it is possible to execute an advantageous section end lottery at the end.

According to such a configuration, a general state in which notification is not performed and a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the possibility of notification is different are provided, and in the advantageous state, a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination. The notification is given, or the result display corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination is derived, or after satisfying either one, it may be shifted to the general state depending on the result of the end judgment, while the notification At the end of the second advantageous state, which is more likely, the player may be shifted to the first advantageous state and the advantageous state may continue without shifting to the general state, so that the player can grasp the advantageous state. It is possible to make the game state related to the so-called AT lottery various, while making it easier to make the game easier and reducing the risk that the player will miss it.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

[Appendix 5]
The gaming machines of Appendix 5 are as follows.

[Background technology]
Conventionally, when a game medium such as a medal or a coin is inserted by a player (hereinafter referred to as "insertion operation") and the start lever is operated (hereinafter referred to as "start operation"), a plurality of symbols are respectively inserted. When the rotation of the plurality of reels arranged on the surface of the is started and the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result is obtained. There is known a game machine called a so-called pachislot machine, which is given a privilege according to the number of reels.

In such a game machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is driven and controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled to stop the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the internal winning combination.

In this type of gaming machine, as a precursory effect of whether or not the player has won the AT (assist time), which is in an advantageous state for the player, the taste is set by a complicated production mode mainly assuming a highly skilled player. Elaborate game machines are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-16805).

[Outline of Invention]
[Problems to be solved by the invention]
However, the gaming machine of Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult for an unskilled person to grasp what kind of state is advantageous because the production mode and specifications are complicated. For example, if the player finishes the game without noticing it even though the winning of the AT is confirmed internally, the player cannot enjoy the profit that should be originally obtained.

The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and makes it easier for the player to grasp an advantageous state, reduces the risk of the player overlooking it, and makes the game state related to the AT lottery various. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can be played.

[Means to solve problems]
In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machines.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A plurality of variable display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of identification information, and
A plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 7L, 7C, 7R) that can be stopped by the player corresponding to the plurality of variable display means, and
A variable control means (for example, a main control board 71) that variablely displays the plurality of variable display means based on the establishment of a start condition, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main control board 71) capable of determining an internal winning combination based on the establishment of the start condition, and
The result display can be derived by stopping the variable display of the plurality of variable display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the stopping operation via the plurality of stopping operating means. Stop control means (for example, main control board 71) and
An RT control means (for example, a main control board 71) that can be controlled by any of a plurality of RTs having different winning probabilities of at least one type of replay combination (for example, replay) as the internal winning combination.
An operation mode notification means (for example, a sub-control board 72 and a notification lamp 147a) capable of notifying an operation mode for the plurality of stop operation means which is advantageous for the player.
A state control means (for example, the main control board 71) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) capable of executing notification by the operation mode notification means, and
The advantageous state notification means (for example, the state indicator 147b) for notifying the advantageous state, and
(For example, pachislot machine 1)
As the internal winning combination that can be determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a result display advantageous to the plurality of variable display means is derived when a stop operation is performed on the plurality of stop operating means in a specific operation mode. A specific combination (for example, a push order bell) capable of deriving a result display different from the advantageous result display to the plurality of variable display means when the stop operation is performed in an operation mode different from the specific operation mode. Has a predetermined bonus role (eg MB) and
The state control means is a result in which the specific combination is notified by the operation mode notification means in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, or the result corresponding to the predetermined bonus combination in the plurality of variable display means. It is possible to execute an end determination (for example, an advantageous section end lottery) for determining whether or not to end the advantageous state after satisfying at least one of the indications derived.
The RT control means can be controlled to a specific RT (for example, RT0) when the setting is changed.
The advantageous state determined to be controlled by the specific RT may be more advantageous to the player than the advantageous state determined to be controlled by an RT other than the specific RT. It is characterized by being expensive.

According to such a configuration, an advantageous state in which notification can be executed is provided, and in the advantageous state, a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and notification is performed, or a result display corresponding to a predetermined bonus combination is displayed. After being derived or satisfying either one, it may be terminated depending on the result of the end determination, but when the setting is changed, the game state is controlled to a specific RT, which is an advantageous state. Since there is a high possibility that the degree of advantage will be higher than that, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the advantageous state, reduce the risk of the player overlooking it, and make the game state related to the so-called AT lottery various. it can.

[Effect of the invention]
According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of making it easy for a player to grasp an advantageous state, reducing the risk of the player overlooking it, and making the gaming state related to AT lottery various. it can.

1 ... Pachislot machine, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4L, 4C, 4R ... Display window, 7L, 7C, 7R ... Stop button, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 100 ... Display unit, 147b ... Status indicator

Claims (2)

A role-determining means that can determine the winning role from multiple roles,
A transition decision means for making decisions regarding the transition of the gaming state, and
A state control means for shifting the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state based on the predetermined decision made by the transition determining means, and
A notification means capable of notifying the mode of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and
An output means that can output a signal to the outside and
With
When the notification target combination, which is the notification target combination, is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state, the notification means can notify the mode of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player.
The second game state is a game state in which one or a plurality of sets of unit notification games can be performed with a period until a predetermined end condition is satisfied as one set.
When the execution of the unit notification game of the next set is permitted, the state control means can start the unit notification game of the next set after the unit notification game of one set is completed.
Further, the state control means may shift from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a predetermined period has elapsed since the predetermined determination was made by the transition determining means.
In the predetermined period, it is possible to execute the determination regarding the degree of advantage of the second gaming state that is started after the end of the predetermined period.
The output means can output a predetermined signal to the outside when the predetermined period elapses after the predetermined determination is made by the transition determination means, and the state control means starts the next set of unit notification games. A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined signal can be output to the outside when the signal is played. The output means outputs different signals to the outside when the predetermined period elapses after the predetermined determination is made by the transition determination means and when the unit notification game of the next set is started by the state control means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above.

Images